This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?
Diplomarbeit
Implementation of a WiMAX simulator
in Simulink
Ausgeführt zum Zwecke der Erlangung des akademischen Grades eines
DiplomIngenieurs unter Leitung von
Univ.Prof. Dipl.Ing. Dr.techn. Markus Rupp
Dipl.Ing. Christian Mehlführer
E389
Institut für Nachrichtentechnik und Hochfrequenztechnik
eingereicht an der Technischen Universität Wien
Fakultät für Elektrotechnik und Informationstechnik
von
Amalia Roca
Matrikelnr.: 0526852
San Antonio 4, 12596 Torreblanca
Castellón  Spain
Vienna, February 2007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I certify that the work presented in this diploma thesis was done by myself
and the work of other authors is properly cited.
Amalia Roca
Vienna, February 2007
i
Acknowledgements
I would like to acknowledge many people who helped me during the course
of this work, supporting it in one way or another. First and foremost, my
appreciation and thanks go to my family. In particular, I can never thank my
parents enough for their commitment, sacriﬁce, and overalls, their consistent
encouragement and support.
I wish to express my gratitude to my supervisor, Christian Mehlführer,
for his seasoned guidance. Without his helpful suggestions this thesis could
not be done. I also want to thank the people I met during my stay in Vienna
and my colleagues at UPV for their friendship, help, and cheerfulness. I
could not possibly forget M.J, and C. and the rest of A.C. Thank you for
your support when my conﬁdence was down.
Last, but not least, I want to mention A.F., who would be very proud of
me to see that, at the end, all the eﬀorts have their recompense.
ii
Abstract
In the last few years, the telecommunication industries’ development has
focused on an intensive use of broadband systems, which are characterized by
high quality features. For this issue, new technologies with high transmission
abilities have been designed. The broadband wireless access has become the
best way to meet escalating business demand for rapid internet connection
and integrated "triple play" services. In addition to not only topographic
but also technological limitations, wireless solution alternatives have been
found. That is the very base of the WiMAX concept: a wireless transmission
infrastructure that allows a fast deployment as well as low maintenance costs.
Based on the IEEE 802.162004 standard, WiMAX allows for an eﬃcient use
of bandwidth in a wide frequency range, and can be used as a last mile
solution for broadband internet access.
The aim of this diploma thesis is to implement all compulsory features of
the WiMAX OFDM physical layer speciﬁed in IEEE 802.162004 in Matlab
Simulink. Optional spacetime coding for more than one transmit antenna is
implemented to allow performance investigations in various MIMO scenarios.
Likewise, a maximum ratio combining diversity scheme is implemented in the
receiver for the same purpose. In order to combat the temporal variations in
quality on a multipath fading channel, an adaptive modulation and coding
technique is used. This technique employs multiple modulation and coding
schemes to instantaneously adapt to the variations in the channel SNR, thus
maximizing the system throughput and improving BER performance.
The thesis gives an overview about the WiMAX standard and studies
the performance of a WiMAX transmitter and receiver, also covering the
performance gains of some optional features, such as the MIMO extension.
The inﬂuence of these parts on the system performance is shown and analyzed
in great detail in simulation results.
iii
Contents
1 Introduction 1
1.1 The WiMAX standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1.1 Technical overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1.2 Relationship with other wireless technologies . . . . . . 8
1.2 Outline of the thesis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2 Transmitter 14
2.1 Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.2 Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.2.1 ReedSolomon encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.2.2 Convolutional encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.2.3 Puncturing process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.2.4 Interleaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.3 Modulation mapper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.4 Pilot symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.5 Training sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.6 Assembler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.7 The guard bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.8 Inverse Fast Fourier Transform algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.9 The cyclic preﬁx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3 Channel 30
3.1 Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.2 Fading channel models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.2.1 Description of the fading channel . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.2.2 Flat fading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.2.3 Frequencyselective fading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.2.4 Channel model implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
iv
3.3 The IMETRA channel model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
4 Receiver 43
4.1 Fast Fourier Transform algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4.2 Removing the guard bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4.3 Disassembler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4.4 Channel estimator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4.5 Demapper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4.5.1 Hard Demapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4.5.2 Soft demapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4.6 Decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4.6.1 Deinterleaving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4.6.2 Inserting zeros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4.6.3 Viterbi decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4.6.4 ReedSolomon decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
5 MIMO transmission 53
5.1 MIMO communications theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
5.1.1 The MIMO channel model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
5.1.2 SpaceTime Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
5.1.3 Maximum Ratio Combining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
5.2 MIMO implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
5.2.1 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
5.2.2 Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
6 Adaptive Modulation and Coding 66
6.1 Theory on the AMC technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
6.1.1 Introduction to adaptive transmission mechanisms . . . 66
6.1.2 Performance of the AMC scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
6.2 AMC implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
6.2.1 SNR estimation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
6.2.2 The AMC block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
6.2.3 Coding and decoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
7 Simulation results 73
7.1 A single antenna transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
7.1.1 Modulation schemes and coding rates . . . . . . . . . . 74
7.1.2 Types of channel fading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
v
7.1.3 Demapping and channel estimation . . . . . . . . . . . 77
7.1.4 AMC and its eﬀects in the results . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
7.2 Multiple antenna transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
7.2.1 SISO, SIMO, MISO, and MIMO systems . . . . . . . . 83
7.2.2 Channel model scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
8 Conclusion 86
A OFDM theory 89
A.1 Multicarrier modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
A.2 Orthogonality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
A.3 Cyclic Preﬁx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
A.4 The OFDM system model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
A.5 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
B Derivation of formulas 95
B.1 Description of the correlation matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
B.2 Estimation of the transmitted symbols when using STC . . . . 97
B.2.1 Alamouti with one receive antenna . . . . . . . . . . . 97
B.2.2 Alamouti with two receive antennas . . . . . . . . . . . 99
C Parameters of the simulator 101
C.1 Parameters description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
C.1.1 OFDM symbol description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
C.1.2 Transmission parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
C.1.3 Channel parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
C.1.4 Parameter values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
C.2 WiMAX vs. WiFi simulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
D WiMAX simulator block diagram 107
E Abbreviations and Symbols 110
E.1 List of abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
E.2 List of symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Bibliography 120
vi
Chapter 1
Introduction
The experienced growth in the use of digital networks has led to the need
for the design of new communication networks with higher capacity. The
telecommunication industry is also changing, with a demand for a greater
range of services, such as video conferences, or applications with multimedia
contents. The increased reliance on computer networking and the Internet
has resulted in a wider demand for connectivity to be provided "any where,
any time", leading to a rise in the requirements for higher capacity and high
reliability broadband wireless telecommunication systems.
Broadband availability brings high performance connectivity to over a
billion users worldwide, thus developing new wireless broadband standards
and technologies that will rapidly span wireless coverage. Wireless digital
communications are an emerging ﬁeld that has experienced an spectacular
expansion during the last several years. Moreover, the huge uptake rate of
mobile phone technology, WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network) and the
exponential growth of Internet have resulted in an increased demand for new
methods of obtaining high capacity wireless networks [1].
Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access, known as WiMAX, is
a wireless networking standard which aims for addressing interoperability
across IEEE
1
802.16 standardbased products. WiMAX deﬁnes a WMAN
2
,
a kind of a huge hotspot that provides interoperable broadband wireless
connectivity to ﬁxed, portable, and nomadic users. It allows communications
which have no direct visibility, coming up as an alternative connection for
cable, DSL
3
, and T1/E1 systems, as well as a possible transport network for
WiFi
4
hotspots, thus becoming a solution to develop broadband industry
1
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
2
Wireless Metropolitan Area Network
3
Digital Subscriber Line
4
WirelessFidelity, name given to WLAN IEEE 802.11b standardbased products.
1
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION 2
platforms. Likewise, products based on WiMAX technology can be combined
with other technologies to oﬀer broadband access in many of the possible
scenarios of utilization, as shown in Figure 1.0  1, where examples of the
deployment of WiMAX systems are illustrated.
WiMAX will substitute other broadband technologies competing in the
same segment and will become an excellent solution for the deployment of
the wellknown last mile infrastructures in places where it is very diﬃcult
to get with other technologies, such as cable or DSL, and where the costs of
deployment and maintenance of such technologies would not be proﬁtable. In
this way, WiMAX will connect rural areas in developing countries as well as
underserved metropolitan areas. It can even be used to deliver backhaul for
carrier structures, enterprise campus, and WiFi hotspots. WiMAX oﬀers a
good solution for these challenges because it provides a costeﬀective, rapidly
deployable solution [2].
Additionally, WiMAX will represent a serious competitor to 3G (Third
Generation) cellular systems as high speed mobile data applications will be
achieved with the 802.16e speciﬁcation.
Figure 1.0  1: Possible scenarios for the deployment of WiMAX.
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION 3
1.1 The WiMAX standard
The IEEE 802.16 standard was ﬁrstly designed to address communications
with direct visibility in the frequency band from 10 to 66 GHz. Due to the
fact that nonlineofsight transmissions are diﬃcult when communicating at
high frequencies, the amendment 802.16a was speciﬁed for working in a lower
frequency band, between 2 and 11 GHz. The IEEE 802.16d speciﬁcation is
a variation of the ﬁxed standard (IEEE 802.16a) with the main advantage of
optimizing the power consumption of the mobile devices. The last revision
of this speciﬁcation is better known as IEEE 802.162004 [3].
On the other hand, the IEEE 802.16e standard is an amendment to the
802.162004 base speciﬁcation with the aim of targeting the mobile market
by adding portability.
WiMAX standardbased products are designed to work not only with
IEEE 802.162004 but also with the IEEE 802.16e speciﬁcation. While the
802.162004 is primarily intended for stationary transmission, the 802.16e is
oriented to both stationary and mobile deployments.
1.1.1 Technical overview
The WiMAX standard deﬁnes the air interface for the IEEE 802.162004
speciﬁcation working in the frequency band 211 GHz. This air interface
includes the deﬁnition of the medium access control (MAC) and the physical
(PHY) layers.
Medium Access Control (MAC) layer
Some functions are associated with providing service to subscribers. They
include transmitting data in frames and controlling the access to the shared
wireless medium. The medium access control (MAC) layer, which is situated
above the physical layer, groups the mentioned functions.
The original MAC is enhanced to accommodate multiple physical layer
speciﬁcations and services, addressing the needs for diﬀerent environments.
It is generally designed to work with pointtomultipoint topology networks,
with a base station controlling independent sectors simultaneously. Access
and bandwidth allocation algorithms must be able to accommodate hundreds
of terminals per channel, with terminals that may be shared by multiple end
users. Therefore, the MAC protocol deﬁnes how and when a base station (BS)
or a subscriber station (SS) may initiate the transmission on the channel.
In the downstream direction there is only one transmitter, and the MAC
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION 4
Feature Beneﬁt
TDM/TDMA scheduled • Eﬃcient bandwidth usage.
uplink/downlink frames
Scalable from one to hundreds • Allows cost eﬀective deployments by
of subscribers supporting enough subscribers to deliver
a robust business case.
Connectionoriented • Per connection QoS.
• Faster packet routing and forwarding.
QoS support • Low latency for delay sensitive services
(TDM, Voice, VoIP).
• Optimal transport for VBR
6
traﬃc (video).
• Data priorization.
Automatic retransmission • Improves endtoend performance by
request (ARQ) hiding RF layer induced errors from
upper layer protocols.
Support for adaptive • Enables highest data rates allowed by
modulation channel conditions, exploiting system
capacity.
Security and encryption • Protects user privacy.
(TripleDES)
Automatic power control • Enables cellular deployments by
minimizing selfinterference.
Table 1.1  1: 802.162004 MAC features.
protocol is quite simple using TDM
5
to multiplex the data. However, in the
upstream direction, where multiple SSs compete for accessing to the medium,
the MAC protocol applies a time division multiple access (TDMA) technique,
thus providing an eﬃcient use of the bandwidth.
The services required by the multiple users are varied, including voice
and data, Internet protocol (IP) connectivity, and voice over IP (VoIP). In
order to support this variety of services, the MAC layer must accommodate
both continuous and bursty traﬃc, adapting the data velocities and delays
to the needs of each service. Additionally, mechanisms in the MAC provide
for diﬀerentiated quality of service (QoS) supporting the needs of various
applications.
Issues of transport eﬃciency are also addressed. Both modulation and
coding schemes are speciﬁed in a burst proﬁle that is adjusted adaptively for
each burst to each subscriber station, making the use of bandwidth eﬃcient,
providing maximum data rates, and improving the capacity of the system.
The requestgrant mechanism is designed to be scalable, eﬃcient, and self
5
Time Division Multiplexing
6
Variable Bit Rate
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION 5
correcting, allowing the system a scalability from one to hundreds of users.
Another feature that improves the transmission performance is the automatic
repeat request (ARQ) as well as the support for mesh topology rather than
only pointtomultipoint network architectures. The possibility of working
with mesh topologies allows direct communication between SSs, enhancing
this way the scalability of the system. The standard also supports automatic
power control, and security and encryption mechanisms. Further information
about the MAC features can be found in [4] and [5].
Physical (PHY) layer
The IEEE 802.162004 standard deﬁnes three diﬀerent PHYs that can be
used in conjunction with the MAC layer to provide a reliable endtoend
link. These PHY speciﬁcations are:
• A single carrier (SC) modulated air interface.
• A 256point FFT OFDM
7
multiplexing scheme.
• A 2048point FFT OFDMA
8
scheme.
While the SC air interface is used for lineofsight (LoS) transmissions,
the two OFDMbased systems are more suitable for non lineofsight (NLoS)
operations due to the simplicity of the equalization process for multicarrier
signals. The ﬁxed WiMAX standard deﬁnes proﬁles using the 256point
FFT OFDM PHY layer speciﬁcation. Furthermore, ﬁxed WiMAX systems
provide up to 5 km of service area allowing transmissions with a maximum
data rate up to 70 Mbps in a 20 MHz channel bandwith, and oﬀer the users
a broadband connectivity without needing a direct lineofsight to the base
station.
The main features of the mentioned ﬁxed WiMAX are detailed next:
• Use of an OFDM modulation scheme, which allows the transmission
of multiple signals using diﬀerent subcarriers simultaneously. Because
the OFDM waveform is composed of multiple narrowband orthogonal
carriers, selective fading is localized to a subset of carriers that are
relatively easy to equalize.
• Design of an adaptive modulation and coding mechanism that depends
on channel and interference conditions. It adjusts the modulation
method almost instantaneously for optimum data transfer, thus making
a most eﬃcient use of the bandwidth.
7
Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing
8
Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION 6
• Support of both time and frequency division duplexing formats, FDD
and TDD, allowing the system to be adapted to the regulations in
diﬀerent countries.
• Robust FEC
9
techniques, used to detect and correct errors in order to
improve throughput. The FEC scheme is implemented with a Reed
Solomon encoder concatenated with a convolutional one, and followed
by an interleaver. Optional support of block turbo coding (BTC) and
convolutional turbo coding (CTC) can be implemented.
• Use of ﬂexible channel bandwidths, comprised from 1.25 to 20 MHz,
thus providing the necessary ﬂexibility to operate in many diﬀerent
frequency bands with varying channel requirements around the world.
This ﬂexibility facilitates transmissions over longer ranges and from
diﬀerent types of subscriber platforms. In addition, it is also crucial
for cell planning, especially in the licensed spectrum.
• Optional support of both transmit and receive diversity to enhance
performance in fading environments through spatial diversity, allowing
the system to increase capacity. The transmitter implements space
time coding (STC) to provide transmit source independence, reducing
the fade margin requirement, and combating interference. The receiver,
however, uses maximum ratio combining (MRC) techniques to improve
the availability of the system.
• Design of a dynamic frequency selection (DFS) mechanism to minimize
inteferences.
• Optional support of smart antennas, whose beams can steer their focus
to a particular direction or directions always pointing at the receiver,
and consequently, avoiding interference between adjacent channels, and
increasing the spectral density and the SNR. There are two basic types
of smart antennas, those with multiple beam (directional antennas),
and those known as adaptive antenna systems (AAS). The ﬁrst ones
can use either a ﬁxed number of beams choosing the most suitable
for the transmission or an steering beam to the desired antenna. The
second type works with multielement antennas with a varying beam
pattern. These smart antennas are becoming a good alternative for
BWA
10
deployments.
9
Forward Error Correction
10
Broadband Wireless Access
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION 7
Feature
11
Beneﬁt
256point FFT OFDM • Simple equalization of multipath channels in
waveform outdoor LoS and NLoS environments.
Adaptive modulation and variable • Ensures a robust RF link while maximizing
error correction encoding the number of bits per second for each
per radio frequency (RF) burst subscriber unit.
TDD and FDD duplexing • Addresses varying worldwide regulations when
support one or both may be allowed.
Flexible channel sizes • Provides the necessary ﬂexibility to operate
(from 1.25 to 20 MHz) in many diﬀerent frequency bands with
varying requirements around the world.
DFS support • Minimizes interference between adjacent
channels.
Designed to support AAS • Smart antennas are fast becoming more
aﬀordable, and as these costs come down,
their ability to suppress interference and
increase system gain is more important
to BWA deployments.
TDM and FDM support • Allows interoperability between cellular
systems (TDM) and wireless systems (FDM).
Designed to support • Implemented in DL to increase diversity
multipleinput multipleoutput and capacity.
(MIMO) schemes • STC algorithms at the transmitter, MRC
at the receiver.
Table 1.1  2: 802.162004 PHY features.
• Implementation of channel quality measurements which help in the
selection and assignment of the adaptive burst proﬁles.
• Support of both time and frequency division multiplexing formats (TDM
and FDM), to allow interoperability between cellular systems working
with TDM, and wireless systems that use FDM.
The mobile WiMAX (IEEE 802.16e)
12
uses the 2048point FFT OFDMA
PHY speciﬁcation. It provides a service area coverage from 1.6 to 5 km,
allowing transmission rates of 5 Mbps in a 5 MHz channel bandwidth, and
with a user maximum speed below 100 km/h. It presents the same features
as those of the ﬁxed WiMAX speciﬁcation that have been already mentioned.
However, other features such as handoﬀs and powersaving mechanisms are
added to oﬀer a reliable communication. Battery life and handoﬀ are two
critical issues for mobile applications. On one hand, maximizing battery life
11
All these features are in great detail explained in [5].
12
A complete description of the mobile WiMAX can be found in [6].
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION 8
implies minimizing the mobile station (MS) power usage. On the other hand,
handoﬀ and handovers are necessary to enable the MS to switch from one
BS to another at vehicular speeds without interrupting the connection.
The main features of the initial IEEE 802.16 standard, and those of the
socalled ﬁxed and mobile WiMAX, 802.162004 and 802.16e respectively, are
summarized in the following chart:
802.16 802.162004 802.16e
Spectrum 1066 GHz < 11 GHz < 6 GHz
Maximum 32134 Mbps up to 70 Mbps up to 15 Mbps
data rate (28 MHz channel) (20 MHz channel) (5 MHz channel)
Alignment LoS LoS and NLoS LoS and NLoS
Coverage 25 km approx. 510 km approx. 25 km approx.
range (maximum of 50 km)
Channel 20, 25 and Flexible, from Equal to 802.162004
bandwidth 28 MHz 1.25 up to 20 MHz
Modulation 2PAM, 4QAM, OFDM with 256 OFDMA with 2048
16QAM, and subcarriers 2PAM, subcarriers 2PAM,
64QAM 4QAM, 16QAM, 4QAM, 16QAM,
and 64QAM and 64QAM
Mobility Fixed Fixed and Pedestrian Vehicular (20100 km/h)
Table 1.1  3: IEEE 802.16, IEEE 802.162004, and IEEE 802.16e standards.
1.1.2 Relationship with other wireless technologies
Range
Time
2G 2.5G 3G 3.5G 3.75G 4G
Proprietary
802.11b
802.11g
802.16a
802.16d
802.16e
Cellular evolution
W
i
r
e
l
e
s
s
n
e
t
w
o
r
k
s
e
v
o
l
u
t
i
o
n
Figure 1.1  1: Convergence in wireless communications.
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION 9
Wireless access to data networks is expected to be an area of rapid growth
for mobile communication systems. The huge uptake rate of mobile phone
technologies, WLANs and the exponential growth that is experiencing the
use of the Internet have resulted in an increased demand for new methods to
obtain high capacity wireless networks. WiMAX may be seen as the fourth
generation (4G) of mobile systems as the convergence of cellular telephony,
computing, Internet access, and potentially many multimedia applications
become a real fact. The mentioned convergence between wireless and cellular
networks is illustrated in Figure 1.1  1.
In any case, both WLAN and cellular mobile applications are being widely
expanded to oﬀer the demanded wireless access. However, they experience
several diﬃculties for reaching a complete mobile broadband access, bounded
by factors such as bandwidth, coverage area, and infrastructure costs. On one
hand, WiFi provides a high data rate, but only on a short range of distances
and with a slow movement of the user. On the other hand, UMTS
13
oﬀers
larger ranges and vehicular mobility, but instead, it provides lower data rates,
and requires high investments for its deployment. WiMAX tries to balance
this situation . As shown in Figure 1.1  2, it ﬁlls the gap between WiFi and
UMTS, thus providing vehicular mobility (included in IEEE 802.16e), and
high service areas and data rates.
Rate
Mobility
WiFi
UMTS
WiMAX
Figure 1.1  2: WiMAX ﬁlls the gap between WiFi and UMTS.
Therefore, while WiMAX will complement WiFi and UMTS in some of
the possible scenarios where these systems are not suﬃciently developed, i.e.
they face several problems in the deployment and they do not oﬀer enough
capacity to serve all possible users, WiMAX will compete with WiFi and
13
Universal Mobile Telecommunications System
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION 10
UMTS also in other possible scenarios, where, in general, the costs in the
deployment, maintenance, or just the supply of the service would not be
proﬁtable.
Table 1.1  4 gives an overview on the comparison between the mentioned
systems, WiMAX and its two closest competitors, WiFi and UMTS. A
deeper analysis of these three systems will be developed next.
WiFi WiMAX UMTS
HSDPA
Standard IEEE 802.11 IEEE 802.16 IMT2000
14
Channel Fixed Variable Variable Fixed
width 20 MHz ≤ 20 MHz ≤ 28 MHz 5 MHz
Spectrum 2.4/5.2 GHz 211 GHz 1066 GHz ∼2 GHz
Data rate 2/54 Mbps 70 Mbps 240 Mbps 1/14 Mbps
Range 100 m 17 km 1215 km 50 km
Multiplexing TDM FDM/TDM FDM/TDM FDM
Transmission SS
15
/OFDM OFDM/OFDMA SC WCDMA
Mobility Pedestrian Vehicular (802.16e) No Vehicular
Advantages Throughput Throughput Mobility
and costs and range and range
Disadvantages Short range Interference Low rates
issues? and expensive
Table 1.1  4: Comparative table between WiFi, WiMAX and UMTS.
WiMAX vs. WiFi
WiFi or WLAN is the name with which the IEEE 802.11 standardbased
products are known. It includes the 802.11a speciﬁcation, capable to oﬀer
data rates of 54 Mbps working in the frequency band of 5.2 GHz; and the
802.11b speciﬁcation, in the 2.4 GHz frequency band, which provides users
with data rates of 11 Mbps. This technology has generally a coverage area
of 100 meters and ﬁxed channel bandwidths of 20 MHz [7].
WiMAX appeared to fulﬁl the need for delivering wireless access to MANs.
It was designed to oﬀer BWA services to metropolitan areas providing users
with larger coverage ranges and higher data rates. WiMAX systems are able
to support users in ranges up to 50 km with a direct visibility to the base
station and ranges from 1 to 7 km where no visibility is available. Rates from
70 to 240 Mbps are oﬀered and can be achieved with this technology.
15
International Mobile Communications
15
Spread Spectrum
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION 11
However, WiMAX does not create a conﬂict with the mentioned WiFi,
as they are complementary technologies. WiMAX provides a low cost way
to backhaul WiFi hotspots and WLAN points in businesses and homes,
oﬀering a wireless last mile extension for cable and DSL infrastructures.
WiMAX vs. UMTS
UMTS is identiﬁed with the socalled third generation of cellular networks
standardized by the 3GPP
16
. The frequency bands that are assigned to this
technology are the licensed frequencies from 1885 to 2025 MHz, and from
2110 to 2200 MHz. It uses wideband code division mutiple access (WCDMA)
as the carrier modulation scheme, and it has been speciﬁed as an integrated
solution for mobile voice and data with wide coverage area, oﬀering data
rates that may decrease while the velocity of the user increases. This system
provides for theoretical bit rates of up to 384 kbps in high mobility situations,
which rise as high as 2 Mbps in stationary user environments, employing a
5 MHz channel width. Moreover, HSDPA
17
technology further increases the
throughput speeds, providing theoretical data rates as high as 14 Mbps [8].
WiMAX is becoming a serious threat for 3G cellular networks because
of its broadband and distance capabilities, as well as its ability to eﬀectively
support voice with full QoS. WiMAX is also able to oﬀer higher data rates
than UMTS, but it does not allow the same grade of mobility. However,
it is expected to be set up as an alternative to cellular networks, as the
investments the operators need to carry out for its deployment are not so
high.
1.2 Outline of the thesis
This thesis examines the implementation of a WiMAX simulator built with
Matlab Simulink. This simulator is targeted to the 256point FFT OFDM
PHY layer. The thesis is organized in eight chapters, in which a detailed
overview of every element of the system is given taking into account both
the standard speciﬁcations and the corresponding theoretical aspects, which
are necessary to understand all the diﬀerent methods and processes that have
been used.
An overview of the WiMAX system has already been exposed in the
present chapter, where the main features of the standard are summarized.
In order to understand the objectives and the applications of this system, a
16
3rd Generation Partnership Project
17
High Speed Downlink Packet Access
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION 12
comparison between WiMAX and other wireless systems is also included in
the chapter.
The remaining seven chapters discuss the implementation of the WiMAX
simulator.
As any other communication system, WiMAX has three basic elements,
a transmitter, a receiver, and a channel over which the information is sent.
The main components of a WiMAX communication system are shown in
Figure 1.2  1.
Transmitter Channel Receiver
feedback
Figure 1.2  1: Basic communication system.
The transmitter, presented in Chapter 2, is the one who generates the
signal to be sent over the channel. Before sending it, the signal has to
be adapted to the channel conditions using a speciﬁc adaptive modulation
and coding scheme. As data is transmitted using the OFDM transmission
technique, it also needs to be conformed into an OFDM symbol by performing
the corresponding operations, which include a frequencytime transformation
and the addition of a guard period. Then, the signal is sent over the channel,
discussed in the next chapter.
Chapter 3 examines the communication channel. For the WiMAX system,
it is a wireless channel. The performance of any wireless communication
system is highly dependent on the propagation channel, and so, a detailed
knowledge of radio propagation eﬀects, such as path loss, frequencyselective
fading, Doppler spread, and multipath delay spread have to be considered
for the optimization of the communication link. This way, this chapter gives
a theoretical explanation about timevariant channels, to afterwards outline
two fading channel models, ﬂat and frequencyselective fading channels. The
channel implementation of our simulator is also discussed in this chapter,
which oﬀers in its end an overview of the wellknown IMETRA
18
used to
model fading channels.
The receiver is examined in Chapter 4. It observes the signal after the
channel and performs the necessary operations to obtain the transmitted
information. These operations include a channel estimation as well as an
equalization process to solve the degrading eﬀects of the signal caused by
18
Intelligent MultiElement Transmit and Receive Antennas
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION 13
multipath propagation. Furthermore, a method that accomplishes the proper
decoding of soft or hard demodulator outputs to reproduce, as accurately as
possible, the data that was transmitted is also implemented.
Chapter 5 introduces MIMO systems. The use of multiple antennas at
the transmitter and/or at the receiver in a communication link opens a new
dimension in reliable wireless communications, improving the performance
of the system substantially. The core idea in the MIMO transmitter is STC
in which signal processing in time is completed with signal processing in the
spatial dimension by using multiple spatially distributed antennas at both
link ends. The MRC diversity scheme, by which multiple replicas of the same
information signal received over diﬀerent diversity branches are combined so
as to maximize the instantaneous signaltonoise ratio (SNR) at the combiner
output, is used in the MIMO receiver.
Additionally, a feedback mechanism that allows to transfer information
about the channel state back to the transmitter is described. Using this
information, an adaptive modulation and coding (AMC) mechanism can be
implemented. Chapter 6 is devoted to the analysis of the mentioned AMC
process. Based on the current channel characteristics, it adaptively changes
the coding and the carrier modulation scheme allowing the data rate to be
maximized.
Chapter 7 analyzes the obtained results. Firstly, simulation results using
an AWGN
19
channel are discussed. Next, simulations with MIMO channels
show not only the improvement in BER
20
performance but also the increase in
data rate that can be achieved without any bandwidth expansion when using
these systems. Lastly, several results show the enhancement in throughput
obtained with the performance of the AMC mechanism.
Finally, the concluding remarks are summed up in Chapter 8.
Additionally, this work also includes ﬁve appendices that complete the
thesis already outlined. Appendix A is intended to give an overview of OFDM
systems. Appendix B presents a detailed analysis on the derivation of some
formulas explained in the thesis. In Appendix C, a set of values for the
parameters of the simulator is listed. A comparison between parameters used
in a previously implemented WLAN and those of the newly built WiMAX
simulator is also given in this appendix. Appendix D gives a general view of
the WiMAX simulator through the whole Simulink block diagram. Finally,
Appendix E includes two lists, the ﬁrst contains the acronyms used in the
thesis, written in their full length, and the second includes the notations that
have been employed through this work.
19
Additive White Gaussian Noise
20
Bit Error Rate
Chapter 2
Transmitter
This chapter describes the diﬀerent steps the transmitter performs before
transmitting the data. The functional blocks that compose the transmitter
of the WiMAX simulator are depicted in Figure 2.0  1.
Encoder Mapper Assembler IFFT
256
Add CP
Transmitted
signal
Input
bits
Pilot
Training
Reed
Solomon
Encoder
Convolutional
Encoder
Puncture Interleaver
Add
Zeros
Figure 2.0  1: Transmitter of the WiMAX system.
First of all, the data from the source is randomized and afterwards, coded
and mapped into QAM
1
symbols. As previously explained in Chapter 1,
the simulator implemented in the thesis works for the WirelessMANOFDM
physical (PHY) layer of WiMAX. This PHY layer uses orthogonal frequency
division multiplexing (OFDM) with 256 subcarriers.
Each OFDM
2
symbol is composed of 192 data subcarriers, 1 zero DC
subcarrier, 8 pilot subcarriers, and 55 guard carriers. Therefore, a process
of assembling the zero DC subcarrier, data, and pilots is needed to built
the symbols. Furthermore, preambles consisting of training sequences are
appended at the beginning of each burst. These training sequences are used
for performing an estimation of the channel coeﬃcients at the receiver.
1
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
2
A detailed analysis of the OFDM theory is given in Appendix A.
14
CHAPTER 2. TRANSMITTER 15
After the assembling process, a zero padding is performed. The signal is
converted to the time domain by means of the inverse fast Fourier transform
(IFFT) algorithm, and ﬁnally, a cyclic preﬁx (CP) with the aim of preventing
intersymbol interference is added.
2.1 Source
As described in the standard [4], the information bits must be randomized
before the transmission. The randomization process is used to minimize
the possibility of transmissions of nonmodulated subcarriers. The process
of randomization is performed on each burst of data on the downlink and
uplink, and on each allocation of a data block (subchannels on the frequency
domain and OFDM symbols on the time domain).
In our case, instead of performing a randomization process, a binary
source that produces random sequences of bits is used. The number of bits
that are generated is speciﬁed to be framebased and is calculated from the
packet size required in each situation. The packet size depends on the number
of transmitted OFDM symbols and the overall coding rate of the system, as
well as the modulation alphabet.
Equation 2.1  1 calculates the number of transmitted OFDM symbols in
one frame. It depends on the total number of transmitted symbols, N
Tsym
,
which also includes the symbols used for the preamble, speciﬁed by N
train
:
N
OFDM
= N
Tsym
−N
train
. (2.1  1)
Furthermore, the total number of transmitted symbols is deﬁned as
N
Tsym
=
T
frame
T
sym
. (2.1  2)
In the formula, T
sym
is the OFDM symbol time, and T
frame
denotes the
frame duration. The expression that deﬁnes T
sym
as well as the possible
values speciﬁed for the frame duration can be found in Section C.1.1.
Once the number of OFDM symbols is known, the number of bits to be
sent by the source is calculated:
S
packet
= N
OFDM
RN
data
M
a
. (2.1  3)
Here, R represents the overall coding rate, N
data
is the number of used data
subcarriers, and M
a
deﬁnes the modulation alphabet, which is speciﬁed by
the number of transmitted bits per symbol.
CHAPTER 2. TRANSMITTER 16
2.2 Encoder
As shown in Figure 2.2  1, the encoding process consists of a concatenation of
an outer ReedSolomon (RS) code and an inner convolutional code (CC) as a
FEC scheme. That means that ﬁrst data passes in block format through the
RS encoder, and then, it goes across the convolutional encoder. It is a ﬂexible
coding process due to the puncturing of the signal, and allows diﬀerent coding
rates. The last part of the encoder is a process of interleaving to avoid long
error bursts.
ReedSolomon
Encoder
Convolutional
Encoder
Puncture Interleaver
Figure 2.2  1: The coding process in WiMAX.
A variablerate coding scheme that depends on the channel conditions
is designed to oﬀer optimal error protection levels to the users. The FEC
options are paired with several modulation schemes to form burst proﬁles of
varying robustness and eﬃciency. Table 2.2  1 gives the block sizes and code
rates used for the diﬀerent modulations.
AMC Modulation RS code CC Overall
code rate code rate
1 2PAM
3
(12,12,0) 1/2 1/2
2 4QAM (32,24,4) 2/3 1/2
3 4QAM (40,36,2) 5/6 3/4
4 16QAM (64,48,4) 2/3 1/2
5 16QAM (80,72,4) 5/6 3/4
6 64QAM (108,96,6) 3/4 2/3
7 64QAM (120,108,6) 5/6 3/4
Table 2.2  1: WiMAX modulation and coding schemes.
The users report the current channel condition to the base station (BS)
and, based on this report, a speciﬁc coding rate is selected for the downlink
data transmissions. Thus, users who experience a "bad" channel condition,
i.e. low SNR, at a given time, will be provided with better error correction
3
Pulse Amplitude Modulation
CHAPTER 2. TRANSMITTER 17
than those users experiencing "good" channel conditions at the same time.
This process is called adaptive modulation and coding (AMC)
4
.
In the next sections, each one of the diﬀerent encoder blocks will be
explained in detail. It will be given a thorough description of how they work
and are implemented in the simulator.
2.2.1 ReedSolomon encoder
The properties of ReedSolomon codes make them suitable to applications
where errors occur in bursts. ReedSolomon error correction is a coding
scheme which works by ﬁrst constructing a polynomial from the data symbols
to be transmitted, and then sending an oversampled version of the polynomial
instead of the original symbols themselves.
A ReedSolomon code is speciﬁed as RS(n, k, t) with lbit symbols. This
means that the encoder takes k data symbols of l bits each and adds 2t parity
symbols to construct an nsymbol codeword. Thus, n, k and t can be deﬁned
as:
• n: number of bytes after encoding,
• k: number of data bytes before encoding,
• t: number of data bytes that can be corrected.
The error correction ability of any RS code is determined by (n − k), the
measure of redundancy in the block. If the location of the erroneous symbols
is not known in advance, then a ReedSolomon code can correct up to t
symbols, where t can be expressed as t = (n −k)/2.
As speciﬁed in the standard, the ReedSolomon encoding shall be derived
from a systematic RS(n = 255, k = 239, t = 8) code using a Galois ﬁeld
speciﬁed as GF(2
8
). The primitive and generator polynomials used for the
systematic code are expressed as follows:
Primitive Polynomial:
p(x) = x
8
+ x
4
+ x
3
+ x
2
+ 1 (2.2  1)
Generator Polynomial:
g(x) = (x + λ
0
)(x + λ
1
)(x + λ
2
)...(x + λ
2t−1
) (2.2  2)
4
Further information of the AMC mechanism can be found in Chapter 6.
CHAPTER 2. TRANSMITTER 18
The primitive polynomial is the one used to construct the symbol ﬁeld
and it can also be named as ﬁeld generator polynomial. The code generator
polynomial is used to calculate parity symbols and has the form speciﬁed
as before, where λ is the primitive element of the Galois ﬁeld over which
the input message is deﬁned. See [9] and [10] for more information about
ReedSolomon codes.
To make the RS code ﬂexible, i.e. to allow for variable block sizes and
variable correction capabilities, it is shortened and punctured. When a block
is shortened to k bytes, 239 − k zero bytes are added as a preﬁx, and, after
the encoding process, the 239 − k encoded zero bytes are discarded. Once
the process of shortening has been done, the number of symbols going in and
out of the RS encoder change, and also the number of symbols that can be
corrected, t. With the puncturing, only the ﬁrst 2t of the total 16 parity
bytes
5
shall be employed. Figure 2.2  2 shows the RS encoding, shortening,
and puncturing process.
239k zeros k data bytes 16 parity
239k zeros k data bytes
k data bytes
k+2t
Figure 2.2  2: Process of shortening and puncturing of the RS code.
The input of the RS encoder block deﬁned by Simulink is speciﬁed to
be a vector whose length is an integer multiple of lk, being l the length of
the binary sequences corresponding to elements of the Galois ﬁeld GF(2
l
),
and the output, a vector whose length is the same integer multiple of ln.
Therefore, the ﬁrst step to implement is to divide the data vector in a number
of blocks whose length ﬁts the requirement quoted above. At the same time,
it has to be taken into account that the number of data bytes before encoding,
5
The parity bytes are calculated from the systematic RS(255, 239, 8) code, as 2t = n−k.
CHAPTER 2. TRANSMITTER 19
k, the number of overall bytes after encoding, n, and the number of data
bytes that can be corrected, t, are the ones speciﬁed in Table 2.2  1, and
they change for every modulation scheme. Thus, the number of blocks used
in the ReedSolomon encoder is calculated as
N
RS
=
S
packet
8k
. (2.2  3)
A block diagram of the ReedSolomon encoder implemented in Matlab
Simulink is depicted in Figure 2.2  3.
Reshape
1
Zero
padding
Reshape
2
RS
encoder
Select
rows
Reshape
4
Reshape
3
Figure 2.2  3: Block diagram of the ReedSolomon encoder of WiMAX.
"Reshape 1" arranges the input data of the RS encoder in a matrix form,
where the corresponding number of rows is calculated from the length of
the blocks before encoding, k, and the number of calculated ReedSolomon
blocks, as speciﬁed in Equation 2.2  3, determines the number of columns.
Zero padding along columns at the beginning is performed to achieve a length
of 239 bytes for each block. "Reshape 2" shapes out the matrix structure into
a vector
6
. Once data has passed through the encoder, the block "Reshape 3"
distributes the output vector of the encoder in a matrix with size 255 N
RS
.
The "Select rows"block deals with selecting the correct amount of bytes
after the encoding process. Thus, the zero preﬁx is discarded, and data
is punctured by taking only the ﬁrst 2t bytes of the total parity bytes, as
previously explained. To end, "Reshape 4" rearranges the matrix data in a
column vector, ready for the convolutional coding.
2.2.2 Convolutional encoder
After the RS encoding process, the data bits are further encoded by a binary
convolutional encoder, which has a native rate of 1/2 and a constraint length
of 7. The generator polynomials used to derive its two output code bits,
denoted X and Y, are speciﬁed in the following expressions:
G
1
= 171
OCT
for X, (2.2  4)
G
2
= 133
OCT
for Y. (2.2  5)
6
The RS encoder block of Simulink only works with vector structures.
CHAPTER 2. TRANSMITTER 20
A convolutional encoder accepts messages of length k
0
bits and generates
codewords of n
0
bits. Generally, it is made up of a shift register of L segments,
where L denotes the constraint length.
The binary convolutional encoder that implements the described code is
shown in Figure 2.2  4. A connection line from the shift register feeding into
the adder means a "one" in the octal representation of the polynomials, and
no connection is represented by a "zero".
T T T T T T
1
1
0
1 1
0
0 1
1 1 1 0 1 1
X = 171
OCT
Y = 133
OCT
Figure 2.2  4: Convolutional encoder of binary rate 1/2.
2.2.3 Puncturing process
Puncturing is the process of systematically deleting bits from the output
stream of a lowrate encoder in order to reduce the amount of data to be
transmitted, thus forming a highrate code. The bits are deleted according
to a perforation matrix, where a "zero" means a discarded bit.
The process of puncturing is used to create the variable coding rates
needed to provide various error protection levels to the users of the system.
The diﬀerent rates that can be used are rate 1/2, rate 2/3, rate 3/4, and rate
5/6. The puncturing vectors for these rates are given in Table 2.2  2.
Rate Puncture vector
1/2 [1]
2/3 [1 1 1 0]
3/4 [1 1 0 1 1 0]
5/6 [1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0]
Table 2.2  2: Puncture vectors for diﬀerent convolutional coding rates.
The convolutional coding and puncturing is directly supported by Simulink
in a single block. This block was used for the implementation.
CHAPTER 2. TRANSMITTER 21
2.2.4 Interleaver
Data interleaving is generally used to scatter error bursts and thus, reduce
the error concentration to be corrected with the purpose of increasing the
eﬃciency of FEC by spreading burst errors introduced by the transmission
channel over a longer time. Interleaving is normally implemented by using
a twodimensional array buﬀer, such that the data enters the buﬀer in rows,
which specify the number of interleaving levels, and then, it is read out in
columns. The result is that a burst of errors in the channel after interleaving
becomes in few scarcely spaced single symbol errors, which are more easily
correctable.
WiMAX uses an interleaver that combines data using 12 interleaving
levels. The eﬀect of this process can be understood as a spreading of the bits
of the diﬀerent symbols, which are combined to get new symbols, with the
same size but with rearranged bits.
The interleaver of the simulator has been implemented in two steps. First,
data passes through a matrix interleaver which performs block interleaving
by ﬁlling a matrix with the input symbols row by row, and then sending this
matrix content column by column. The parameters used for this block are
the number of rows and columns that compose the matrix:
N
rows
= 12, N
columns
=
N
tcb
N
rows
.
The second step consists of a block interleaver. It rearranges the elements
of its input according to an index vector. This vector is deﬁned as
I =
N
tcb
−1
i=0
_
s
_
i
s
_
+ mod
_
i + N
tcb
−
_
iN
rows
N
tcb
_
, s
_
+ 1
_
, (2.2  6)
where:
• N
tcb
is the total number of coded bits,
N
tcb
= N
cpc
N
txdata
• N
cpc
is the number of coded bits per subcarrier, being the same as
speciﬁed with the modulation alphabet, M
a
,
• N
txdata
is the total number of transmitted data symbols, and
N
txdata
= N
data
N
OFDM
• s =
_
N
cpc
2
_
.
CHAPTER 2. TRANSMITTER 22
2.3 Modulation mapper
Once the signal has been coded, it enters the modulation block. All wireless
communication systems use a modulation scheme to map coded bits to a
form that can be eﬀectively transmitted over the communication channel.
Thus, the bits are mapped to a subcarrier amplitude and phase, which is
represented by a complex inphase and quadraturephase (IQ) vector. The
IQ plot for a modulation scheme shows the transmitted vector for all data
word combinations. Gray coding is a method for this allocation so that
adjacent points in the constellation only diﬀer by a single bit. This coding
helps to minimize the overall bit error rate as it reduces the chance of multiple
bit errors ocurring from a single symbol error.
2PAM, 4QAM, 16QAM, and 64QAM modulations are supported by
the system. The support of the last one, the 64QAM modulation, is optional
for licenseexempt bands. The constellation maps for 2PAM, 4QAM, and
16QAM modulations are shown in Figure 2.3  1.
00
01
10
11
 

 j
1
j
1
.
0 1
 
1101
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1110
1111
   



 j
1
3j
3
j
1 3
3j
   



 1
1
3
3
1
1 3
3
7


  
5 7 5 7



5
5
7
111011 110011 100011 101011
111010 110010 100010 101010
001011 000011 010011 011011
001010 000010 010010 011010
111000 110000 100000 101000 001000 000000 010000 011000
111001 110001 100001 101001 011001 010001 000001 001001
111101 110101 100101 101101
111100 110100 100100 101100
001101 000101 010101 011101
011100 010100 000100 001100
111110 110110 100110 101110
111111 110111 100111 101111
011110
011111
010110 000110 001110
010111 000111 001111
Figure 2.3  1: 2PAM, 4QAM and 16QAM constellation maps.
To achieve equal average symbol power, the constellations described above
are normalized by multiplying all of its points by an appropriate factor C
m
.
Values for this factor C
m
are given in Table 2.3  1.
The modulation mapping is built in the simulator by a Simulink block
implemented as a Matlab mﬁle. The symbol alphabet, A
s
, represents the
coordinate points in the constellation map and is deﬁned in Table 2.3  2.
CHAPTER 2. TRANSMITTER 23
Modulation scheme Normalization constant for
unit average power
2PAM C
m
= 1
4QAM C
m
= 1/
√
2
16QAM C
m
= 1/
√
10
64QAM C
m
= 1/
√
42
Table 2.3  1: Normalization factors.
Modulation Symbol
scheme alphabet
2PAM A
s
= (1, −1)
4QAM A
s
= (1 +j, 1 −j, −1 +j, −1 −j)
16QAM A = (j, 3j, −j, −3j)
A
s
= (A+ 1, A+ 3, A−1, A−3)
64QAM A = (j, 3j, 5j, 7j −j, −3j, −5j, −7j)
A
s
= (A+ 1, A+ 3, A+ 5, A+ 7, A−1, A−3, A−5, A−7)
Table 2.3  2: Modulation alphabet for the constellation map.
Furthermore, an adaptive modulation and coding mechanism is supported
in the downlink with the purpose of allowing the number of transmitted
bits per symbol to be varied depending on the channel conditions. A more
detailed explanation of adaptive modulation as well as a description of how
it is implemented in the simulator is given in Chapter 6.
2.4 Pilot symbols
Pilot symbols can be used to perform a frequency oﬀset compensation at
the receiver. Additionally, as recent results showed [11], they can be used
for channel estimation in fast timevarying channels. Pilot symbols allocate
speciﬁc subcarriers in all OFDM data symbols. These pilots are obtained
by a pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS) generator that is based on the
polynomial x
11
+x
9
+ 1. They are, moreover, 2PAM modulated. This kind
of mapping is given by the operations 1 − 2w
k
and 1 − 2w
k
, where w
k
is
the sequence produced by the PRBS generator, and w
k
denotes the binary
inversion. The indices represent the subcarrier numbers where the pilots are
going to be inserted:
p
88
= p
38
= p
63
= p
88
= 1 −2w
k
,
p
63
= p
13
= p
13
= p
38
= 1 −2w
k
.
CHAPTER 2. TRANSMITTER 24
The initialization sequences for the PRBS generator vary depending on
the direction of transmission, i.e. the downlink or the uplink. A sequence of
all "ones" is used in the downlink while a sequence of alternated "ones" and
"zeros", being the ﬁrst bit equal to "one", is used in the uplink.
2.5 Training sequences
In WiMAX systems, preambles, both in DL
7
and in UL
8
, are composed using
training sequences. Although three types of training sequences are speciﬁed,
they are derived from the same sequence in the frequency domain. This
sequence, that has a length of 201 subcarriers, is called P
ALL
. A deeper
deﬁnition of it can be found in [4].
For DL transmissions, the ﬁrst preamble as well as the initial ranging
preamble consists of two consecutive OFDM symbols. The ﬁrst symbol is a
short training sequence, P
SHORT
, used for synchronization. It is a sequence
which uses only the subcarriers of P
ALL
whose indices are a multiple of 4,
ﬁlling the other subcarriers with "zeros". Thus, in the time domain it is
composed of four repetitions of a 64sample fragment. The frequency domain
sequence for this ﬁrst DL preamble is deﬁned in Equation 2.5  1.
The second OFDM symbol uses a long training sequence, necessary in the
receiver for channel estimation. As it occurs with the ﬁrst OFDM symbol of
the preamble, the long training sequence is constructed also using a subset of
the subcarriers of P
ALL
. In this case, the long training sequence utilizes only
even subcarriers. Therefore, it is called P
EVEN
and its time domain waveform
consists of two repetitions of a 128sample fragment. Equation 2.5  2 deﬁnes
the frequency domain sequence for this long training.
P
SHORT
(k) =
_ √
2
√
2conj(P
ALL
(k)) k mod 4 = 0
0 k mod 4 ,= 0
(2.5  1)
P
EVEN
(k) =
_ √
2conj(P
ALL
(k)) k mod 2 = 0
0 k mod 2 ,= 0
(2.5  2)
In both, Equation 2.5  1 and Equation 2.5  2, a factor of
√
2 representing
a boost of 3 dB appears. Furthermore, there is an additional factor of
√
2 in
P
SHORT
which has the aim of equating the rootmeansquare (RMS) power
with the power of the data symbols.
7
DownLink
8
UpLink
CHAPTER 2. TRANSMITTER 25
Another training sequence shall be used when transmitting spacetime
coded (STC) downlink bursts. Because the STC scheme achieves diversity
by transmitting with two antennas, a preamble has to be transmitted from
both transmit antennas simultaneously. Thus, the ﬁrst antenna transmits a
preamble using P
EVEN
and the preamble transmitted from the second antenna
is set according to the sequence P
ODD
. Again, like P
EVEN
, it is derived from
the sequence P
ALL
, but using, in this case, a subset of odd subcarriers.
P
ODD
(k) =
_
0 k mod 2 = 0
√
2conj(P
ALL
(k)) k mod 2 ,= 0
(2.5  3)
The time domain structure of the described preamble, referred to as the
long preamble, is shown in the next ﬁgure.
CP CP
CP
64
128
64 64 64
128
128 128
T
g
T
g
T
g
T
b
T
b
T
b
Figure 2.5  1: Long preamble structure, used for DL transmissions.
Furthermore, the long preamble is followed by the FCH
9
, which contains
decoded information for the subscriber station, i.e. information about the
modulation type and the FEC code length for each burst proﬁle as well as the
DL and UL maps. In the WiMAX simulator the FCH is ﬁlled with dummy
data, i.e. it is assumed that the receiver knows all FCH information perfectly.
User data follows the FCH and contains several OFDM symbols of payload
data.
2.6 Assembler
WiMAX speciﬁcations for the 256point FFT OFDM PHY layer deﬁne three
types of subcarriers; data, pilot and null, as shown in Figure 2.6  1. 200
of the total 256 subcarriers are used for data and pilot subcarriers, eight of
which are pilots permanently spaced throughout the OFDM spectrum. The
remaining 192 active carriers take up the data subcarriers. The rest of the
potential carriers are nulled and set aside for guard bands and removal of the
center frequency subcarrier.
9
Frame Control Header
CHAPTER 2. TRANSMITTER 26
Data subcarriers Pilot subcarriers DC subcarrier
Guard band Guard band Channel
Figure 2.6  1: OFDM frequency description.
In order to construct an OFDM symbol, a process to rearrange these
carriers is needed. With this purpose, the assembler block is inserted in the
simulator. It performs this operation in two steps by ﬁrst inserting the pilot
tones and the zero DC subcarrier between data with a process of vertical
concatenation, and then appending the training symbols at the beginning of
each burst in an horizontal way, as shown in Figure 2.6  2. It is shown that
while the ﬁrst step performs a concatenation in the frequency domain, the
second step does it in the time domain.
t
f
Zero DC
Pilots
Trainings
OFDM data symbols
Figure 2.6  2: OFDM burst structure obtained after assembling.
The process of assembling the total number of 201 subcarriers is explained
next. Frequency indices are deﬁned in the standard from index 127 to index
128. However, Matlab allows only positive indices, and so, a shift on these
index values is needed in the simulator. Therefore, pilot subcarriers are
inserted in frequency oﬀset indices of 13, 38, 63, 88, 114, 139, 164, and 189.
CHAPTER 2. TRANSMITTER 27
The same action occurs with the zero DC, situated in the centered subcarrier,
which is, in this case, the one with index 101.
After this ﬁrst concatenation, the training symbols are appended at the
beginning of each burst.
2.7 The guard bands
The OFDM physical layer of the IEEE 802.162004 standard speciﬁes that
transmission must be performed using 256 frequency subcarriers. The total
amount of subcarriers to be used is determined by the number of points
needed to perform the IFFT.
After the assembling process described in Section 2.6, only 201 of the
total 256 subcarriers are used. The remaining 55 carriers, that are zero
subcarriers appended at the end of the cited structure, act as guard bands
with the purpose to enable the naturally decay of the signal. These guard
bands are used to decrease emissions in adjacent frequency channels.
Figure 2.7  1 and Figure 2.7  2 show the structure of the subcarriers before
and after appending the guard bands.
1 101 201
DC
data
Figure 2.7  1: Structure composed with data, pilots and zero DC subcarriers.
1 101 201
DC
data
202 256
guards
Figure 2.7  2: Structure after appending the guard bands.
CHAPTER 2. TRANSMITTER 28
2.8 Inverse Fast Fourier Transform algorithm
The IFFT is used to produce a time domain signal, as the symbols obtained
after modulation can be considered the amplitudes of a certain range of
sinusoids. This means that each of the discrete samples before applying the
IFFT algorithm corresponds to an individual subcarrier. Besides ensuring
the orthogonality of the OFDM subcarriers, the IFFT represents also a rapid
way for modulating these subcarriers in parallel, and thus, the use of multiple
modulators and demodulators, which spend a lot of time and resources to
perform this operation, is avoided.
Before doing the IFFT operation in the simulator, the subcarriers are
rearranged. Figure 2.8  1 shows the subcarrier structure that enters the IFFT
block after performing the cited rearrangement. As seen in the following
ﬁgure, zero subcarriers are kept in the center of the structure.
1 101 2 1 157 256 02 156
DC
data
guards
Figure 2.8  1: Rearrangement performed before realizing the IFFT operation.
Furthermore, the FFT (or IFFT) should be of length 2
r
(where r is an
integer number) to facilitate the realization of the algorithm. For this reason,
the FFT length is given by
N
FFT
= 2
log
2
(N
data
)
. (2.8  1)
2.9 The cyclic preﬁx
The robustness of any OFDM transmission against multipath delay spread
is achieved by having a long symbol period with the purpose of minimizing
the intersymbol interference. Figure 2.9  1 depicts one way to perform the
cited long symbol period, creating a cyclically extended guard interval where
each OFDM symbol is preceded by a periodic extension of the signal itself.
This guard interval, that is actually a copy of the last portion of the data
symbol, is known as the cyclic preﬁx (CP).
CHAPTER 2. TRANSMITTER 29
CP
T
g
T
b
T
sym
CP
Figure 2.9  1: OFDM symbol with the cyclic preﬁx.
Copying the end of a symbol and appending it to the start results in a
longer symbol time. Thus, the total length of the symbol is
T
sym
= T
b
+ T
g
, (2.9  1)
where:
• T
sym
is the OFDM symbol time,
• T
b
is the useful symbol time, and
• T
g
represents the CP time.
The parameter G deﬁnes the ratio of the CP length to the useful symbol
time. When eliminating ISI
10
, it has to be taken into account that the CP
must be longer than the dispersion of the channel. Moreover, it should be as
small as possible since it costs energy to the transmitter. For these reasons,
G
11
is usually less than 1/4:
G =
T
g
T
b
. (2.9  2)
10
InterSymbol Interference
11
Values for this parameter are speciﬁed in Appendix C.
Chapter 3
Channel
When communicating over a wireless radio channel the received signal cannot
be simply modeled as a copy of the transmitted signal corrupted by additive
Gaussian noise. Instead, signal fading, while caused by the timevarying
characteristics of the propagation environment, appears. In this way, short
term ﬂuctuations caused by signal scattering of objects in the propagation
environment lead to a phenomenon known as multipath propagation. The
time dispersion in a multipath environment causes the signal to undergo
either ﬂat or frequencyselective fading. Furthermore, the time dispersion
is manifested by the spreading in time of the modulated symbols leading to
intersymbol interference (ISI). In order to avoid ISI in OFDM systems, the
cyclic preﬁx time has to be chosen larger than the maximum delay spread of
the channel. In addition, rootraised cosine (RRC) ﬁlters, usually used for
bandlimiting the transmitted signal, are utilized as interpolation ﬁlters in
the simulator.
This chapter deals with the modeling, analysis, and simulation of the
channel. It provides a description of the mentioned RRC ﬁlters as well as a
brief explanation about the fading characteristics.
As the simulation results depend strongly on the radio channel, it is very
important to use accurate and realistic channel models in the simulation to
enable realistic and reliable results. Thus, the wellknown IMETRA channel
model is introduced.
3.1 Filters
Data transmission over band limited channels requires a technique of pulse
shaping at the transmitter. Since the pulse shaping ﬁlter does not cause
intersymbol interference (ISI), this implies the fundamental shapes of the
30
CHAPTER 3. CHANNEL 31
pulses to be such that they do not interfere each other. A criteria that
ensures noninterference speciﬁes the shape of the pulses to be such that its
amplitude decays rapidly outside the pulse interval. A widely used ﬁlter for
this purpose is the well known raised cosine ﬁlter, which satisﬁes Nyquist’s
ﬁrst criterion
1
. However, in practical applications the overall magnitude
response of the raised cosine spectrum is equally split between the transmitter
and the receiver, thus obtaining squareroot raised cosine ﬁlters, also known
as rootraised cosine (RRC) ﬁlters. The advantage of such subsystems is that
if the transmit side ﬁlter is stimulated by an impulse, then the receive one
is forced to ﬁlter an input pulse with a shape that is identical to its own
impulse response, therefore setting up a matched ﬁlter and maximizing the
SNR while at the same time minimizing ISI [12].
The RRC ﬁlter is generally used in series pairs so that the total ﬁltering
eﬀect is that of a raised cosine ﬁlter. Since the frequency response of the
transmit and receive ﬁlters is multiplied at the receiver, the receiver sees a
signal that has been ﬁltered by a raised cosine ﬁlter overall:
H
T
(f)H
R
(f) = H
rc
(f), (3.1  1)
[H
T
(f)[ = [H
R
(f)[ = H
rrc
(f). (3.1  2)
H
rrc
(f) deﬁnes the rootraised cosine ﬁlter frequency response, while H
rc(f)
is used for deﬁning the raised cosine ﬁlter.
The ideal rootraised cosine ﬁlter frequency response is simply the square
root of the frequency response of a raised cosine ﬁlter. The RRC frequency
response is speciﬁed in Equation 3.1  3, and it consists of a unity gain at low
frequencies, the square root of a raised cosine function in the middle, and a
total attenuation at high frequencies.
H
rrc
(f) =
_
¸
¸
_
¸
¸
_
1 [f[ ≤ f
N
(1 −α)
_
cos
_
πT
sym
2α
_
[f[ −
1−α
2T
sym
__
f
N
(1 −α) ≤ [f[ ≤ f
N
(1 +α)
0 [f[ > f
N
(1 + α)
(3.1  3)
1
Nyquist’s ﬁrst criterion establishes the conditions the transmission pulse p(t) must
accomplish to avoid ISI. It speciﬁes p(t) to be one for the sampling interval of the desired
symbol, and zero for the another symbols:
p(iT
s
−kT
s
) =
_
1 i = k
0 i ,= k
CHAPTER 3. CHANNEL 32
f
N
is the Nyquist frequency deﬁned as
f
N
=
1
2T
sym
=
R
sym
2
,
where T
sym
is the modulation symbol duration, and R
sym
is the symbol rate.
The width of the central frequencies is deﬁned by the rolloﬀ factor, α,
which determines the sharpness of the frequency response and can take values
comprised between 0 and 1. Speciﬁcally, α governs the bandwidth occupied
by the pulse and the rate at which the tails of the pulse decay. Figure 3.1  1
shows that when α = 0 the frequency response has a form of a rectangle
oﬀering the narrowest bandwidth but the slowest rate of decay in the time
domain. However, when α = 1 the frequency response is completely round
but the impulse response presents the added beneﬁt of rapidly decaying time
domain tails. Therefore, it can be deduced that the smaller the rolloﬀ factor,
the more eﬃcient is the scheme since it gives the narrowest bandwidth.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0.4
0.2
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
1.4
Time
h
(
t
)
(a) Impulse response h
rrc
(t).
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5
0
0.5
1
1.5
(b) Frequency response H
rrc
(f).
Figure 3.1  1: Spectral shape and inverse Fourier transform of the RRC pulse.
The most commonly used design methodology for this kind of ﬁlters is
the frequency sampling design, where the frequency response of the ﬁlter is
sampled at constant intervals and an inverse fourier transform (IFFT) is
applied to the frequency samples to obtain the ﬁlter coeﬃcients. The more
the number of frequency samples, the more will the actual response match
the desired response. That means that if more ﬁlter taps are used, a more
accurate response is obtained, and therefore, better rejection is given.
CHAPTER 3. CHANNEL 33
3.2 Fading channel models
3.2.1 Description of the fading channel
In a realistic wireless radio environment, a single received signal is composed
of a number of scattered waves, caused by the reﬂection and diﬀraction of the
original transmitted signal by objects in the surrounding geographical area.
These multipath waves are combined at the receiver to give a resultant signal
that can widely vary in amplitude and phase. Physical factors inﬂuencing
the characteristics of the fading experienced by the transmitter are multipath
propagation, mobility of the reﬂecting objects and scatterers, and the relative
motion between the transmitter and the receiver.
The presence of reﬂecting objects and scatterers in the wireless channel
causes a constant change in the propagation environment. This changing
environment alters the signal energy in amplitude, phase, and time, and as a
result, multipath propagation occurs causing signal fading. The transmitted
signal arrives at the receiver via multiple propagation paths, each of which
has an associated time delay. Because the received signal is spread in time
due to the multipath scatterers at diﬀerent delays, the channel is said to be
time dispersive. The diﬀerence between the largest and the smallest among
these delays deﬁnes the maximum delay spread.
On the other hand, when the receiver and the transmitter are in relative
motion, the received signal is subject to a constant frequency shift, called
the Doppler shift (see Equation 3.2  1). Therefore, as it occurs in the time
domain, the Doppler spread is deﬁned as the diﬀerence between the largest
and the smallest among these frequency shifts,
f
d
= f
M
cos ϕ, (3.2  1)
where:
• f
M
= f
c
v/c is the maximum Doppler shift,
• v is the vehicle speed,
• f
c
is the carrier frequency,
• c is the speed of light, and
• ϕ is the arrival angle of the received signal component.
Furthermore, a timevarying Doppler shift is induced on each multipath
component if the reﬂecting objects and scatterers in the propagation channel
are in motion, causing frequency dispersion.
CHAPTER 3. CHANNEL 34
As a result of such time variations, the response of the channel to any
signal transmitted through it will change with time. Hence, physical channels
with timevarying transmission characteristics may be characterized as time
varying linear ﬁlters. Such linear ﬁlters are described by a timevarying
impulse response, h(t, τ), which represents the response of the channel at
time t due to an impulse applied at time t −τ. Thus, the variable t speciﬁes
the time dependance in the variations of the impulse response due to motion,
whereas τ represents the channel multipath delay for a ﬁxed value of t.
Assuming that the passband input signal to a multipath fading channel
is s(t), and ignoring the eﬀects of AWGN, the passband output signal is
given by
r(t) = s(t) ⊗h(t, τ), (3.2  2)
where ⊗ represents the continuoustime convolution.
The passband channel impulse response can also be written as
h(t, τ) = Re¦h
b
(t, τ) exp(j2πf
c
t)¦, (3.2  3)
where h
b
(t, τ) is the baseband equivalent impulse response of the channel,
and f
c
is the carrier frequency of the passband input signal.
When L discrete multipath components exist in the multipath fading
channel, this baseband channel impulse response is written as
h
b
(t, τ) =
L
i=1
α
i
(t, τ)δ(τ −τ
i
(t)) exp(j(2πf
c
τ
i
(t) + θ
i
(t, τ))). (3.2  4)
α
i
(t, τ) and τ
i
(t, τ) are the delay dependent instantaneous amplitude and
the time delay associated with the ith multipath component, respectively.
The instantaneous phase shift encountered by the ith multipath component
due to its delay is represented by the factor 2πf
c
τ
i
(t), whereas any other
phase alteration experienced by this multipath component is incorporated in
θ
i
(t, τ). To simplify Equation 3.2  4, the phase delays are lumped together
and represented by
φ
i
(t, τ) = 2πf
c
τ
i
(t) + θ
i
(t, τ).
Tapped delay line channel model
A general model for a timevariant multipath channel consists of a tapped
delay line with uniformly spaced taps, as the one depicted in Figure 3.2  1.
The spacing between adjacent taps is K/(MW), where W is the bandwidth
of the signal that is being transmitted through the channel. Hence, K/(MW)
CHAPTER 3. CHANNEL 35
deﬁnes the time resolution of the channel model implementation, where an
interpolation factor of M/K is being used. Moreover, the tap coeﬃcients,
denoted as c
i
(t) = α
i
(t) exp(jφ
i
(t)), are usually modeled as complexvalued
Gaussian random processes which are mutually uncorrelated. The length of
the delay line corresponds to the amount of time dispersion in the multipath
channel, usually called the multipath spread, T
m
= L/W, where L represents
the maximum number of possible multipath signal components.
K/(MW) K/(MW) K/(MW)
X X X X
+
+
c
1
(t) c
2
(t) c
L1
(t) c
L
(t)
Input
signal
T
m
Channel
output
Aditive
noise
Figure 3.2  1: Model for a timevariant multipath channel based on a tapped
delay line.
Delay spread and Doppler spread
As previously explained, two manifestations of the channel time variations
are the delay spread and the Doppler spread. Depending on their values,
the signal transmitted through the channel will undergo ﬂat or frequency
selective fading. On one hand, the delay spread is a measure of the spread
in time over which the multipath signals arrive. It is a measure of the time
dispersion of a channel, and is very important in determining how fast the
symbol rate can be in digital communications. One of the most widely used
measurement for characterizing the delay spread of a multipath channel is
the rms delay spread, σ
τ
. Furthermore, the inverse of the delay spread deﬁnes
the coherence bandwidth, B
coh
. It is the frequency separation at which two
CHAPTER 3. CHANNEL 36
frequency components of the signal undergo independent attenuations and a
measure of the range of frequencies over which the multipath fading channel
frequency response can be considered to be ﬂat or not.
On the other hand, the Doppler spread, B
d
, is a measure of the spectral
broadening caused by the time rate of change of the multipath components
due to the relative motion between transmitter and receiver. Depending on
how rapidly the multipath components change, the channel may be classiﬁed
either as a fast or a slow fading channel. Inversely proportional to one another
are the Doppler spread and the coherence time. The coherence time, T
coh
,
is the time domain dual of Doppler spread and is used to characterize the
timevarying nature of the frequency dispersiveness of the channel in the
time domain. It is a statistical measure of the time duration over which the
channel impulse response is essentially invariant quantifying the similarity of
the channel response at diﬀerent times [13]. In 802.162004, the coherence
time of the channel is assumed to be longer than the frame duration, leading
to quasistatic scenarios.
Rayleigh and Ricean fading models
Wireless channels can be characterized with tap coeﬃcients that are complex
valued Gaussian random variables. A channel model where there are only
non lineofsight communications is characterized by a Rayleigh distribution.
On the contrary, if dominating paths are present, the channel coeﬃcients are
modeled by a Ricean distribution.
As already mentioned, a Rayleigh distribution is normally used to model
NLoS communications. It is statistically characterized by a fading amplitude,
α(t), modeled with a Rayleigh probability distribution, which has zeromean
Gaussian components. Furthermore, the phase, φ(t), is uniformly distributed
over the interval (0, 2π). The fading amplitude is described by the probability
density function (pdf):
f
Ray
(a) =
_
a
σ
2
exp(−
a
2
2σ
2
) if a ≥ 0
0 if a < 0.
(3.2  5)
On the other hand, when the components of α(t) are Gaussian with non
zero mean values and the phase is also nonzero mean, the amplitude is
characterized statistically by the Rice probability distribution. In this case,
the channel presents multipath propagation with some dominating paths,
i.e. representing a major part of the channel energy. The pdf of the Ricean
fading amplitude is given by
f
Rice
(a) =
_
a
σ
2
exp(−
a
2
+ρ
2
2σ
2
)I
0
_
aρ
σ
2
_
if a ≥ 0
0 if a < 0,
(3.2  6)
CHAPTER 3. CHANNEL 37
where the parameter ρ
2
represents the power of the received nonfading signal
component, and I
0
is the modiﬁed Bessel function of ﬁrst kind and order zero.
The Ricean distribution is usually expressed with the Kfactor deﬁned
as the ratio of the power of the deterministic signal to the variance of the
multipath component:
K =
ρ
2
2σ
2
. (3.2  7)
If K approaches zero, then the Rice distribution degenerates in a Rayleigh
distribution. Thus, when ρ has values near to 0, K is prone to −∞ dB,
and since the dominant path decreases in amplitude, the Rice distribution
becomes a Rayleigh distribution. Furthermore, if K approaches inﬁnity, one
path will contain the whole channel energy, corresponding to a LoS scenario.
3.2.2 Flat fading
When considering the transmission of a speciﬁc signal, the properties of that
signal play a role in determining whether the eﬀects caused by the channel on
it are invariant in any given domain. This relationship existing between the
coherence of the channel and the properties of the signal is captured by the
notion of selectivity. If the channel is selective, then the region of support
2
of the transmitted signal is larger than the coherence interval. Therefore, the
channel is not ﬂat with respect to the signal in that domain.
However, when the channel has a constant gain and linear phase response
over a bandwidth that is greater than the bandwidth of the transmitted
signal, the received signal undergoes ﬂat fading. For this kind of fading,
the spectral characteristics of the transmitted signal are preserved when it
propagates through the channel, and only the received signal power ﬂuctuates
due to the multipath eﬀects. For this reason, ﬂat fading channels are also
known as amplitude varying channels. Moreover, they are sometimes referred
to as narrowband channels since the bandwidth of the applied signal is narrow
as compared with the fading bandwidth.
To summarize, a signal undergoes ﬂat fading if
W < B
coh
(3.2  8)
and
T
sym
> σ
τ
. (3.2  9)
2
The region of support of a function f(x) is deﬁned as the set χ = x[f(x) ,= 0. The
size of such region is deﬁned to be max
x∈χ
(x) −min
x∈χ
(x).
CHAPTER 3. CHANNEL 38
3.2.3 Frequencyselective fading
The frequencyselective behaviour of the wireless propagation channel can be
obtained easily from the correlation between two signals (which have diﬀerent
frequencies) in the receiver. The existence of diﬀerent delay spread for the
diﬀerent propagation paths cause the statistical properties of two carriers
to be independent if they are suﬃciently frequency spaced. The maximum
frequency diﬀerence for which a high correlation level between the signals are
kept is known as the coherence bandwidth of the channel. That means that
for frequencyselective fading the spectrum of the transmitted signal has a
bandwidth which is greater than the coherence bandwidth of the channel.
Under such conditions the channel impulse response has a multipath delay
spread that exceeds the symbol period of the transmitted symbol. When
this occurs, the received signal includes multiple versions of the transmitted
waveform that are attenuated and delayed in time, and hence, the received
signal is distorted. Frequencyselective fading is due to time dispersion of
the transmitted symbols within the channel, thus inducing to intersymbol
interference (ISI).
To summarize, a signal undergoes frequencyselective fading if
W > B
coh
(3.2  10)
and
T
sym
< σ
τ
. (3.2  11)
However, when communicating with OFDM techniques, the eﬀects of
frequencyselective channel conditions can be decreased. Since the signal is
split into many narrowband subchannels, the channel can be considered as
constant (ﬂat) over each OFDM subchannel, provided that the respective
conditions for ﬂat fading channels are accomplished.
3.2.4 Channel model implementation
The goal of this section is to describe the diﬀerent steps that have been
performed to implement the channel in our simulator. The signal is ﬁrstly
oversampled and ﬁltered using an RRC interpolation ﬁlter at the transmitter.
The resulting signal is resampled to 100 MHz, that is the channel simulator
sampling frequency. After resampling, the signal is sent through the channel
itself, characterized by the channel model. This channel model distinguishes
three kinds of channels: a block fading channel, a timevariant channel, and
a timevariant block fading channel. At the receiver, some noise is added,
and the signal is decimated from the channel simulator sampling frequency.
Finally, it is ﬁltered and downsampled.
CHAPTER 3. CHANNEL 39
Block fading channel
The block fading channel [14] is used for simulating slowlyvarying fading
channels. That means that the fading varies slowly in time and the channel
coeﬃcient, h
i
, do not change during the transmission of one OFDM frame,
as it is shown in Figure 3.2  2.
channel 1 channel 2 ... channel N
1 OFDM frame
N OFDM frames
Figure 3.2  2: Block fading channel model.
Here, the channel realizations for consecutive frames are independent,
which allows for fast BER simulations but not for simulations incorporating
adaptive modulation and coding (AMC).
Timevariant channel
As previously explained, the variation in time of the wireless channel is caused
by user mobility and multipath propagation. The impulse response of time
varying channels is characterized as a timevariant linear ﬁlter, h(t, τ), and a
frequency shift appears in the received signal, f
d
, when users are in relative
motion.
The timevariant ﬁltering is implemented in the function "tvﬁlter", which
convolutes every sample of the transmitted signal with the instantaneous
impulse response. Since such a ﬁltering operation is of very high complexity,
the "timevariant block fading" model was implemented.
To generate the timevarying characteristic of the fading channel [15], the
function "jakes" is used. It utilizes a socalled sum of sinusoids to perform
this operation.
The assumptions of this model are [16]:
• The transmitter is ﬁxed and employs an omnidirectional antenna, that
has been vertically polarized.
• The ﬁeld incident on the receiver consists of N azimuthal plane waves.
CHAPTER 3. CHANNEL 40
• Each of the N azimuthal plane waves has an arbitrary carrier phase
and an arbitrary angle of arrival. The phase angles are assumed to be
uniformly distributed.
• The N azimuthal plane waves have equal average amplitudes, implying
the absence of a LoS path.
The model assumes that N equalstrength rays arrive at a moving receiver
with uniformly distributed arrival angles, ϕ
n
, such that ray n experiences a
Doppler shift given by
ω
n
= ω
M
cos(ϕ
n
). (3.2  12)
As a result, the kth fading waveform, T
k
(t), from a system that has M
independent fading waveforms, each of which is composed of N sinusoids,
can be expressed as in Equation 3.2  13:
T
k
(t) =
N−1
n=0
C
nk
exp j(ω
nk
t + φ
nk
), k = 0, 1, 2, ..., M −1, (3.2  13)
where C
nk
, ω
nk
, and φ
nk
represent the amplitude, frequency, and uniformly
random phase of the nth complex sinusoid in the kth fader.
For this situation, ω
nk
= ω
M
cos ϕ
nk
, where n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ..., N − 1, and
k = 0, 1, 2, 3, ..., M −1. Note that ϕ
nk
, that denotes the nth arrival angle in
the kth fader, depends on both, the fading waveform and the sinusoid.
The parameter C
nk
can be reduced to a constant value by assuming a
uniform antenna gain pattern and uniformly distributed incident power [15]:
C =
1
√
N
. (3.2  14)
Furthermore, diﬀerent spectrum shapes are obtained depending on the
values the parameters φ
nk
and ϕ
nk
take. Hence, a ﬂat spectrum, a Jake’s
spectrum, and a Clarke’s spectrum are deﬁned.
 Flat spectrum
The parameter ϕ
nk
takes the values ±π/2 thus making null the operation
cos ϕ
nk
.
Therefore, the exponential describing the fading waveform follows the
next expression:
X
t
= exp(j(2πf
d
t + φ
nk
)). (3.2  15)
CHAPTER 3. CHANNEL 41
 Clarke’s spectrum
For this kind of spectrum, however, the phase of the sinusoid, φ
nk
, is zero.
Therefore, the formula for the fading waveform is
X
t
= exp(j(2πf
d
cos ϕ
nk
)). (3.2  16)
Jake’s spectrum
Finally, the Jakes spectrum takes into account all the parameters that
have been previously described
3
:
X
t
= exp(j(2πf
d
t cos ϕ
nk
+ φ
nk
)). (3.2  17)
2.1. CHANNELS 5
Sender
bewegter
Empfänger
feststehende
Streuobjekte
bewegliche
Streuobjekte
v
Figure 2.4: Szenario of a frequencyselective, timevariant fadingchannel
The recently mentioned factors are of a random character, i.e. they are described by a random process. The
probability density funtions (pdf) of these processes are affected by two independent factors:
At the receiving side we encounter the sum of all paths, hence, we are interested in the pdf of that sum. The
pdf of a sum of statistically independent random processes is identical to the convolution of all pdf’s. Taking
into account permanently changing echopaths proves to be too costly. The central limit theorem
1
states that a
sufﬁcient number of independent randomprocesses are approximating a Gaussian or normalpdf. According to
its mean the magnitude of a complexvalued Gaussian process is Ricean or Rayleigh distributed, i.e. if a line of
sight exists the simulation of mobilechannels demands a Ricean process and a Rayleigh process, respectively,
if no line of sight is available (”worst case”).
Furthermore, the doppler effect plays a crucial role. Arising from the movement between transmitter and
receiver the receiving signal is shifted in frequency domain. The doppler frequency f
D
in turn is a random
process due to the random direction of motion
2
of the receiver in regard of the transmitter.
f
D
=
v
c
0
f
0
cos α (2.5)
Thinking of the receiving signal as a superposition of many discrete frequencies of identical amplitude the pdf
describes the amount of spectral lines in a frequency segment ∆f. The power within that segment results of
adding all powers of those spectral lines comprised by the segment. On account of the doppler effect, that
effects the position of the spectral lines ,the spectral distribution of the power corresponds to the power density
spectrum. One ﬁnds, that such a distribution is given by the socalled Jakes distribution.
100 80 60 40 20 0 20 40 60 80 100
10
2
10
1
10
0
10
1
PSfrag replacements
f in Hz
S
(
f
)
i
n
d
B
Figure 2.5: Jakesspectrum, maximum doppler frequency f
D,max
= 50Hz
1
Cf. [Kam96] section A3.3 or [OL02] section 6.4.1
2
The doppler frequency depends on the angle of incident α of the signal.
Figure 3.2  3: Jake’s Doppler spectrum.
The values of the parameters for the three kinds of spectrum already
deﬁned are summarized in Table 3.2  1.
Spectrum ϕ
nk
φ
nk
Flat ±π/2 ,= 0
Clarke ,= ±π/2 0
Jake ,= ±π/2 ,= 0
Table 3.2  1: Spectrum shapes for timevariant channels.
3
Simulation results have been performed using this spectrum.
CHAPTER 3. CHANNEL 42
Timevariant block fading channel
This kind of channels are a combination of block fading channels and time
variant channels. The channel ﬁltering operation is the same as in the block
fading channel, i.e. a constant channel is assumed during one OFDM frame.
The generated channel impulse responses in successive frames are changing
in a timevarying manner, i.e. the channel changes steadily. The steading
changing channel allows for AMC simulations when the channel changes
slowly compared to the OFDM frame duration.
3.3 The IMETRA channel model
The power delay proﬁles (PDP) specifying the energy distribution for several
propagation scenarios are deﬁned according to IMETRA. These scenarios
are derived from measurements in typical indoor and outdoor environments,
and specify the power delay proﬁle of each scenario from the relative delays
and the average power for each delay.
The IMETRA channel model speciﬁes the channel taps at a sample rate
of 100 MHz, i.e. it assumes that the 20 MHz bandwidth signal is oversampled
by a factor of ﬁve. Moreover, it is assumed that the channel supports a
maximum number of eight paths [17].
Table 3.3  1 shows all diﬀerent scenarios supported by the channel model.
The scenarios A to F are from IMETRA, U is a simple uncorrelated ﬂat
fading channel, and AWGN represents a channel that is only aﬀected by an
additive white Gaussian noise, which also have uncorrelated ﬂat fading. The
values for scenarios D, E, and F have been obtained from Medbo models A,
B and C, respectively.
Model Environment Scattering K (dB)
4
RMS delay
situation spread (ns)
U Uncorrelated ﬂat fading LoS/NLoS −∞ 0
A Flat fading LoS/NLoS −∞ 0
B Residential LoS/NLoS 10 15
C Residential/Small oﬃce LoS/NLoS 3 30
D (A) Typical oﬃce NLoS −∞ 50
E (B) Large oﬃce NLoS −∞ 100
F (C) Wide space (in and outdoor) NLoS −∞ 150
Table 3.3  1: Channel model scenarios.
4
The Rician factor, K, utilized when LoS transmissions are being performed, is only
applied for the ﬁrst tap.
Chapter 4
Receiver
As illustrated in Figure 4.0  1, the receiver basically performs the reverse
operation as the transmitter as well as a channel estimation necessary to
reveal the unknown channel coeﬃcients. This section explains the diﬀerent
steps performed by the receiver to reconstruct the transmitted bits.
Remove
CP
Disassembler Demapper FFT
256
Decoder
Output
bits
Received
data
Reed
Solomon
Encoder
Convolutional
Encoder
Puncture Interleaver
Remove
zeros
Channel
estimator
Training
Pilot
Figure 4.0  1: Receiver of the WiMAX system.
Firstly, the CP is removed and the received signal is converted to the
frequency domain using, in this case, the FFT algorithm. As it has been
previously explained in Section 2.6, an OFDM symbol is composed by data,
pilots, a zero DC subcarrier, and some guard bands. Thus, a process to
separate all these subcarriers is needed. First, the guard bands are removed,
and then, a disassembling is performed to obtain pilots, data, and trainings.
The training is used in the channel estimator, which calculates the channel
coeﬃcients. The estimated channel coeﬃcients can be used in the demapper
to perform an equalization of the data, and so, compensate the frequency
selective fading of the multipath propagation channel. Once the data has
been demapped, it enters the decoder block.
43
CHAPTER 4. RECEIVER 44
4.1 Fast Fourier Transform algorithm
As explained in Section 2.8, the IFFT algorithm represents a rapid way for
modulating a group of subcarriers in parallel. Either the FFT or the IFFT
are a linear pair of processes, therefore the FFT is necessary to convert the
signal again to the frequency domain
1
. The number of points used to perform
the FFT is also described in Section 2.8.
4.2 Removing the guard bands
When removing the subcarriers that correspond to the guard bands, the
frequency structure has to be taken into account. Although zero padding
acting as guard band is appended at the end of the subcarrier structure
at the transmitter, a rearrangement of this subcarriers is performed when
doing the IFFT operation, as shown in Figure 2.8  1. Thus, the guard bands
are removed from the center of the OFDM symbol, that is where they are
allocated after the arranging process.
4.3 Disassembler
The disassembler deals with the task of separating the signal, either in time or
in frequency domain, to get data, training, and pilots. These three diﬀerent
symbol streams form the output of the disassembler.
4.4 Channel estimator
The message sent by the transmitter is modiﬁed when it passes through the
channel, as some noise is added to the transmitted signal. Furthermore, if
the channel is a wireless channel, the received signal is additionally aﬀected
by the multiple reﬂections due to multipath transmission. Thus, the receiver
must determine, from the received signal, which of all possible messages was
the transmitted one. On the other hand, detection algorithms at the receiver
require knowledge of the channel impulse response (CIR). This knowledge
can be provided by performing channel estimation.
Usually, channel estimation is based on known sequences of bits, which
are unique at the transmitter and repeated in every transmission burst. This
way, the channel estimator is able to estimate CIR for each burst separately
1
Remember that the data symbols, originally in frequency domain, were converted to
the time domain in the transmitter using the IFFT.
CHAPTER 4. RECEIVER 45
by exploiting the known transmitted bits and the corresponding received
samples. In our case, channel estimation is based on the technique of least
squares (LS) and is performed using one training symbol per carrier.
The received signal on the kth subcarrier y
k
can be expressed as follows:
y
k
= p
k
h
k
+ n
k
, (4.4  1)
where h
k
is the channel coeﬃcient for the kth subcarrier, p
k
is the training
symbol, and n
k
is a noise symbol.
The LS channel estimates can be obtained by ﬁnding the minimum squared
error, as expressed in Equation 4.4  2:
´
h
k
= arg min
h
k
[y
k
−p
k
h
k
[. (4.4  2)
If white Gaussian noise is assumed, Equation 4.4  2 results in
´
h
k,LS
= (p
∗
k
p
k
)
−1
p
∗
k
y
k
, (4.4  3)
where the expressions ()
∗
and ()
−1
denote conjugation and inverse operation,
respectively. This estimator is implemented for all subcarriers where a pilot
symbol unequal to zero is transmitted.
In the simulator, channel estimation is implemented using either the
short, the long or both training symbols. The use of one or another training
sequence depends on the values of the averaging parameters.
The long training used for channel estimation is P
EVEN
, and as described
in Equation 2.5  2, it has null values for the odd indices. If only the long
training sequence is used for channel estimation, Equation 4.4  3 results in
´
h
k,LS
= 0.25p
∗
k
y
k
. (4.4  4)
The short training has values diﬀerent than zero only for the indices that
are multiple of 4, as deﬁned in Equation 2.5  1. Here, Equation 4.4  3 reduces
to the expression
´
h
k,LS
= 0.125p
∗
k
y
k
. (4.4  5)
A better channel estimate can be achieved if averaging in the frequency
domain is performed. This way, the averaging parameter deﬁnes how many
subcarriers are taken into account when performing the cited averaging.
While small averaging factors improve the performance in strongly frequency
selective channels, large averaging factors improve the performance in ﬂat
fading channels.
The two parameters deﬁning the described averaging factors are called
LongAveraging and ShortAveraging, and can be zero or positive. A value
CHAPTER 4. RECEIVER 46
of "zero" means that no averaging over the corresponding training sequence
is performed, and so, the corresponding training symbol is not used while
performing the channel estimation. In this way, it can also be determined if
only the short or long training sequence, or both training sequences are used
for channel estimation.
4.5 Demapper
At the receiving end of the communication link the demapper provides the
interface between the transmission channel and the functions that compute
and deliver estimates of the transmitted data bits to the user. Furthermore,
the demapper operates on the waveform that is received in each separate
transmission symbol interval and produces a number or a set of numbers
that represent an estimate of a transmitted binary or Mary symbol. Thus,
the demapping methods are used for decision metrics with the aim of making
a decision about which bit, "zero" or "one", was transmitted. This decision
metric can be as simple as hard decision, or more sophisticated, being then
a soft decision.
Hard demapping methods output a hard decision as a function of the
input, and this form of output is applicationdependent. However, the soft
demapping outputs a real number, in the form of a loglikelihood ratio. This
is the logarithm of the ratio between the likelihood that the target produced
the speech input and the likelihood that a nontarget produced the input. In
contrast, this form of output is applicationindependent in the sense that this
likelihood ratio output can theoretically be used to make optimal decisions
for any given target prior.
4.5.1 Hard Demapping
Hard demapping is based on the minimum Euclidean distances between the
received symbol and all allowed points in the constellation map. This method
involves calculating all cited distances and selecting as the received symbol
the point in the constellation map with the smallest Euclidean distance.
Equation 4.5  1 gives the formula to calculate the Euclidean distance from
which the decision metric is obtained. As it can be seen, the knowledge of the
channel coeﬃcients, or its estimates, is needed to implement hard demapping:
d
E
= [y −hs[. (4.5  1)
CHAPTER 4. RECEIVER 47
d
E
is the Euclidean distance, y denotes the received symbol, h represents
the channel coeﬃcients, and s is used to denote the transmitted symbols.
Thus, the decision metric is calculated as follows:
´ s = argmin
s
d
E
= argmin
s
[y −hs[. (4.5  2)
4.5.2 Soft demapping
Soft demapping uses loglikelihood ratios [18] to propose a decision metric.
This loglikelihood ratios are calculated for every bit of the symbol. The
method gives probabilities of well receiving a bit or not. These probabilities
can be further used to improve the performance of the succeeding Viterbi
decoder. In the simulator, the socalled maxlogMAP was implemented.
The loglikelihood ratio (LLR) of decision
ˆ
b
k
is deﬁned in Equation 4.5  3:
LLR(b
k
) = ln
sb
k
=1
p(y[s)
sb
k
=0
p(y[s)
. (4.5  3)
The conditional pdf
2
of the received bit, which is complex Gaussian, is
deﬁned as follows:
p(y[s) =
1
√
2πσ
v
exp
_
−
1
2
[hs −y[
2
σ
2
v
_
,
where σ
2
v
is the noise variance of the signal, and σ
v
the standard deviation.
Thus, Equation 4.5  3 yields
LLR(b
k
) = ln
sb
k
=1
exp
_
−
1
2
hs−y
2
σ
2
v
_
sb
k
=0
exp
_
−
1
2
hs−y
2
σ
2
v
_. (4.5  4)
Since the calculation of Equation 4.5  4 is of very high complexity a log
sum approximation is used. This approximation is good as long as the sum
in the lefthand side is dominated by the largest term: ln
j
z
j
≈ max
j
ln z
j
.
Thus, the computational complexity is reduced, and the LLR is calculated
as in Equation 4.5  5:
LLR(b
k
) ≈ ln
max
sb
k
=1
exp
_
−
1
2
hs−y
2
σ
2
v
_
max
sb
k
=0
exp
_
−
1
2
hs−y
2
σ
2
v
_. (4.5  5)
2
Probability Density Function
CHAPTER 4. RECEIVER 48
At the end, the algorithm consists on calculating the minimum distance
between the received symbol and all symbols in the constellation map where
the bit b
k
is equal to "one", the minimum distance between the received
symbol and the constellation points where the bit b
k
is equal to "zero" in
this position, and then, taking the diﬀerence between both distances:
LLR(b
k
) = min
sb
k
=1
[hs −y[
2
− min
sb
k
=0
[hs −y[
2
. (4.5  6)
A positive LLR corresponds to a "zero", and a negative LLR corresponds
to a "one". Therefore, the larger the LLR is in absolute term the higher is
the probability that a "zero" or a "one" was transmitted.
An example of how the LLR calculation works is going to be shown next.
The example uses a 4QAM constellation map, and the received symbol has
been represented with an "x". Moreover, channel coeﬃcients equal to "one"
have been assumed to make the example easier to explain.
The example begins with the calculation of the LLR for the bit b
0
, situated
on the right side, as shown in Figure 4.5  1.
00
01
10
11
 

 1
1
1
1
.
x
00
01
10
11
 

 1
1
1
1
.
x
d
2
d
1
b
1
b
0
b
1
b
0
(a)
00
01
10
11
 

 1
1
1
1
.
x
00
01
10
11
 

 1
1
1
1
.
x
d
2
d
1
b
1
b
0
b
1
b
0
(b)
Figure 4.5  1: Example of calculating the LLR for the bit b
0
. In subﬁgure
(a), the minimum distance between the received bit and b
0
= 1 is calculated.
Subﬁgure (b) makes the same calculation for b
0
= 0.
d
1
is the minimum distance between the received bit and the points in
the constellation map that have a bit equal to "one" in the position of the bit
b
0
. The same operation is performed for the bit b
0
equal to "zero", obtaining
the distance d
2
. The numerical values for these distances are d
1
= 1.56
and d
2
= 0.92. The LLR can be calculated as the diﬀerence between both
distances: LLR = d
1
− d
2
. Replacing the numerical values, it has been
obtained a result of 0.64 for LLR(b
0
).
CHAPTER 4. RECEIVER 49
The same steps must be followed to get the LLR value for the bit b
1
. This
process is depicted in Figure 4.5  2. In this case, d
1
= 1.43, d
2
= 0.92, and
LLR(b
1
) = 0.51.
00
01
10
11
 

 1
1
1
1
.
x
00
01
10
11
 

 1
1
1
1
.
x
d
2
d
1
b
1
b
0
b
1
b
0
(a) Calculation of d
1
.
00
01
10
11
 

 1
1
1
1
.
x
00
01
10
11
 

 1
1
1
1
.
x
d
2
d
1
b
1
b
0
b
1
b
0
(b) Calculation of d
2
.
Figure 4.5  2: Example of calculating the LLR for the bit b
1
.
Both LLR(b
0
) and LLR(b
1
) have positive values. Therefore, it can be
concluded that the symbol "00" is the one that have been transmitted with
the highest probability.
4.6 Decoder
The ﬁnal stage of receive processing is the decoder. A block diagram of the
decoder is depicted in Figure 4.6  1.
Deinterleaver
Insert
Zeros
Viterbi
Decoder
ReedSolomon
Decoder
Figure 4.6  1: Block diagram of the decoding process.
The decoder accepts the sequence of bits or LLRs from the demapper
and, in accordance with the encoding method that was used, attempts to
reproduce the information originally generated by the source. Like in the
encoder block, the decoder is also composed of four steps, which perform
diverse operations with the aim of reversing the process done by the encoder.
CHAPTER 4. RECEIVER 50
4.6.1 Deinterleaving
The deinterleaver rearranges the bits from each burst in the correct way by
ordering them consecutively as before the interleaving process. It consists of
two blocks, a general block deinterleaver and a matrix deinterleaver.
These blocks work similarly as the ones used in the interleaver. The
general block deinterleaver rearranges the elements of its input according to
an index vector. The matrix deinterleaver performs block deinterleaving by
ﬁlling a matrix with the input symbols column by column, and then, sending
its contents to the output row by row. The parameters used in both blocks
are the same as those ones used in the interleaving process
3
.
4.6.2 Inserting zeros
The block named "Insert Zeros" deals with the task of reversing the process
performed by the "Puncture" block. As previously explained in Section 2.2.3,
the puncturing process consists of deleting bits from a stream. The receiver
does not know the value of the deleted bits but it can know their position
from the puncturing vectors. Thus, zeros are used to ﬁll the corresponding
hollows of the stream in order to get the same code rate as before performing
the puncturing process.
The inserted zeros can also be seen as erasures from the channel. They
have no inﬂuence on the metric calculation of the succeeding Viterbi decoder
described in the following section.
4.6.3 Viterbi decoder
The Viterbi algorithm reduces the computational load by taking advantage of
the special structure of the trellis code. Another advantage is its complexity,
which is not a function of the number of symbols that compose the codeword
sequence. The Viterbi algorithm performs approximate maximum likelihood
decoding. It involves calculating a measure of similarity or distance between
the received signal at time t
i
, and all the trellis paths entering each state at
the same time.
The algorithm works by removing those trellis paths from consideration
that could not possibly be candidates for the maximum likelihood choice.
When two paths enter the same state, the one that has the best metric is
chosen as the "surviving" path. The selection of the diﬀerent "surviving"
paths is performed for all the states. The decoder continues in this way
3
See Section 2.2.4 for the equations that describe the parameters of both, the interleaver
and the deinterleaver.
CHAPTER 4. RECEIVER 51
to advance deeper into the trellis making decisions by eliminating the least
likely paths. The early rejection of unlikely paths is the fact that reduces
the complexity. The goal of selecting the optimum path can be expressed
equivalently as choosing the codeword with the maximum likelihood metric,
or as choosing the codeword with the minimum distance metric.
Furthermore, the delay introduced in the decoding process has to be taken
into account. The rejection of possible paths does not really begin until the
third step in the representation in the trellis diagram. This is due to the fact
that until this time two branches can not have converged in one state, and
thus, no decision can be done. This delay eﬀect is considered in a parameter
called traceback depth, which speciﬁes how many symbols may preceed the
beginning of the algorithm. For code rates of 1/2, a typical value for the
traceback depth is about ﬁve times the constraint length of the code.
Another parameters of the Viterbi decoder block of Simulink are the trellis
structure used in the convolutional encoder, the decision type of decoding,
and the operation mode. They are deﬁned as follows:
• The type of signals that can support the Viterbi decoder block are
based on the decision type parameter. This parameter can have three
values: unquantized, harddecision, or softdecision.
As the decision process has been implemented in the demapper, the
last kind of decision type, that is the "unquantized", is the one used
in our simulator. It accepts real numbers as inputs for the decoder
block. The positive numbers are interpreted as a logical zero, and the
negative ones, as a logical one. However, when this parameter is set to
"softdecision", the entries of this block are integers between 0 (most
conﬁdent decision for logical zero) and 2
b
(most conﬁdent decision for
logical one), being b the number of softdecision bits.
• The operation mode parameter controls which method the block uses
for transitioning between successive frames.
The "truncated" mode, in which each frame is treated independently
and the traceback depth parameter starts at the state with the best
metric and ends in the allzeros state, is the operation mode used in
the simulator.
Other values for this parameter are the "continuous" and "terminated"
modes.
For more details about these parameters consult the documentation help
of Matlab, or see [19].
CHAPTER 4. RECEIVER 52
4.6.4 ReedSolomon decoder
The last part of the decoding process is the ReedSolomon decoding. It
performs the necessary operations to decode the signal, and get, at the end,
the original message sent by the source. As in all the receiver blocks, the RS
decoder reverses the diﬀerent steps performed by its corresponding encoding
block, explained in Section 2.2.1. Thus, the RS decoder takes codewords
of length n, and, after decoding the signal, it returns messages of length
k, being n = 255 and k = 239, the same as the ones described in the RS
encoder. Furthermore, the implementation for the RS decoder block has
been performed with a Matlab Sfunction using a Cﬁle
4
.
The block diagram of the RS decoder is depicted in Figure 4.6  2.
Reshape
1
Insert
zeros 1
Insert
zeros 2
Unbuffer
Select
rows
Buffer
RS
decoder
Reshape
1
Vertical
concat.
Select
rows 1
Reshape
2
RS
decoder
Reshape
3
Select
rows 2
Reshape
4
Zeros 1
Zeros 2
Insert
zeros 1
Insert
zeros 2
Unbuffer
RS
decoder
Select
rows
Reshape
1
Buffer
Figure 4.6  2: Block diagram of the ReedSolomon decoder.
The input of the RS decoder block of Simulink accepts vectors, with a
length that are integer multiples of ln. Its output is, in this case, a vector
with a length that is the same integer multiple of lk. Hence, a process to get
the correct amount of bytes that enter the RS decoder block, and afterwards,
rearranges these bytes, needs to be performed ﬁrstly.
After the encoding process, a data block with size (k + 2t) N
RS
is
obtained, as it can be appreciated in Figure 2.2  2. Nonetheless, the structure
that will enter the decoder block has to be the same as the one that outputs
the encoder block, before discarding the corresponding added bytes from
the shortening and puncturing process. "Reshape 1" deals with the task of
rearranging the data in a matrix form, with the speciﬁed size (k +2t) N
RS
,
being k and t the parameters listed in Table 2.2  1. The block "Insert zeros
1" adds 239 − k zerobytes at the beginning of the structure with the aim
of constructing the zero preﬁx. The 16 − 2k parity bytes are obtained from
"Insert zeros 2". "Unbuﬀer" arranges the data from the matrix structure in
a row vector. It has to be taken into account that this block introduces a
delay equal to one frame in the system. Finally, "Select rows" has the task of
selecting only the k original data bytes, and the "Buﬀer"block redistributes
its input samples in a new frame size, kN
RS
.
4
The sourcecode used to generate a Matlab Sfuncion is available from
http://rscode.sourceforge.net and has been published under the Lesser General Public
License (LGPL).
Chapter 5
MIMO transmission
Applying multiple antennas at both ends of a communication system can not
only greatly improve the capacity and the throughput of a wireless link in
ﬂatfading but also in frequencyselective fading channels, specially when the
environment provides rich scattering.
Multipleinput multipleoutput systems, also known as MIMO, have MEA
1
arrays at both transmit and receive sides. High data rates are achieved when
implementing such structures without increasing neither the bandwidth nor
the total transmission power. Additionally, the use of multiple antennas at
both transmitter and receiver provides a diversity advantage, that means a
signiﬁcant increase in capacity, i.e. improvement in SNR and hence in BER
at the receiver [20] [21].
This chapter presents the theoretical background of the MIMO channel.
Spacetime coding (STC) as well as the maximum ratio combining (MRC)
technique are presented as the solutions implemented to perform the MIMO
transmission and reception, respectively. Finally, a detailed description of
the MIMO implementation in the simulator is included.
5.1 MIMO communications theory
When communicating through a wireless channel, transmitted signals suﬀer
from attenuation and fading due to multipath in the channel, thus making it
diﬃcult for the receiver to determine these signals. Diversity techniques take
advantage of the multipath propagation characteristics to improve receiver
sensitivity. MIMO systems utilize antenna diversity to obtain the mentioned
improvement and hence combat fading.
1
MultiElement Antenna
53
CHAPTER 5. MIMO TRANSMISSION 54
A MIMO system characterizes itself by using multiple antennas at both
transmitter and receiver. However, if only multiple antennas are deployed
at one end of the communication system, or both ends use a single antenna,
the MIMO system changes into a SIMO, MISO or SISO system [22]. In this
way, when only multiple antennas are deployed at the receiver, the MIMO
system reduces to a singleinput multipleoutput (SIMO) system. Similarly,
when the system has only one receive antenna but multiple antennas at
the transmitter side, the MIMO system reduces to a multipleinput single
output (MISO). When both, transmitter and receiver, use a single antenna,
the MIMO system simpliﬁes to a singleinput singleoutput(SISO).
The main advantages of MIMO channels over traditional SISO channels
are the array gain, the diversity gain, and the multiplexing gain. Array gain
and diversity gain are not exclusive of MIMO channels and also exist in SIMO
and MISO channels. Multiplexing gain, however, is a unique characteristic
of MIMO channels [23]. Array gain is the improvement in SINR
2
obtained
by coherently combining the signals on multiple transmit or multiple receive
dimensions and is easily characterized as a shift of the BER curve due to the
gain in SINR. Diversity gain is the improvement in link reliability obtained
by receiving replicas of the information signal through independently fading
links, branches, or dimensions. It is characterized by an steepen slope of the
BER curve in the low BER region.
The three major forms of diversity exploited in wireless communication
systems are temporal, frequency, and spatial diversity. Transmit diversity is
more diﬃcult to exploit than receive diversity since special modulation and
coding schemes are required, i.e. spacetime coding, whereas receive diversity
simply needs the multiple receive dimensions to fade independently without
requiring any speciﬁc modulation or coding scheme.
5.1.1 The MIMO channel model
The signal model for a MIMO channel composed by N
T
transmit and N
R
receive dimensions is
y = Hs +n, (5.1  1)
where s ∈ C
N
T
×1
is the transmitted vector, H ∈ C
N
R
×N
T
is the channel
matrix, y ∈ C
N
R
×1
is the received vector, and n ∈ C
N
R
×1
is the noise vector.
This signal model represents a single transmission. For a communication with
multiple transmissions the signals are indexed with a timediscrete index as
y(t) = Hs(t)+n(t). The channel can even be considered timevarying, where
it may be denoted as H(t).
2
Signal to InterferenceplusNoise Ratio
CHAPTER 5. MIMO TRANSMISSION 55
Figure 5.1  1 depicts a MIMO scenario with N
T
transmit antennas and
N
R
receive antennas. The signals at the transmit antenna array are denoted
by vector s(t) = [s
1
(t), s
2
(t), ..., s
N
T
(t)]
T
, and similarly, the signals at the
receiver are y(t) = [y
1
(t), y
2
(t), ..., y
N
R
(t)]
T
, where ()
T
denotes transposition,
and s
m
(t) and y
m
(t) are the signals at the mth transmit antenna port and
at the mth receive antenna port, respectively.
scattering
medium
s
1
(t)
s
2
(t)
s
NT
(t)
y
1
(t)
y
2
(t)
y
NR
(t)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
s(t) y(t)
N
T
transmit
antennas
N
R
receive
antennas
Figure 5.1  1: A MIMO channel model in a scattering environment.
The MIMO radio channel describing the connection between transmitter
and receiver can be expressed as
H =
_
_
_
_
_
α
11
α
12
α
1N
T
α
21
α
22
α
2N
T
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
α
N
R
1
α
N
R
2
α
N
R
N
T
_
_
_
_
_
, (5.1  2)
where α
nm
is the complex transmission coeﬃcient from antenna m at the
transmitter to antenna n at the receiver. Moreover, the path gains, ¦α
ij
¦,
are correlated depending on the propagation environment, the polarization
of the antenna elements, and the spacing between them.
The relation between the vectors s(t) and y(t) can be expressed as
y(t) = H(t)s(t). (5.1  3)
In order to take the channel correlation into account, which has a strong
impact on the achievable performance of the system, two diﬀerent spatial
channel models are considered.
CHAPTER 5. MIMO TRANSMISSION 56
Spatially uncorrelated channel
In spatially uncorrelated channels, the antenna elements are located far away
from each other. Thus, the entries of the channel matrix H can be modeled
as independent identically distributed (i.i.d.), circularly symmetric, complex
Gaussian random variables, with zero mean and unit variance:
H ∼ ^
N
T
×N
R
C
(0, 1). (5.1  4)
Spatially correlated channel
For spatially correlated channels, the widely known Kronecker model is used
[24]. In order to model this kind of channel, a transmit correlation matrix
R
T
, a receive correlation matrix R
R
, and an i.i.d. complex Gaussian matrix
G ∈ ^
N
T
×N
R
C
are used:
H = R
1/2
R
G(R
1/2
T
)
T
. (5.1  5)
The correlation matrices R
R
and R
T
are taken from the IMETRA model
explained in Section 3.3. These matrices are calculated as R
R
= E¦HH
H
¦
and R
T
= E¦H
H
H¦. Furthermore, they are normalized in such a way that
E¦tr(H
H
H)¦= N
R
N
T
, as in the i.i.d. case
3
.
5.1.2 SpaceTime Coding
Spacetime coding (STC) is an eﬃcient approach to exploit the enormous
diversity oﬀered by the MIMO. It is used to obtain gains due to spatial
diversity via multiple transmit and receive antennas. Moreover, a diversity
gain proportional to the number of antennas at both transmit and receive
sides can be achieved. One popular representation of these codes is the
Alamouti scheme [25] for two transmit antennas.
STC techniques are used to improve the performance of MIMO systems.
Their central issue is the exploitation of multipath eﬀects in order to achieve
very high spectral eﬃciencies. With this purpose, the principal aim of the
spacetime coding lies in the design of twodimensional signal matrices to
be transmitted during a speciﬁed time period on a number of antennas.
Thus, it introduces redundancy in space through the addition of multiple
antennas, and redundancy in time through channel coding, enabling us to
exploit diversity in the spatial dimension, as well as a obtaining a coding
gain. Therefore, the transmit diversity plays an integral role in the STC
design.
3
A complete deﬁnition of the correlation matrices is held in Section B.1.
CHAPTER 5. MIMO TRANSMISSION 57
The Alamouti concept
Alamouti [25] [26] introduced a very simple scheme of spacetime block coding
(STBC) allowing transmissions from two antennas with the same data rate
as on a single antenna, but increasing the diversity at the receiver from one
to two in a ﬂat fading channel. As shown in Figure 5.1  2, the Alamouti
algorithm uses the space and the time domain to encode data, increasing the
performance of the system by coding the signals over the diﬀerent transmitter
branches. Thus, the Alamouti code achieves diversity two with full data rate
as it transmits two symbols in two time intervals.
Spacetime coding
• 2x1 Alamouti Scheme
• STC with rate 1
Æ2 input symbols are transmitted in two time steps
Input
s = (s
0
s
1
)
Output
r = (r
0
r
1
)
The received symbols are:
(f
0
)
t
0
(f
1
)
t
1
s
0
2
1
s
1
2
1
s
0
*
2
1 
s
1
*
2
1
Figure 5.1  2: 21 Alamouti scheme.
In the ﬁrst time slot, transmit antennas Tx1 and Tx2 are sending symbols
s
0
and s
1
, respectively. In the next time slot, symbols −s
∗
1
and s
∗
0
are sent,
where ()
∗
denotes complex conjugation. Each symbol is multiplied by a
factor of a squared root of two in order to achieve a transmitted average power
of one in each time step. Furthermore, it is supposed that the channel, which
has transmission coeﬃcients h
1
and h
2
, remains constant and frequency ﬂat
over the two consecutive time steps.
The received vector, r, is formed by stacking two consecutive received
data samples in time, resulting in
r =
1
√
2
Sh +n, (5.1  6)
where r = [r
0
, r
1
]
T
represents the received vector, h = [h
1
, h
2
]
T
is the complex
channel vector, n = [n
0
, n
1
]
T
is the noise at the receiver, and S deﬁnes the
STC:
S =
_
s
0
s
1
s
∗
1
−s
∗
0
_
.
CHAPTER 5. MIMO TRANSMISSION 58
The vector equation in Equation 5.1  6 can be read explicitly as
r
0
=
1
√
2
s
0
h
1
+
1
√
2
s
1
h
2
+ n
0
, (5.1  7)
r
1
=
−1
√
2
s
∗
1
h
1
+
1
√
2
s
∗
0
h
2
+ n
1
. (5.1  8)
At the receiver, the vector y of the received signal is formed according to
y = [r
0
, r
∗
1
]
T
, which is equivalent to
r
0
=
1
√
2
s
0
h
1
+
1
√
2
s
1
h
2
+ n
0
, (5.1  9)
r
∗
1
=
1
√
2
s
0
h
∗
2
−
1
√
2
s
1
h
∗
1
+ n
∗
1
. (5.1  10)
These both equations can be rewritten in a matrix system as speciﬁed in
Equation 5.1  11:
_
r
0
r
∗
1
_
=
1
√
2
_
h
1
h
2
h
∗
2
−h
∗
1
__
s
0
s
1
_
+
_
n
0
n
∗
1
_
. (5.1  11)
The short notation for this system is the following:
y =
1
√
2
H
ν
s + ¯ n, (5.1  12)
where ¯ n represents the new noise vector obtained after the conjugation of
the second equation, ¯ n = [n
0
, n
∗
1
]
T
.
The resulting virtual (2 2) channel matrix, H
ν
, is orthogonal, i.e.
H
ν
H
H
ν
= H
ν
H
ν
H
= h
2
I
2
,
where ()
H
represents the hermitian operation, I
2
is the 22 identity matrix,
and h
2
is the power gain of the channel, with h
2
= [h
1
[
2
+[h
2
[
2
. Due to this
orthogonality, the Alamouti scheme decouples the MISO channel into two
virtually independent channels with channel gain h
2
and diversity d = 2.
The mentioned channel gain is deduced from Equation 5.1  13, which
speciﬁes that transmitted symbols can be estimated at the receiver as the
result of multiplying the received signals by the hermitian of the virtual
channel matrix. After performing the corresponding operations it results in
a signal with a gain of h
2
plus some modiﬁed noise
4
:
´s = H
ν
H
y =
1
√
2
h
2
s +H
H
ν
¯ n. (5.1  13)
4
The whole derivation of Equation 5.1  13 can be found in Section B.2.1.
CHAPTER 5. MIMO TRANSMISSION 59
Alamouti scheme with arbitrary number of receive antennas
A system with two transmit antennas and an arbitrary number of receive
antennas [27], as the one depicted in Figure 5.1  3, is analyzed next. The
already explained steps are applied to each of the receive antennas, denoting
the received signal in the ﬁrst and second time slot as r
0
and r
1
, respectively.
Spacetime coding
• 2x1 Alamouti Scheme
• STC with rate 1
Input
s = (s
0
s
1
)
Output
(r
0
r
1
)
T
(f
0
)
t
0
(f
1
)
t
1
s
0
2
1
s
1
2
1
s
0
*
2
1 
s
1
*
2
1
Figure 5.1  3: 2N
R
Alamouti scheme.
Vectors h
1
= [h
11
, h
12
, ..., h
1N
R
]
T
and h
2
= [h
21
, h
22
, ..., h
2N
R
]
T
contain the
channel coeﬃcients corresponding to the transmission from antenna Tx1 and
antenna Tx2 to every receive antenna, respectively.
As in the previous section, the received vector is
_
y
0
y
1
_
=
_
r
0
r
∗
1
_
=
1
√
2
_
h
1
h
2
h
∗
2
−h
∗
1
__
s
0
s
1
_
+
_
n
0
n
∗
1
_
, (5.1  14)
where n
0
and n
1
are noise vectors, corresponding to the noise added in
each receive branch.
Following the same steps as in the 21 Alamouti scheme, the estimation
of the transmitted symbols at the receiver is performed in Equation 5.1  15.
Since the power gain of the channel is, in this case, h
2
= h
1

2
+ h
2

2
,
it is possible to achieve a diversity order of 2N
R
. The whole description
of this formula for a 2 2 Alamouti scheme is further explained in section
Section B.2.2.
´s = H
ν
H
y =
1
√
2
h
2
s +H
H
ν
¯ n (5.1  15)
CHAPTER 5. MIMO TRANSMISSION 60
For a system with two receive antennas, Rx1 and Rx2, and according
to the above equations, the received signals would be r
0
= [r
0
(1)r
0
(2)]
T
and
r
1
= [r
1
(1)r
1
(2)]
T
, where r
0
(1) is the symbol received in antenna Rx1 at time
slot t
0
, and r
1
(1), the symbol received at time slot t
1
. In the same way, r
0
(2)
and r
1
(2) are the symbols received in antenna Rx2 during the two time slots.
Therefore, the signal that is received at the end is y = [r
0
r
∗
1
]
T
:
_
r
0
r
∗
1
_
=
_
_
_
_
r
0
(1)
r
0
(2)
r
∗
1
(1)
r
∗
1
(2)
_
_
_
_
=
1
√
2
_
_
_
_
h
11
h
21
h
12
h
22
h
∗
21
−h
∗
11
h
∗
22
−h
12
_
_
_
_
_
s
0
s
1
_
+
_
_
_
_
n
0
(1)
n
0
(2)
n
∗
1
(1)
n
∗
1
(2)
_
_
_
_
.
(5.1  16)
In this case the power gain of the channel is h
2
= h
1

2
2
+ h
2

2
2
and a
diversity order of 4 is achieved.
5.1.3 Maximum Ratio Combining
STC
Input
s = (s
0
s
1
)
Receiver
Output
r = (r
0
r
1
)
noise
h
1
h
2
STC
Input
s = (s
0
s
1
)
Receiver
Output
r =
(r
0
r
1
)
noise
h
1
h
2
s
0
s
1
(f
0
)
t
0
s
1
*
s
0
*
(f
1
)
t
1
n
0
n
1
h
2
h
1
s
1
·h
1
s
1
·h
2
s
1
·h
1

2
+n
0
h
1
*
s
1
·h
2

2
+n
1
h
2
*
s
1
h
2
+n
0
h
1
*+n
1
h
2
*
s
1
h
1
*
h
2
*
Figure 5.1  4: A system using two antennas in reception.
Maximum ratio combining (MRC) [26] is a special form of diversity where
multiple replicas of the same signal, received over diﬀerent diversity branches,
are combined in order to maximize the instantaneous SNR at the combiner
output. Before summing the signals of every receive branch the symbols on
all receive antennas are weighted. The weight factor corresponds with the
complex conjugated channel coeﬃcient of each receive branch.
The signal received on each antenna is given by
y
i
= h
i
s + n
i
, i = 1, 2, , N
R
, (5.1  17)
CHAPTER 5. MIMO TRANSMISSION 61
where h
i
and n
i
are the channel coeﬃcients and the noise experienced by
antenna i, respectively, s is the transmitted signal, and N
R
is the number of
receive antennas. Moreover, it is considered that the antennas are suﬃciently
spaced from each other and the channel coeﬃcients, aﬀected by fading, can
be assumed to be independent.
The weighted combination for the input antennas to be taken into account
is expressed as follows:
y =
N
R
i=1
β
i
y
i
= s
N
R
i=1
β
i
h
i
+
N
R
i=1
β
i
n
i
. (5.1  18)
From this combination, the SNR of the channel is given by
SNR(h
1
, h
2
, , h
N
R
) =
E[s
N
R
i=1
β
i
h
i
[
2
E[
N
R
i=1
β
i
n
i
[
2
=
[
N
R
i=1
β
i
h
i
[
2
N
R
i=1
[β
i
[
2
. (5.1  19)
Applying the CauchySchwartz inequality, it is straightforward to verify
that β
i
= h
∗
i
maximizes the SNR. Replacing this value in Equation 5.1  19,
the maximal SNR yields
SNR(h
1
, , h
N
R
) = SNR
N
R
i=1
[h
i
[
2
. (5.1  20)
The process described above is shown in Figure 5.1  4, where an example
of a receiver with dual antenna diversity is depicted. The signal is sent over
a channel with transmission coeﬃcients h
1
and h
2
, and reaches both receive
antennas with some added noise. Then, the process consists of multiplying
the signal in each receive branch by the corresponding conjugated channel
coeﬃcient, and at the end, the signals from both branches are summed.
It can be appreciated that the received signal is very similar to the one
obtained with the Alamouti scheme in Equation 5.1  13, as the same gain
in the signal is achieved, as well as some modiﬁed noise. However, better
performance is obtained with this scheme as only one symbol is transmitted
in one time interval and the unity average transmit power is already achieved
in each interval. Therefore, the resultant signal is not multiplied by the factor
1/
√
2 as in the Alamouti scheme, and consequently, a gain of 3 dB in power
is obtained.
5.2 MIMO implementation
This section describes the implementation of the mentioned MIMO in the
simulator, thus explaining in detail the respective changes to be performed
in both transmitter and receiver.
CHAPTER 5. MIMO TRANSMISSION 62
5.2.1 Transmitter
Mapper Assembler
to
Add Zeros
from
Encoder
Pilot
Training0
Reed
Solomon
Encoder
Convolutional
Encoder
Puncture Interleaver
STC
Training1
Figure 5.2  1: MIMO transmitter in the WiMAX system.
The main aspects to be taken into account when implementing the MIMO
transmitter are focused on applying the STC algorithms in both OFDM
symbols and pilot subcarriers, as well as in the assembling process, as two
long training sequences are used now.
STC block
This block performs the Alamouti algorithm described in Equation 5.1  11.
As explained, the basic Alamouti scheme transmits two complex symbols,
s
0
and s
1
, using the multipleinput singleoutput channel twice with channel
vector values h
1
and h
2
. During the ﬁrst channel use antenna Tx1 transmits
s
0
, and antenna Tx2, s
1
. In the following channel use, symbols −s
∗
1
and s
∗
0
are transmitted from Tx1 and Tx2 respectively.
Pilot symbols
On a given pilot subcarrier, the same pilot symbol is used for the STC block.
The pilot symbol for pilot subcarrier "s" obtained after it has been 2PAM
modulated is p
s
, and the OFDM symbols that enter into the STC block are
symbols "k" and "k+1". The standard [4] speciﬁes that the modulation on
pilot subcarrier "s" during the transmission of symbol "k" shall be p
s
on both
transmit antennas. Nevertheless, during symbol "k+1", the modulation on
the pilot subcarrier shall be −p
s
for antenna 1, and p
s
for antenna 2.
Antenna 1 Antenna2
symbol k pilot p
s
pilot p
s
symbol k + 1 pilot −p
s
pilot p
s
CHAPTER 5. MIMO TRANSMISSION 63
Preambles
Two long training sequences are needed when using the MIMO transmission.
As explained in Section 2.5, preambles for DL transmissions are composed of
three consecutive OFDM symbols. The ﬁrst one, set according to the short
training P
SHORT
, is used for synchronization. The second symbol uses a long
training sequence, necessary in the receiver for channel estimation. The ﬁrst
antenna transmits the sequence P
EVEN
as long training sequence, and the
second antenna transmits the sequence P
ODD
. As in the SISO case, the last
symbol of the preamble is the FCH.
The following expressions describe the idea already explained:
Antenna 1 = P
SHORT
+ P
EVEN
+ FCH,
Antenna 2 = P
SHORT
+ P
ODD
+ FCH.
Assembler
...
...
...
... ...
...
...
...
symbol
time
frequency
S
0
= (s
0,1
s
0,2
s
0,3
… s
0,n1
s
0,n
) S
1
= (s
1,1
s
1,2
s
1,3
… s
1,n1
s
1,n
)
S
1
* = (s
1,1
* s
1,2
* s
1,3
* … s
1,n1
* s
1,n
*) S
0
* = (s
0,1
* s
0,2
* s
0,3
* … s
0,n1
* s
0,n
*)

S
2
S
3
*
S
3
S
2
*
t
1
t
2
t
3
t
0
pilot subcarrier
pilot subcarrier
modulated data
modulated data
Figure 5.2  2: STC usage with OFDM.
The assembling process for the MIMO system is very similar to the SISO
transmission explained in Section 2.6.
For a better understanding, the STC usage with the OFDM symbols is
illustrated in Figure 5.2  2. During the ﬁrst time step, symbols S
0
and S
1
are
sent simultaneously from antenna 1 and antenna 2, respectively. Following
CHAPTER 5. MIMO TRANSMISSION 64
the Alamouti algorithm, the OFDM symbols −S
∗
1
and S
∗
0
are sent in the next
time step. The same operations are performed for the next time intervals,
thus the symbol pair (S
2
, S
3
) is sent during the time steps t
2
and t
3
, and so
on.
On the other hand, the pilot symbols are inserted between the OFDM
symbols as previously explained. Antenna 1 transmits p
s
and −p
s
in time
steps t
0
and t
1
, respectively. However, only p
s
is transmitted from antenna
2 during both time intervals.
5.2.2 Receiver
At the receiver only the blocks described in the following have to be changed
to allow detection of Alamouti coded signals.
Disassembler
When implementing the MIMO disassembler it has to be taken into account
that, although from diﬀerent antennas, two OFDM symbols are transmitted
in each time interval. Each OFDM symbol is processed as a matrix, where
each row represents a subcarrier. In this way, 3Dmatrices would be needed
in order to also specify, in this case, the antenna from where the OFDM is
being transmitted in each time step. However, Simulink does not support
3Dmatrices, and therefore, these OFDM symbols of diﬀerent antennas are
processed consecutively.
The mentioned disassembling process separates ﬁrst the two transmitted
OFDM symbols, and next, performs the separation of training sequences,
pilot subcarriers, and DC subcarrier from the original data subcarriers, as
explained in Section 4.3.
Channel estimator
The estimated channel coeﬃcients are calculated for each receive antenna as
explained in Section 4.4. Moreover, two long training sequences, P
EVEN
and
P
ODD
, are used when applying MIMO transmissions, and so, both have to be
considered for the channel estimation. If only one transmit antenna exists,
the channel estimation is performed using the sequence P
EVEN
. However,
when the two transmit antennas are being used, the second antenna will
estimate its channel coeﬃcients with P
ODD
. This is possible because P
EVEN
CHAPTER 5. MIMO TRANSMISSION 65
uses only even subcarriers and P
ODD
only odd subcarriers, making the OFDM
symbols P
EVEN
and P
ODD
orthogonal.
Demapper
The aim of the demapper is determining the symbol that was transmitted.
With this purpose, decision metric algorithms are developed. Both hard
demapping and soft demapping are implemented as described in Section 4.5.
However, the estimate of the received signal has to be calculated ﬁrst, and
depending on the diversity scheme, this calculation is performed in a diﬀerent
way.
When a scheme with two transmit antennas and only one receive antenna
is being used, the receive estimates are calculated from Equation 5.1  13:
´ s =
1
√
2
h
2
s +H
H
ν
¯ n.
On the other hand, when there is one transmit antenna and two receive
antennas, the estimate of the received signal is obtained following the MRC
formula:
´ s = s
1
h
2
+ n
0
h
∗
1
+ n
1
h
∗
2
,
where h
2
= [h
1
[
2
+[h
2
[
2
.
Finally, when two antennas at both ends of the communication system
are used, the estimation is performed as in Equation 5.1  15:
´ s =
1
√
2
h
2
s +H
H
ν
¯ n.
In this case, the channel gain is h
2
= h
1

2
+h
2

2
.
Chapter 6
Adaptive Modulation and Coding
The growing demand of all types of services, not only voice and data but
also multimedia services, aims for the design of increasingly more intelligent
and agile communication systems, capable of providing spectrally eﬃcient
and ﬂexible data rate access. These systems are able to adapt and adjust the
transmission parameters based on the link quality, improving the spectrum
eﬃciency of the system, and reaching, in this way, the capacity limits of the
underlying wireless channel. Link adaptation techniques, often referred to
as adaptive modulation and coding (AMC), are a good way for reaching the
cited requirements. They are designed to track the channel variations, thus
changing the modulation and coding scheme to yield a higher throughput by
transmitting with high information rates under favorable channel conditions
and reducing the information rate in response to channel degradation.
This chapter is focused on the implementation of such techniques. A
theoretical explanation, necessary to understand the operation principles of
adaptive modulation and coding, is brieﬂy given. Also a performance analysis
of the AMC scheme implemented in the simulator is furthermore presented
in this chapter.
6.1 Theory on the AMC technique
6.1.1 Introduction to adaptive transmission mechanisms
Since the available radio spectrum for wireless communications is extremely
scarce, there is a rapid growth in the demand of services for portable and
wireless devices, and, as these services become more and more complex, the
use of spectrally eﬃcient transmission schemes supporting higher information
rates is needed.
66
CHAPTER 6. ADAPTIVE MODULATION AND CODING 67
In traditional communication systems, the transmission is designed for a
"worst case" channel scenario thus coping with the channel variations and
still delivering an error rate below a speciﬁc limit. Adaptive transmission
schemes, however, are designed to track the channel quality by adapting
the channel throughput to the actual channel state. These techniques take
advantage of the timevarying nature of the wireless channel to vary the
transmitted power level, symbol rate, coding scheme, constellation size, or
any combination of these parameters, with the purpose of improving the link
average spectral eﬃciency, i.e. the number of information bits transmitted
per second per Hz bandwidth used.
Adaptive modulation and coding (AMC) is a promising tool for increasing
the spectral eﬃciency of timevarying wireless channels while maintaining a
predictable BER [28]. In AMC, not only the modulation order but also
the FEC scheme are varied by adjusting their code rate to the variations
in the communication channel. For example, in periods of high fade when
the channel is in a poor state, i.e. low SNR, the signal constellation size
is reduced in order to improve ﬁdelity, lowing the eﬀective SNR to make
transmission more robust. Conversely, in periods of low fade or high gain
(high SNR), the signal constellation size is increased in order to allow higher
data rate modulation schemes to be employed with low probability of error,
thus improving the instantaneous SNR. An example of utilization of the
cited AMC scheme is illustrated in Figure 6.1  1. It shows that as the range
increases, the system steps down to a lower modulation, but as closer to the
base station, higher order modulations can be used for increased throughput.
64QAM
16QAM
4QAM
2PAM
Figure 6.1  1: Scheme for the utilization of AMC.
CHAPTER 6. ADAPTIVE MODULATION AND CODING 68
6.1.2 Performance of the AMC scheme
A good performance of AMC schemes requires accurate channel estimation
at the receiver and a reliable feedback path between that estimator and the
transmitter on which the receiver reports channel state information (CSI) to
the transmitter. In order to perform a good implementation the next steps
must be followed:
Channel quality estimation
The transmitter requires an estimate of the expected channel conditions for
the next transmission interval. Since this knowledge can only be gained
by prediction from past channel quality estimations, the adaptive system
can only operate eﬃciently in an environment with relatively slowlyvarying
channel conditions [29]. Therefore, the delay between the quality estimation
and the actual transmission in relation to the maximal Doppler frequency
of the channel is crucial for the system implementation since poor system
performance will result if the channel estimate is obsolete at the time of
transmission.
Although there are diﬀerent ways to estimate the channel quality, the
AMC scheme explained in this section is related with the measurement of the
SNR, as it is often used in many systems as the channel quality information.
Parameter adaptation
The choice of the appropriate modulation and coding mode to be used in the
next transmission is made by the transmitter, based on the prediction of the
channel conditions for the next time interval. An SNR threshold such that
it guarantees a BER below the target BER, BER
0
, is deﬁned by the system
for each scheme whenever the SNR is above the SNR threshold.
The SNR thresholds are obtained from the BER vs. SNR characteristics
of a modulation mode on an AWGN channel. As outlined in Figure 6.1  2,
the method consists on splitting the SNR range into N + 1 SNR regions by
N + 2 SNR thresholds, ¦γ¦
N+1
n=0
, with γ
0
= 0 and γ
N+1
= ∞.
Each of the N schemes is then assigned to operate within a particular
SNR region. When the SNR γ falls within the SNR region γ
n
≤ γ ≤ γ
n+1
,
the associated channel state information is sent back to the transmitter. The
transmitter then adapts its transmission rate and coding and modulation
schemes by transmitting with a modulation scheme such that it guarantees
a BER below BER
0
. This enables the system to transmit with high spectral
eﬃciency when the SNR is high, and to reduce the spectral eﬃciency as the
SNR decreases.
CHAPTER 6. ADAPTIVE MODULATION AND CODING 69
5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30
10
6
10
5
10
4
10
3
10
2
10
1
10
0
SNR(dB)
B
E
R
2PAM
4QAM
16QAM
64QAM
γ
1
γ
2
γ
3
γ
4
BER
0
Figure 6.1  2: BER vs. SNR relationship and corresponding SNR thresholds
for N coding and modulation schemes employed by AMC.
Feedback mechanism
Once the receiver has estimated the channel SNR, converted it into BER
information for each mode candidate, and, based on a target BER, selected
the mode that yields the largest throughput while remaining within the BER
target bounds, it has to feed back the selected mode to the transmitter in
order that the adaptation can be performed.
However, the challenge associated with adaptive modulation and coding
is that the mobile channel is timevarying, and thus, the feedback of the
channel information becomes a limiting factor. Therefore, the assumption of
a slowlyvarying as well as a reliable feedback channel is necessary in order to
achieve an accurate performance of the AMC scheme. In this way, no delay or
transmission error can occur in the feedback channel so that no discrepancy
between the predicted and the actual SNR of the next frame appears.
Moreover, the receiver must also be informed of which demodulator and
decoding parameters to employ for the next received packet.
6.2 AMC implementation
This section explains the implementation of the cited adaptive modulation
and coding scheme. A few diﬀerences between this simulator version and
the last one that was mentioned when implementing the MIMO system are
encountered. On one hand, besides the channel coeﬃcients, the channel
CHAPTER 6. ADAPTIVE MODULATION AND CODING 70
estimator also estimates the corresponding SNR. On the other hand, a new
block is introduced with the aim of deciding the modulation and coding
mode to be switched at the transmitter. Furthermore, as appreciated in
Figure 6.2  1, not only the encoder and mapper in the transmit side but also
the decoder and demapper in the receiver are grouped into a unique block,
which implementation and function will be later discussed.
Transmitter
Channel
Estimator
AMC
Decoder &
Demapper
Encoder &
Mapper
channel coefficients
data symbols
from Disassembler
SNR
from
Disassembler
to
Assembler
Output
bits
Figure 6.2  1: AMC mechanism in the WiMAX system.
6.2.1 SNR estimation
The calculation of the SNR is performed in the channel estimator. As well
known, the SNR is obtained from dividing the signal power between the noise
power. Thus, the instantaneous SNR for each frame is calculated as
SNR =
s
n
,
where s and n are the average signal and noise power, respectively, in each
frame. While the signal power is obtained from the channel coeﬃcients, the
noise power is calculated from the noise variance, σ
2
ν
.
As stated in Section 2.5, the long training sequences are an interpolated
version of the sequence P
ALL
, where either P
EVEN
or P
ODD
use a subset
of even or odd subcarriers, respectively, while keeping null the remaining
subset. However, the training symbols are received with some additive noise,
and thus, the previous null carriers have now a nonzero value. The noise is
calculated from these carriers.
Furthermore, as it happened with the channel estimation, it has to be
taken into account whether the system uses one or two transmit antennas.
When only one transmit antenna is used the noise is obtained from P
EVEN
.
If the system has two transmit antennas, both P
EVEN
and P
ODD
are used
instead.
CHAPTER 6. ADAPTIVE MODULATION AND CODING 71
6.2.2 The AMC block
This block deals with the task of ﬁnding the decision thresholds, deciding
which of the modulation and coding schemes shown in Table 2.2  1 may be
employed in the next frame transmission, and feeding back this information
not only to the transmitter but also to the receiver.
As explained before, the SNR thresholds are calculated from the BER vs.
SNR curves. The curves depicted in Figure 6.2  2 have been obtained from
simulations performed with a perfect knowledge of the channel coeﬃcients in
an AWGN scenario. The ﬁgure shows seven curves corresponding to the seven
diﬀerent modulation and coding schemes allowed by the WiMAX system,
deﬁned from AMC1 to AMC7. The set of adaptation/switching thresholds
is obtained by reading the SNR points corresponding to a target BER.
5 0 5 10 15 20 25
10
2
10
1
10
0
Channel SNR [dB]
C
o
d
e
d
B
E
R
AMC1
AMC2
AMC3
AMC4
AMC5
AMC6
AMC7
A
M
C
1
A
M
C
1
A
M
C
2
A
M
C
3
A
M
C
4
A
M
C
5
A
M
C
6
A
M
C
7
Target BER
Figure 6.2  2: BER vs. SNR curves.
The implementation of this method is performed in a Matlab ﬁle. The
obtained coded BER values for a given SNR, for each of the diﬀerent AMC
schemes, are programmed. According to a target BER speciﬁed by the user
a selection function calculates the SNR thresholds, and the AMC scheme
to use in the next frame is decided by comparing these thresholds with the
estimated SNR of the channel.
CHAPTER 6. ADAPTIVE MODULATION AND CODING 72
6.2.3 Coding and decoding
Both transmitter and receiver have to be informed about which AMC scheme
to employ in the next transmission frame. An encoder and mapper in which
the parameters to be used were speciﬁed by the user were performed in the
simulator without the adaptive modulation and coding mechanism. However,
a bank of seven encoders and mappers, each one with a ﬁxed AMC scheme,
is now set up so that the transmitter can switch from one AMC scheme to
another based on the feedback information. The same operation is performed
at the receiver, where instead of only a demapper and a decoder, a bank with
seven demappers and decoders is also implemented.
Chapter 7
Simulation results
In this chapter, simulation results will be presented along with the underlying
assumptions. The goal is to evaluate the performance of the simulator as well
as to obtain a more accurate understanding of the operation of the WiMAX
system. Through numerous comparisons between simulation results obtained
with diﬀerent simulation parameters, some discussions about the use of these
diﬀerent parameters and options are given with the purpose of oﬀering a
complete view on the better manner of performance of the transmission.
Thus, not only the two demapping methods but also the impact of the channel
estimation are analyzed. Furthermore, the transmission gain obtained when
using multiple antennas instead of only a single antenna at one or both ends
of the transmission link is also examined. The diﬀerent channel models and
scenarios are applied in diﬀerent simulations so that the fading phenomenon
can be studied. To end, results when activating the AMC mechanism are
oﬀered, thus showing the mentioned increase in spectral eﬃciency and data
throughput.
7.1 A single antenna transmission
This section shows simulation results when using a single antenna not only
at the transmitter but also at the receiver. The common assumptions to
most of the simulations are as follows: the simulation is carried out for
downlink transmissions at a carrier frequency of 2 GHz and a 20 MHz channel
bandwidth. The length of the cyclic preﬁx is deﬁned by G = 1/32 and the
frame duration is speciﬁed to be 2.5 msec. Thus, only changes performed on
these assumptions will be mentioned from now on.
73
CHAPTER 7. SIMULATION RESULTS 74
7.1.1 Modulation schemes and coding rates
This section gives a comparison between the diﬀerent modulation schemes
and coding rates used in the simulator. These results have been obtained
in an AWGN channel, with a system using leastsquares channel estimation
and hard demapping.
The simulated performance for diﬀerent modulation schemes and coding
rates tested is shown in Figure 7.1  1 and Figure 7.1  2. As speciﬁed in
the standard, WiMAX allows for seven diﬀerent combinations of modulation
order and coding rates, which are brieﬂy summarized next.
AMC Mode Modulation scheme Overall coding rate
AMC1 2PAM 1/2
AMC2 4QAM 1/2
AMC3 4QAM 3/4
AMC4 16QAM 1/2
AMC5 16QAM 3/4
AMC6 64QAM 2/3
AMC7 64QAM 3/4
Table 7.1  1: Modulation schemes and coding rates.
−20 −15 −10 −5 0 5 10 15 20 25
10
−4
10
−3
10
−2
10
−1
10
0
Channel SNR [dB]
U
n
c
o
d
e
d
B
E
R
2−PAM
4−QAM
16−QAM
64−QAM
Figure 7.1  1: Comparison between modulation schemes in the uncoded BER.
The curves show the BER as a function of the bit energy to noise rate
(E
b
/N
0
), which is a measure of the energy eﬃciency of a modulation scheme.
If a higher E
b
/N
0
is needed to transfer data for a given modulation scheme,
it means that more energy is required for each bit transfer. Low spectral
eﬃciency modulation schemes, such as 2PAM and 4QAM, require a lower
CHAPTER 7. SIMULATION RESULTS 75
E
b
/N
0
, and hence, are more energy eﬃcient and less vulnerable to bit errors.
Furthermore, the BER versus the SNR can be calculated from E
b
/N
0
. The
SNR for each modulation takes into account the number of bits per symbol,
and so, the signal power corresponds to the energy per bit times the number
of bits per symbol.
−5 0 5 10 15 20 25
10
−2
10
−1
10
0
Channel SNR [dB]
C
o
d
e
d
B
E
R
AMC1
AMC2
AMC3
AMC4
AMC5
AMC6
AMC7
Figure 7.1  2: Comparison between diﬀerent modulation chemes and coding
rates in the coded BER.
As we can see, a comparison between the diﬀerent modulation schemes
is performed. The dashed black curves in Figure 7.1  1 represent the AWGN
theoretical BER curves. They have been calculated from the probability of
bit error expressions as follows [30]:
P
bc
= 2
_
1 −
1
√
M
a
_
Q
_
_
3
M
a
−1
E
b
N
0
_
, (7.1  1)
where P
bc
is the probability of bit error per carrier, M
a
deﬁnes the modulation
alphabet, and Q(x) is related to the complementary Gaussian error function
by Q(x) =
1
√
2π
_
∞
x
exp
_
−x
2
2
_
dx =
1
2
erfc
_
x
√
2
_
, which is the probability that
a Gaussian distributed variable x
0
is larger than x.
Therefore, the probability of bit error is calculated as
P
b
= 1 −(1 −P
bc
)
2
. (7.1  2)
Note that the theoretical curves experiment a small shift if compared
with those simulated. This shift can be calculated analytically and is a loss
in the SNR of the system: SNR
loss
= 10 log
10
_
200
192
33
32
_
= 0.3dB. It expresses
the mentioned shift, where 200/192 is the ratio of the number of nonzero
CHAPTER 7. SIMULATION RESULTS 76
subcarriers (data and pilots) to the data subcarriers, and 33/32 represents
the relationship between the data symbol with and without adding the cyclic
preﬁx, which, in this case, is deﬁned by G = 1/32.
A comparison between all diﬀerent modulation schemes and coding rates
is given in Figure 7.1  2, where the coded BER vs. SNR curves have been
plotted. It can be noticed that the higher the code rate, the more the curves
are shifted to the right, and as it has been discussed for the uncoded BER
curves, the higher the modulation scheme, the higher the bit error rate.
7.1.2 Types of channel fading
The diﬀerent channel fading and the eﬀects of the velocity of the user are
discussed in the current section. As mentioned through the thesis, three
kinds of channel fading are implemented in the simulator, block fading, time
variant fading, and timevariant block fading channel. As expected, the time
variant channel experiments the worse results as a consequence of the varying
channel coeﬃcients. In order to improve the performance of this timevariant
channel, a timevariant channel estimator could be implemented. The block
fading channel, which has no variation of its channel coeﬃcients through the
whole process of transmission, is the one that obtains better results instead.
These observations, which regard to the diﬀerent fading types, are shown
in Figure 7.1  3, where the parameters are set to be AMC3, perfect channel
knowledge, hard demapping, and a user velocity of 3 km/h.
−5 0 5 10 15 20
10
−4
10
−3
10
−2
10
−1
Channel SNR 100 [dB]
C
o
d
e
d
B
E
R
Block fading
TV block fading
TV fading
Figure 7.1  3: Comparison between diﬀerent types of fading.
Also discussed in this section is the velocity of the user terminal, analyzed
next. With this purpose, the following graphics show the performance of the
CHAPTER 7. SIMULATION RESULTS 77
system not only for the uncoded BER curves, but also for the coded BER
curves, when passing the signal through a timevariant channel, in scenario F.
The parameters used in this simulations are soft demapping, perfect channel
knowledge, and AMC3.
−5 0 5 10 15 20
10
−3
10
−2
10
−1
10
0
Channel SNR [dB]
U
n
c
o
d
e
d
B
E
R
v=0 km/h
v=30 km/h
v=100 km/h
(a)
−5 0 5 10 15 20
10
−5
10
−4
10
−3
10
−2
10
−1
10
0
Channel SNR [dB]
C
o
d
e
d
B
E
R
v=0 km/h
v=30 km/h
v=100 km/h
(b)
Figure 7.1  4: BER vs. SNR curves in a timevariant channel for scenario F.
Figure 7.1  4 depicts results obtained for a timevariant channel. It is
shown that while the velocity of the user is not an important factor when
computing the uncoded BER curve, it plays an essential role in the coded
BER curve, where, as expected, the lower the velocity the better the results.
7.1.3 Demapping and channel estimation
This section compares hard and soft demapping. More speciﬁcally, the max
logMAP algorithm implemented for the soft demapping is analyzed. The
ﬁrst results compare the demapping and the channel estimation methods for
an AWGN channel using a 4QAM modulation format, and an overall coding
rate of 1/2 (AMC2).
Figure 7.1  5 shows the BER performance for both hard and soft (max
logMAP) demapping. It is a plot of the coded BER vs. SNR curves where
a perfect knowledge of the channel coeﬃcients has been assumed. The ﬁgure
shows that soft demapping outperforms hard demapping in approximately
2 dB in SNR. In the same way, a comparison between channel estimation
and a perfect knowledge of the channel coeﬃcients is made. In this case,
hard demapping has been used at the receiver. As expected, better results
are obtained with the knowledge of the channel coeﬃcients. However, when
removing the assumption of ideal channel knowledge it is noticed that the
performance curves become 1 dB more degraded in SNR. Therefore, in an
CHAPTER 7. SIMULATION RESULTS 78
−3 −2 −1 0 1 2 3 4 5
10
−3
10
−2
10
−1
10
0
Channel SNR [dB]
C
o
d
e
d
B
E
R
Hard demapping
Soft demapping
(a) Hard demapping vs. soft demapping.
−3 −2 −1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
10
−3
10
−2
10
−1
10
0
Channel SNR [dB]
C
o
d
e
d
B
E
R
Perfect channel
LS estimation
(b) Perfect channel knowledge vs. least
squares channel estimation.
Figure 7.1  5: Demapping and channel estimation in an AWGN channel.
implementation more eﬀort should be spent on implementing a soft demapper
than a better channel estimator.
−3 −2 −1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
10
−3
10
−2
10
−1
10
0
Channel SNR [dB]
C
o
d
e
d
B
E
R
Soft & Perfect
Hard & LSE
Soft & LSE
Hard & Perfect
Figure 7.1  6: Comparison between hard and soft demapping and channel
estimation in an AWGN channel.
These four possible combinations of demapping and channel estimation
are plotted in Figure 7.1  6. As mentioned, 2 dB of gain are obtained when
using soft demapping instead of hard demapping. On the other hand, there
is 1 dB of loss in the SNR when channel estimation is applied. Therefore, it
can be deducted that the scheme using the soft demapping algorithm and a
perfect knowledge of the channel will outperform that with hard demapping
and leastsquares channel estimation in approximately 3 dB in SNR. In the
CHAPTER 7. SIMULATION RESULTS 79
same way, if soft demapping is combined with LSE
1
, the gain obtained with
the soft demapping is damaged by the application of the leastsquares channel
estimation, and only 1 dB of gain in SNR is achieved.
In addition to this, both demapping and channel estimation is analyzed
for the block fading channel. As in the AWGN channel, the comparison
between the demapping methods is performed with a perfect knowledge of
the channel, and the one for channel estimation, using hard demapping.
The following ﬁgures analyze not only both demapping methods but also
the channel estimation results in scenario F. They show that the gain obtain
with soft demapping increases as the SNR increases. The same occurs with
the gain obtained when using perfect channel knowledge instead of least
squares channel estimation. Therefore, the receiver is able to better utilize
the diversity of the frequencyselective channel.
0 5 10 15 20 25
10
−3
10
−2
10
−1
10
0
Channel SNR [dB]
C
o
d
e
d
B
E
R
Hard demapping
Soft demapping
(a) Hard demapping vs. soft demapping.
0 5 10 15 20 25
10
−2
10
−1
10
0
Channel SNR [dB]
C
o
d
e
d
B
E
R
Perfect channel
LS estimation
(b) Perfect channel knowledge vs. least
squares channel estimation.
Figure 7.1  7: Demapping and channel estimation in a block fading channel.
1
LeastSquares Estimation
CHAPTER 7. SIMULATION RESULTS 80
7.1.4 AMC and its eﬀects in the results
This sections discusses the consequences caused in the results when applying
the AMC mechanism. Several aspects, including the type of channel, the
velocity of the user, or the channel estimation, are analyzed with this purpose,
thus letting us notice the enhancement AMC oﬀers.
−5 0 5 10 15 20 25
10
−3
10
−2
10
−1
10
0
Channel SNR [dB]
C
o
d
e
d
B
E
R
Without AMC
With AMC
(a) Coded BER vs. SNR curves.
−5 0 5 10 15 20 25
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
Channel SNR [dB]
T
h
r
o
u
g
h
p
u
t
[
M
b
p
s
]
Without AMC
With AMC
(b) Throughput vs. SNR curves.
Figure 7.1  8: Comparison between results obtained with and without using
the AMC scheme.
To begin with, a comparison between results with and without using
the mentioned AMC scheme is performed. Figure 7.1  8 depicts the coded
BER and the throughput curves for scenario A in a block fading channel.
The setting parameters are hard demapping, perfect channel knowledge, and
AMC3. The results show an enormous increase in the throughput when using
the AMC mechanism from approximately 7 dB of channel SNR onwards. On
the other hand, the prize for this enhancement is, as previously explained,
the support of a predictable BER, which maintains small variations around
a ﬁxed value.
Furthermore, the selection of the AMC mode is made in such a way that
it guarantees a BER below a given target BER. With our operating point at
a target BER of 10
−1
, we have the ranges speciﬁed in Table 7.1  2 for each
AMC scheme. We came to these levels in the following way: at an operating
BER of 10
−1
, there is no AMC scheme that gives us our desired performance
at an SNR below 1 dB. Therefore, we choose AMC1 as it is the most robust.
Between 1 and 3 dB, there is only one scheme that gives us our desired
performance below 10
−1
, and that is AMC1. Between 3 and 6 dB, AMC2
gives us our desired BER. Between 6 and 9 dB the AMC scheme giving the
desired BER performance at a better spectral eﬃciency is AMC3. Likewise,
CHAPTER 7. SIMULATION RESULTS 81
as the channel SNR is higher, higher AMC schemes are used to give us the
best spectral eﬃciency while providing the desired BER performance.
Target BER=10
−1
Target BER=10
−2
AMC1 SNR<1 dB SNR<0 dB
AMC1 1 dB<SNR<3 dB 0 dB<SNR<5 dB
AMC2 3 dB<SNR<6 dB 5 dB<SNR<7 dB
AMC3 6 dB<SNR<9 dB 7 dB<SNR<11 dB
AMC4 9 dB<SNR<12 dB 11 dB<SNR<13 dB
AMC5 12 dB<SNR<16 dB 13 dB<SNR<18 dB
AMC6 16 dB<SNR<18 dB 18 dB<SNR<19 dB
AMC7 SNR>18dB SNR>19dB
Table 7.1  2: AMC scheme to SNR range.
In the same way, the chart shows the SNR ranges for a given target BER
of 10
−2
. In this case the SNR thresholds are shifted to the right (higher
SNR) due to decreasing nature of the BER curves with the SNR. Therefore,
as Figure 7.1  9 shows, if the target BER is higher, the performance of the
system will be worse as worse channel quality conditions (higher target BER
to guarantee a BER below it) are required. However, it can be seen that
the target BER is not achieved. The channel fading is so fast (low temporal
correlation and short coherence time) that the SNR varies too much during
the transmission of each codeword, and therefore, more eﬀort should be spent
on optimizing the AMC mechanism.
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
10
−2
10
−1
10
0
Channel SNR [dB]
C
o
d
e
d
B
E
R
Target BER=1e−1
Target BER=1e−2
Figure 7.1  9: The inﬂuence of the target BER in the AMC mechanism.
CHAPTER 7. SIMULATION RESULTS 82
Another aspect to take into account is the velocity of the user. Since
the channel conditions change more rapidly when the user moves faster, the
AMC mechanism needs to shift from one mode to another more often to
follow the variations of the channel. On the other hand, the feedback of the
channel information to the transmitter becomes a limiting factor as while
it is being performed, the channel conditions change continuously. Thus it
can be thought, as Figure 7.1  10 shows, that better results are obtained if
the velocity of the user is smaller. The setting parameters for this curves
are timevariant block fading channel, scenario B, soft demapping, and least
squares channel estimation.
−10 −5 0 5 10 15 20 25
10
−3
10
−2
10
−1
10
0
Channel SNR [dB]
C
o
d
e
d
B
E
R
v=3 km/h
v =100 km/h
(a) Coded BER vs. SNR curves.
−10 −5 0 5 10 15 20 25
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
Channel SNR [dB]
T
h
r
o
u
g
h
p
u
t
[
M
b
p
s
]
v=3 km/h
v=100 km/h
(b) Throughput vs. SNR curves.
Figure 7.1  10: AMC results for a timevariant block fading channel with
diﬀerent user velocities.
Additionally, both demapping and channel estimation are analyzed with
the performance of the AMC scheme. As expected, better results have been
obtained for soft demapping and a perfect channel knowledge instead of hard
demapping and channel estimation, respectively. Results for scenario C in a
block fading channel using AMC3 are shown in Figure 7.1  11. The curves
comparing hard demapping and soft demapping have been obtained with
leastsquares channel estimation, and those comparing channel estimation
and perfect channel knowledge, with soft demapping.
CHAPTER 7. SIMULATION RESULTS 83
−5 0 5 10 15 20 25
10
−2
10
−1
10
0
Channel SNR [dB]
C
o
d
e
d
B
E
R
Soft demapping
Hard demapping
(a) Comparison between hard and soft
demapping.
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
10
−2
10
−1
10
0
Channel SNR [dB]
C
o
d
e
d
B
E
R
Perfect channel
LS estimation
(b) Comparison between perfect channel
knowledge and channel estimation.
Figure 7.1  11: Demapping and channel estimation when using the AMC
scheme.
7.2 Multiple antenna transmission
Results obtained when using more than one antenna either at the transmitter
or at the receiver, or at both ends of the communication link, are discussed in
this section. As in the results for only one antenna, the common assumptions
to all of the simulations are:
• f
c
=2 GHz
• BW=20 MHz
• G=1/32
• T
frame
=2.5 msec
• AMC=3
Furthermore, the hard demapping algorithm, a perfect knowledge of the
channel coeﬃcients, and a block fading channel model are used.
7.2.1 SISO, SIMO, MISO, and MIMO systems
As mentioned in Chapter 5, wireless channels key problem is fading. In order
to combat this fading and hence, improve the capacity and the throughput
of the system, multiple antennas at both ends of the communication link are
used. This section analyzes the enhancement achieved with such structures,
making a comparison of the performance of not only systems with multiple
CHAPTER 7. SIMULATION RESULTS 84
transmit but also multiple receive antennas. As Figure 7.2  1 illustrates,
the performance of the system drastically improves with a diversity system
in place, in this case, using scenario C. The slope of the BER curves is an
indicator of the degree of diversity that has been achieved. The degree of
diversity is deﬁned as the performance improvement in BER, in terms of
power of ten, for a 10 dB higher SNR. As can be observed, the curve for the
1 1 system improves its error probability with a factor 10, i.e. power of
1 for a 10 dB rise in SNR. In this case, the degree of diversity is said to be
equal to one, i.e. no diversity at all. However, when simulating with a 1 2
or a 2 1 system, which have diversity order of two, better performance is
achieved. Likewise, the degree of diversity achieved with the 2 2 system
is of order four. Therefore, it can be concluded that the degree of diversity
is equal to N
T
N
R
, being N
T
and N
R
the number of transmit and receive
antennas, respectively. Furthermore, it is shown that although both 1 2
and 2 1 achieve the same degree of diversity, the scheme that uses multiple
antennas at the receiver oﬀers a signiﬁcant improvement of 3 dB of gain
in the channel SNR. This gain is deducted from the formula of the received
signal when using the MRC and the Alamouti scheme. As only one symbol is
transmitted in one time interval with the MRC algorithm, the unity average
transmit power is already achieved in each time interval, and the resultant
signal is not multiplied by the factor 1/
√
2 as in the Alamouti algorithm.
−5 0 5 10 15 20 25
10
−3
10
−2
10
−1
10
0
Channel SNR [dB]
C
o
d
e
d
B
E
R
1x1
2x1
1x2
2x2
Diversity 1
Diversity 2
Diversity 2
Diversity 4
Figure 7.2  1: Comparison between diﬀerent degrees of diversity.
The throughput of the system is analyzed next. Figure 7.2  2 illustrates
that the higher the diversity order the more improvement in throughput is
achieved.
CHAPTER 7. SIMULATION RESULTS 85
−5 0 5 10 15 20 25
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
Channel SNR [dB]
T
r
h
o
u
g
h
p
u
t
[
M
b
p
s
]
1x1
1x2
2x1
2x2
Figure 7.2  2: Throughput of the system using diversity schemes.
7.2.2 Channel model scenarios
This section analyzes the performance of the system when using the diﬀerent
IMETRA [31] scenarios implemented in the simulator. Simulation results
for scenarios U, A and F, in a 2 2 MIMO system are presented. The
results show that although both scenarios, A and U, represent environments
experiencing ﬂat fading, scenario A is worse than scenario U, thus showing
that better performance is achieved in a noncorrelated ﬂat fading channel
(scenario U) than in a correlated (scenario A). On the other hand, the best
results are obtained with scenario F due to the higher frequency diversity
this channel model has.
−5 0 5 10 15
10
−4
10
−3
10
−2
10
−1
10
0
Channel SNR [dB]
C
o
d
e
d
B
E
R
Scenario U
Scenario A
Scenario F
Figure 7.2  3: Comparison between diﬀerent channel model scenarios in a
MIMO system.
Chapter 8
Conclusion
The wireless communications industry is gaining momentum in both ﬁxed
and mobile applications. The continued increase in demand for all types of
wireless services (voice, data, and multimedia) is fueling the need for higher
capacity and data rates not only in ﬁxed but also in mobile applications.
WLANs and 3G cellular networks are experiencing several diﬃculties for
reaching a complete mobile broadband access, bounded by factors such as
bandwidth, coverage area, or infrastructure costs. In this context, WiMAX
appears to fulﬁl these requirements, providing vehicular mobility and high
service areas and data rates. Deﬁned to provide broadband wireless access, it
is increasingly gaining interest as an alternative last mile technology to DSL
lines and cable modems, and a complementary technology where wireless
networks are not suﬃciently developed. This thesis is devoted to the study
of the WiMAX system. More speciﬁcally, it examines the implementation
of a WiMAX simulator, targeted to the 256point FFT OFDM PHY layer,
built with Matlab Simulink. With this purpose, the diﬀerent parts of the
simulator have been analyzed.
The ﬂexible and parametrizable OFDM transmitter was explained in
Chapter 2. Speciﬁcally, the length of the cyclic preﬁx, the coding scheme,
the modulation alphabet, the channel bandwidth, and the frame duration,
can be freely chosen by setting appropriate parameter values.
Chapter 3 has focused on the channel implementation. Changes in the
environment due to the movement of not only objects but also receiver and
transmitter introduce timevarying fading on the communication channel.
The multipath channel propagation manifests itself by diﬀerent echoes of
possibly diﬀerent transmitted symbols overlapping at the receiver, which
leads to error rate degradation. The eﬀects of ISI on the transmission error
statistics are negligible as long as the delay spread is shorter than the cyclic
preﬁx. The simulator implements three diﬀerent kinds of channels, block
86
CHAPTER 8. CONCLUSION 87
fading, timevariant, and timevariant block fading channels. If the block
fading channel is selected for simulation, one impulse response is generated
randomly for every frame transmitted. The timevariant channel model is
implemented as a Jake’s model and a timevariant convolution of the transmit
signal with the impulse response. The timevariant block fading channel is
a combination of the block fading and the timevariant channel model with
timeinvariant channel ﬁltering. This model can be used as a low complexity
approximation for the timevariant channel model if only slow speeds are
considered.
The receiver was studied in detail in Chapter 4. Particularly, demapping
algorithms and channel estimation methods were discussed. On one hand, it
was shown that soft demapping outperforms hard demapping by 2 dB of gain
in SNR. The information given by the demapper can contain not only the
demodulated message (hard output) but also the degree of conﬁdence in the
decision (soft output). Performing the exact calculation of the bitwise metric
in a soft demapper with a MAP algorithm is very tedious work. In order to
reduce the complexity of the MAP algorithm for LLR calculation I replaced
the mathematical logarithm function of the LLR expression with simple max
or min functions, leading to the maxlogMAP approximation. On the other
hand, the system BER with channel estimates from training sequences was
evaluated. Results showed that simple leastsquares channel estimation costs
1 dB in SNR when compared with a perfect channel knowledge. Therefore,
since soft demapping gives a higher gain in the channel SNR, more eﬀorts
should be spent on implementing a soft demapper than a better channel
estimation.
Another important aspect studied through the thesis is the performance
gain by MIMO presented in Chapter 5. The ability to transmit and receive
through multiple antennas enables us, while applying spatial diversity, to
combat fading and ultimately have substantially improved reliability and
increased capacity. The increased capacity, under proper coding, eventually
translates into increased throughput. Speciﬁcally, the concepts of maximum
ratio combining (MRC) and spacetime coding (STC) were introduced. It is
necessary for simple decoding of STC systems that the channel must be slowly
varying (remain constant over two consecutive time steps). The simulator
implements MIMO up to two transmit and/or receive antennas. Simulated
results showed that the degree of diversity achieved, and hence the increase
in throughput, is proportional to the number of antennas with which the
communication system is equipped. Furthermore, it was found that a gain
of 3 dB in the channel SNR appears in the BER curves when two antennas
are used at the receiver instead of at the transmitter.
CHAPTER 8. CONCLUSION 88
A ﬁnal contribution is the performance evaluation of the AMC scheme
presented in Chapter 6. AMC schemes employ multiple modulation and
coding schemes (codecs) in order to instantaneously adapt spectral eﬃciency
to the variations in the channel SNR while maintaining an acceptable BER.
The implemented scheme estimates the channel SNR for each frame and
compares it with a set of SNR thresholds obtained in such a way that they
guarantee a BER below a given target BER. The codec associated to each
threshold is fed back to the transmitter in order that the adaptation can
be performed. The proposed scheme has been shown to be eﬀective from
approximately 7 dB of channel SNR onwards, where an enormous increase in
the throughput of the system is achieved with the use of the AMC scheme.
However, although a rising throughput is obtained with such schemes, the
target BER is not achieved due to the fast fading of the channel, and more
eﬀorts should be spent on optimizing the mentioned AMC mechanism.
Appendix A
OFDM theory
OFDM can be viewed as a form of frequency division multiplexing (FDM)
with the special property that each tone is orthogonal with every other tone,
but it is diﬀerent from FDM in several ways. On one hand, FDM requires,
typically, the existence of frequency guard bands between the frequencies so
that they do not interfere with each other. On the other hand, OFDM allows
the spectrum of each tone to overlap, and because they are orthogonal, they
do not interfere with each other. Furthermore, the overall amount of required
spectrum is reduced due to the overlapping of the tones.
A.1 Multicarrier modulation
In a single carrier modulation system the data is sent serially over the channel
by modulating one single carrier at a baud rate of R symbols per second,
being the data symbol period T
sym
= 1/R.
The basic idea of the multicarrier modulation is, nevertheless, that the
available bandwidth, W, is divided into a number N
c
of subbands, commonly
called subcarriers. As shown in Figure A.1  1, each one of these subcarriers
has a width of ∆f = W/N
c
. Instead of transmitting the data symbols in a
serial way at a baud rate R, a multicarrier transmitter partitions the data
stream into blocks of N
c
data symbols and those are transmitted in parallel
by modulating the N
c
subcarriers.
The symbol duration for a multicarrier scheme is then T
sym
= N
c
/R.
One of the main advantages of using a multicarrier modulation is that
intersymbol interference can be reduced when the number of subcarriers,
N
c
, increases. In a multipath fading channel, ISI can appear due to the fact
that the time dispersion is signiﬁcant compared with the symbol period. If a
single carrier modulation is used, a complex equalizer for compensating the
89
APPENDIX A. OFDM THEORY 90
N
c
subcarriers
Δf = /N
c
. . .
Figure A.1  1: Subdivision of the bandwidth, in a multicarrier transmission,
into N
c
subbands.
channel distortion is needed. However, the multicarrier modulation simpliﬁes
the equalization into single multiplications in the frequency domain.
A.2 Orthogonality
In order to assure a high spectral eﬃciency the subchannel waveforms must
have overlapping transmit spectra. Nevertheless, to enable simple separation
of these overlapping subchannels at the receiver they need to be orthogonal.
Orthogonality is a property that allows the signals to be perfectly transmitted
over a common channel and detected without interference. However, loss
of orthogonality results in blurring between these information signals and
degradation in communication.
Set of functions are orthogonal to each other if they match the conditions
in Equation A.2  1. It means that if any two diﬀerent functions within a
set are multiplied and integrated over a symbol period, the result is zero for
orthogonal functions:
_
T
0
S
i
(t)S
j
(t)dt =
_
C i = j
0 i ,= j.
(A.2  1)
Furthermore, a general set of orthogonal waveforms is given by
ψ
k
(t) =
_
1
√
T
sym
exp(j2πf
k
t) t[0, T
sym
]
0 otherwise,
(A.2  2)
with f
k
= f
0
+ k∆f, being k = 0, 1, ..., N
c
−1.
In Equation A.2  2, f
k
represents the subcarrier frequency, and f
0
is the
lowest frequency used, corresponding to the index k = 0. The intercarrier
APPENDIX A. OFDM THEORY 91
spacing must satisfy ∆f = 1/T
sym
= R/N
c
, where T
sym
is the symbol period
described above.
Each OFDM subcarrier has a sinc(x)
1
frequency response. This is the
result of the symbol time corresponding to the inverse of the carrier spacing.
The sinc shape has a narrow main lobe with many side lobes that decay
slowly with the magnitude of the frequency diﬀerence away from the centre.
Each carrier has a peak at its centre frequency and nulls evenly spaced with
a frequency gap equal to the carrier spacing.
5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
0.4
0.2
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
Figure A.2  1: Spectrum of an OFDM signal.
The orthogonal nature of the transmission is a result of the peak of each
subcarrier corresponding to the nulls of all other subcarriers, as shown in
Figure A.2  1.
A.3 Cyclic Preﬁx
Passing the signal through a timedispersive channel causes ISI. In an OFDM
system, a loss of the orthogonality appears due to ISI, resulting in ICI
2
.
For a given system bandwidth the symbol rate for an OFDM signal is
much lower than a single carrier transmission scheme. It is because the
OFDM system bandwidth is broken up into N
c
subcarriers resulting in a
symbol rate that is N
c
times lower. This low symbol rate makes OFDM
naturally resistant to eﬀects of ISI caused by multipath propagation.
The multiple signals that appear due to the multipath propagation arrive
at the receiver at diﬀerent times, spreading, this way, the symbol boundaries
and causing energy leakage between the OFDM symbols. Furthermore, in
an OFDM signal the amplitude and phase of the subcarrier must remain
1
sinc(x)=sin(x)/x
2
InterCarrier Interference
APPENDIX A. OFDM THEORY 92
constant over a period of the symbol in order to maintain the orthogonality
of the subcarriers. If they are no constant, the spectral shape will not have
nulls at the correct frequencies, resulting in ICI.
In order to combat the eﬀects of ISI on an OFDM signal, a guard period to
the start of each symbol is added. This guard period, which is called the cyclic
preﬁx (CP), is a copy of the last part of the OFDM symbol, thus extending
the length of the symbol waveform. Figure A.3  1 shows the structure of
an OFDM symbol. The CP is prepended to the transmitted symbol and
removed at the receiver before the demodulation. Then, the total length of
the symbol can be written as T
sym
= T
g
+T
b
, where T
sym
is the total length of
the symbol in samples, T
g
is the length of the guard period in samples, and
T
b
is the size of the IFFT used to generate the OFDM signal, representing
the useful symbol time.
CP
T
g
T
b
T
sym
CP
Figure A.3  1: Addition of the cyclic preﬁx to an OFDM signal.
Consequently, the beneﬁt obtained for the addition of a cyclic preﬁx is
twofold. First, it avoids ISI acting as a guard band between two successive
symbols. Seconds, it converts the linear convolution with the channel impulse
response into a cyclic convolution.
However, the length of the cyclic preﬁx has to be chosen carefully. On
one hand, it should be, at least, as long as the signiﬁcant part of the impulse
response experienced by the transmitted signal, allowing some time for the
transient signal to decay, and thus, avoiding ISI and ICI. One the other hand,
it should be as small as possible because the transmitted energy increases
with its length, causing a loss in the SNR. Equation A.3  1 gives the SNR
loss due to the insertion of the CP. Moreover, the number of symbols per
second that are transmitted per Hz of bandwidth also decreases with the
CP. This decreasing is expressed by R(1 −T
g
/T
sym
).
SNR
loss
= −10 log
10
_
1 −
T
g
T
sym
_
(A.3  1)
APPENDIX A. OFDM THEORY 93
A.4 The OFDM system model
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
CP
I
F
F
T
M
U
X
D
E
M
U
X
F
F
T
h(n)
s(n)
w(n)
r(n)
x
0,m
x
Nc1,m
y
0,m
y
Nc1,m
Figure A.4  1: Model of an OFDM system.
OFDM signals are typically generated digitally due to the diﬃculty in
creating large banks of phase lock oscillators and receivers in the analog
domain. Figure A.4  1 shows the block diagram of a such an OFDM system
3
.
In the transmitter, the incoming data stream is grouped in blocks of N
c
data symbols, which are the OFDM symbols, and can be represented by a
vector x
m
. Next, an IFFT is performed on each data symbol block and a
cyclic preﬁx of length N
g
is added.
The received signal is, generally, the sum of a linear convolution with
the discrete channel impulse response, h(n), and an additive white Gaussian
noise, w(n). It has to be said that it is implicitly assumed that the channel
fading is slow enough to consider it constant during one symbol, and both,
transmitter and receiver, are perfectly synchronized. At the receiver, the
cyclic preﬁx is removed, and then, the data symbol y
k,m
(frequency index k,
OFDM symbol m) is obtained by performing the FFT operation
Moreover, the transmitted data symbols, x
k,m
, can be estimated from the
received data symbols, y
k,m
, using a single tap equalizer followed by a slicer.
This estimated symbol is obtained by dividing each received data symbol by
its corresponding channel coeﬃcient.
3
A more detailed analysis of the mathematical expressions of the OFDM conforming
process can be found in [32] and [33].
APPENDIX A. OFDM THEORY 94
A.5 Summary
After the explanation given about OFDM, it can be said that OFDM is
a wideband modulation scheme that is speciﬁcally able to cope with the
problems of the multipath reception. This is achieved by transmitting many
narrowband overlapping digital signals in parallel, inside one wide band.
Increasing the number of parallel transmission channels reduces the data
rate that each individual carrier must convey, and that lengthens the symbol
period. As a result, the delay time of reﬂected waves is suppressed to within
one symbol time.
The basics that have been explained, as well as the OFDM system model,
are derived for a timeinvariant channel. When working with timevariant
channels, the variations erode the orthogonality of the subcarriers and cause
ICI or "FFT leakage". In those cases, a more complex system is needed to
model such behaviour [32] [33].
Appendix B
Derivation of formulas
B.1 Description of the correlation matrices
The correlation matrices describing correlation properties at both ends of a
communication system are explained in this appendix. These parameters can
be extracted from measurement results, but they can also be derived from
singleinput multipleoutput (SIMO) results already published in the open
literature [31].
scattering
medium
s
1
(t)
s
2
(t)
s
NT
(t)
y
1
(t)
y
2
(t)
y
NR
(t)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
s(t) y(t)
N
T
transmit
antennas
N
R
receive
antennas
Figure B.1  1: A MIMO channel model in a scattering environment.
Figure B.1  1 shows a MIMO scenario with N
T
transmit antennas and
N
R
receive antennas. The signals at the transmit antenna array are denoted
by the vector s(t) = [s
1
(t), s
2
(t), ..., s
N
T
(t)]
T
, and similarly, the signals at the
receiver are y(t) = [y
1
(t), y
2
(t), ..., y
N
R
(t)]
T
, where ()
T
denotes transposition,
95
APPENDIX B. DERIVATION OF FORMULAS 96
and s
m
(t) and y
n
(t) are the signals at the mth transmit antenna port and
at the nth receive antenna port, respectively.
The ﬂat fading MIMO radio channel describing the connection between
transmitter and receiver can be expressed as
H =
_
_
_
_
_
α
11
α
12
α
1N
T
α
21
α
22
α
2N
T
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
α
N
R
1
α
N
R
2
α
N
R
N
T
_
_
_
_
_
, (B.1  1)
where α
nm
is the complex transmission coeﬃcient from antenna m at the
transmitter to antenna n at the receiver, and it has been assumed to be
complex Gaussian distributed with identical average power.
The relation between the vectors s(t) and y(t) can be expressed as
y(t) = H(t)s(t). (B.1  2)
Assuming that all antenna elements have the same polarization and the
same radiation pattern, the spatial complex correlation coeﬃcient at the
transmitter between antennas m
1
and m
2
is given by Equation B.1  3, where
the spatial correlation coeﬃcient at the transmitter, ρ
TX
m
1
m
2
, is assumed to
be independent of n. Similarly, the spatial complex correlation coeﬃcient
observed at the receive side, ρ
RX
n
1
n
2
, deﬁned in Equation B.1  4, is assumed to
be independent of m:
ρ
TX
m
1
m
2
= ¸α
nm
1
, α
nm
2
), (B.1  3)
ρ
RX
n
1
n
2
= ¸α
n
1
m
, α
n
2
m
). (B.1  4)
The operation ¸a, b)
1
denotes an inner product between a and b, and is
calculated as ¸a, b) = E¦ab
∗
¦/(σ
a
σ
b
), where σ
a
is the standard deviation of
the variable a, and ()
∗
performs the conjugation operation.
The symmetrical complex correlation matrices can be deﬁned from both,
Equation B.1  3 and Equation B.1  4:
R
T
=
_
_
_
_
_
ρ
TX
11
ρ
TX
12
ρ
TX
1N
T
ρ
TX∗
21
ρ
TX
22
ρ
TX
2N
T
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
ρ
TX∗
N
T
1
ρ
TX∗
N
T
2
ρ
TX
N
T
N
T
_
_
_
_
_
N
T
×N
T
, (B.1  5)
1
¸a, b)=¸b, a)
∗
APPENDIX B. DERIVATION OF FORMULAS 97
R
R
=
_
_
_
_
_
ρ
RX
11
ρ
RX
12
ρ
RX
1N
R
ρ
RX∗
21
ρ
RX
22
ρ
RX
2N
R
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
ρ
RX∗
N
R
1
ρ
RX∗
N
R
2
ρ
RX
N
R
N
R
_
_
_
_
_
N
R
×N
R
. (B.1  6)
Moreover, the correlation coeﬃcient between two arbitrary transmission
coeﬃcients connecting two diﬀerent sets of antennas is expressed as
ρ
m
1
n
1
m
2
n
2
= ¸α
n
1
m
1
, α
n
2
m
2
) = ρ
TX
m
1
m
2
ρ
RX
n
1
n
2
. (B.1  7)
Finally, it can be deducted from all this mathematical analysis that the
spatial correlation matrix of the MIMO radio channel is represented by the
Kronecker product of the spatial correlation matrices in both transmit and
receive ends, and is given by R
MIMO
= R
T
⊗ R
R
, where ⊗ represents the
Kronecker product [31].
B.2 Estimation of the transmitted symbols when
using STC
B.2.1 Alamouti with one receive antenna
Spacetime coding
• 2x1 Alamouti Scheme
• STC with rate 1
Æ2 input symbols are transmitted in two time steps
Input
s = (s
0
s
1
)
Output
r = (r
0
r
1
)
The received symbols are:
(f
0
)
t
0
(f
1
)
t
1
s
0
2
1
s
1
2
1
s
0
*
2
1 
s
1
*
2
1
Figure B.2  1: 21 Alamouti scheme.
As shown in Figure B.2  1, the signal obtained at the receiver side when
using the Alamouti algorithm is deﬁned as
_
r
0
r
∗
1
_
=
1
√
2
_
h
1
h
2
h
∗
2
−h
∗
1
__
s
0
s
1
_
+
_
n
0
n
∗
1
_
. (B.2  1)
The estimated transmitted signal is then calculated from the formula
´s = H
ν
H
y, where y = [r
0
, r
∗
1
]
T
.
APPENDIX B. DERIVATION OF FORMULAS 98
The hermitian of the virtual channel matrix is
H
ν
H
=
_
h
∗
1
h
2
h
∗
2
−h
1
_
.
Finally, the estimated transmit signal is given by
´s = H
ν
H
y
⇓
_
´ s
0
´ s
1
_
= H
ν
H
_
r
0
r
∗
1
_
=
=
1
√
2
H
ν
H
H
ν
_
s
0
s
1
_
+H
ν
H
_
n
0
n
∗
1
_
=
=
1
√
2
_
h
∗
1
h
2
h
∗
2
−h
1
__
h
1
h
2
h
∗
2
−h
∗
1
__
s
0
s
1
_
+
_
h
∗
1
h
2
h
∗
2
−h
1
__
n
0
n
∗
1
_
=
=
1
√
2
_
h
∗
1
h
1
+ h
2
h
∗
2
h
∗
1
h
2
−h
2
h
∗
1
h
∗
2
h
1
−h
1
h
∗
2
h
∗
2
h
2
+ h
1
h
∗
1
__
s
0
s
1
_
+
_
h
∗
1
n
0
+ h
2
n
∗
1
h
∗
2
n
0
−h
1
n
∗
1
_
=
=
1
√
2
_
[h
1
[
2
+[h
2
[
2
0
0 [h
1
[
2
+[h
2
[
2
__
s
0
s
1
_
+
_
h
∗
1
n
0
+ h
2
n
∗
1
h
∗
2
n
0
−h
1
n
∗
1
_
=
=
1
√
2
([h
1
[
2
+[h
2
[
2
)
_
1 0
0 1
__
s
0
s
1
_
+
_
h
∗
1
n
0
+ h
2
n
∗
1
h
∗
2
n
0
−h
1
n
∗
1
_
=
=
1
√
2
h
2
I
2
s + ¯ n. (B.2  2)
Once the corresponding operations for estimating the transmitted signal
have been performed, the result is represented in Equation B.2  2, where:
• h
2
= [h
1
[
2
+[h
2
[
2
is the power gain of the channel,
• I
2
is the 22 identity matrix,
• s = [s
0
, s
1
]
T
represents the transmitted symbols, and
• ¯ n =
_
h
∗
1
n
0
h
2
n
∗
1
h
∗
2
n
0
−h
1
n
∗
1
_
is some modiﬁed noise.
APPENDIX B. DERIVATION OF FORMULAS 99
B.2.2 Alamouti with two receive antennas
Spacetime coding
• 2x1 Alamouti Scheme
• STC with rate 1
Æ2 input symbols are transmitted in two time steps
Input
s = (s
0
s
1
)
Output
(r
0
r
1
)
T
(f
0
)
t
0
(f
1
)
t
1
s
0
2
1
s
1
2
1
s
0
*
2
1 
s
1
*
2
1
STC
h
11
h
22
Receiver
n
0
n
1
h
12
h
21
Figure B.2  2: 22 Alamouti scheme.
The received signal from a 2 2 Alamouti scheme, as depicted above, is
y =
_
_
_
_
r
0
(1)
r
0
(2)
r
∗
1
(1)
r
∗
1
(2)
_
_
_
_
=
1
√
2
_
_
_
_
h
11
h
21
h
12
h
22
h
∗
21
−h
∗
11
h
∗
22
−h
∗
12
_
_
_
_
_
s
0
s
1
_
+
_
_
_
_
n
0
(1)
n
0
(2)
n
∗
1
(1)
n
∗
1
(2)
_
_
_
_
. (B.2  3)
The estimated transmitted signal can be calculated from´s = H
H
ν
y, where
y = [r
0
(1)r
0
(2)r
∗
1
(1)r
∗
1
(2)]
T
.
The virtual channel matrix, H
ν
, is expressed as
H
ν
=
_
_
_
_
h
11
h
21
h
12
h
22
h
∗
21
−h
∗
11
h
∗
22
−h
∗
12
_
_
_
_
.
Therefore, the hermitian of the virtual channel matrix is
H
H
ν
=
_
h
∗
11
h
∗
12
h
21
h
22
h
∗
21
h
∗
22
−h
11
−h
12
_
.
The estimation of the transmitted symbols is performed as follows:
_
´ s
0
´ s
1
_
= H
ν
H
_
_
_
_
r
0
(1)
r
0
(2)
r
∗
1
(1)
r
∗
1
(2)
_
_
_
_
=
1
√
2
H
ν
H
H
ν
_
s
0
s
1
_
+H
ν
H
_
_
_
_
n
0
(1)
n
0
(2)
n
∗
1
(1)
n
∗
1
(2)
_
_
_
_
=
APPENDIX B. DERIVATION OF FORMULAS 100
=
1
√
2
_
h
∗
11
h
∗
12
h
21
h
22
h
∗
21
h
∗
22
−h
11
−h
12
_
_
_
_
_
h
11
h
21
h
12
h
22
h
∗
21
−h
∗
11
h
∗
22
−h
∗
12
_
_
_
_
_
s
0
s
1
_
+ ¯ n =
=
1
√
2
([h
11
[
2
+[h
21
[
2
+[h
12
[
2
+[h
22
[
2
)
_
1 0
0 1
__
s
0
s
1
_
+ ¯ n =
=
1
√
2
(h
1

2
2
+h
2

2
2
)I
2
+ ¯ n =
1
√
2
h
2
I
2
s + ¯ n. (B.2  4)
Equation B.2  4 expresses the obtained result for the process of estimating
the transmitted symbols. As described in the previous section:
• I
2
is the 2 2 identity matrix,
• s is the transmitted signal,
• h
2
= h
1

2
2
+h
2

2
2
= [h
11
[
2
+[h
21
[
2
+[h
12
[
2
+[h
22
[
2
is the power gain
of the channel, and
• ¯ n =
_
h
∗
11
n
0
(1) + h
∗
12
n
0
(2) + h
21
n
∗
1
(1) + h
22
n
∗
1
(2)
h
∗
21
n
0
(1) + h
∗
22
n
0
(2) −h
11
n
∗
1
(1) −h
12
n
∗
1
(2)
_
represents some
modiﬁed noise.
Appendix C
Parameters of the simulator
C.1 Parameters description
C.1.1 OFDM symbol description
An OFDM symbol is composed by three types of subcarriers, data, pilots, and
null subcarriers used for guard bands and the zero DC oﬀset. The number
of these subcarriers will determine the required size for the FFT (or IFFT)
algorithm. Once the OFDM signal is converted into time domain, a copy
of the last part of the useful symbol period, termed cyclic preﬁx (CP), is
appended at the beginning of each symbol to maintain the orthogonality of
the tones. From all these OFDM symbol characteristics, some parameters
can be deﬁned.
The standard [4] (see page 428) deﬁnes two types of parameters, the
primitive parameters, that will be speciﬁed by users or system requirements,
and the derived parameters, deﬁned in terms of the primitive ones.
Five are the primitive parameters that characterize the OFDM symbol:
• BW: nominal channel bandwidth.
• N
data
: number of data subcarriers.
• N
pilot
: number of pilot subcarriers.
• n
f
: sampling factor, used with BW and N
used
(number of nonzero
subcarriers) to determine the subcarrier spacing and the useful symbol
time.
• G: ratio of CP time to useful time.
101
APPENDIX C. PARAMETERS OF THE SIMULATOR 102
Next, derived parameters, which are dependent of the primitive parameters,
are listed:
• N
used
: number of used nonzero subcarriers.
N
used
= N
data
+ N
pilot
• N
FFT
: number of points used to perform the FFT. It is speciﬁed to be
the smallest power of two, and greater than N
used
.
N
FFT
= 2
log
2
(N
data
)
• F
s
: sampling frequency.
F
s
=
_
n
f
BW
8000
_
8000
• ∆f: subcarrier spacing.
∆f =
F
s
N
FFT
• T
b
: useful symbol time.
T
b
=
1
∆f
• T
g
: CP time.
T
g
= GT
b
• T
sym
: OFDM symbol time.
T
sym
= T
b
+ T
g
• T
s
: sampling time.
T
s
=
T
b
N
FFT
APPENDIX C. PARAMETERS OF THE SIMULATOR 103
C.1.2 Transmission parameters
Besides the parameters that describe the OFDM symbol, other parameters
are required in order to deﬁne parameters for the transmission, such as the
frame duration, the packet size, or the total number of transmitted OFDM
symbols. As in the previous section, they are classiﬁed either in primary or
in secondary parameters.
The primary parameters are:
• N
train
: number of training symbols in one frame.
• T
frame
: frame duration.
The following parameters depend on either parameters deﬁning the OFDM
symbol or the transmission.
• N
OFDM
: number of transmitted OFDM symbols in one frame.
N
OFDM
=
T
frame
T
sym
• N
Tsym
: total number of transmitted symbols in one frame.
N
Tsym
= N
OFDM
+ N
train
• N
txdata
: number of transmitted data symbols.
N
txdata
= N
data
N
OFDM
• N
tcb
: total number of coded bits per allocation subchannel per OFDM
symbol.
N
tcb
= N
txdata
M
a
• N
txsym
: total number of transmitted symbols.
N
txsym
= N
used
N
OFDM
• S
packet
: packet size transmitted by the source.
S
packet
= N
OFDM
RN
data
M
a
APPENDIX C. PARAMETERS OF THE SIMULATOR 104
C.1.3 Channel parameters
In order to deﬁne the channel model, several parameters need to be speciﬁed.
In the simulations, the following default values were used:
• Sampling frequency of the channel simulator: f
sam
= 100 MHz
• Speed of light: c = 3 10
8
m/s
• Carrier frequency: f
c
= 2 GHz
• Velocity of the mobile subscriber, v: variant
• Maximum doppler frequency: f
d
= v
f
c
c
• Number of paths of the timevariant channel model: N
path
= 8. This
parameter deﬁnes the number of sinusoids used for the RosaZheng
time variantchannel model.
APPENDIX C. PARAMETERS OF THE SIMULATOR 105
C.1.4 Parameter values
Furthermore, the required values for some of these parameters are described
in the standard. These values are given in Table C.1  1.
Parameter Value
N
data
192
N
pilot
8
N
train
3
Variable, from 1.25 to 20 MHz,
BW being an integer multiple
of 1.25, 1.5 or 1.75 MHz
1. For channel bandwidths
multiple of 1.75 MHz, n
f
= 8/7
2. For channel bandwidths
multiple of 1.5 MHz, n
f
= 86/75
3. For channel bandwidths
multiple of 1.25 MHz, n
f
= 144/125
n
f
4. For channel bandwidths
multiple of 2.75 MHz, n
f
= 316/275
5. For channel bandwidhts
multiple of 2.0 MHz, n
f
= 57/50
6. For channel bandwidths
not otherwise speciﬁed, n
f
= 8/7
G 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32
Number of lower frequency guard subcarriers 28
Number of higher frequency guard subcarriers 27
Frequency oﬀset indices of guard subcarriers −128, −127, ..., −101
+101, +102, ..., +127
Frequency oﬀset indices of pilot carriers −88, −63, −38, −13
+13, +38, +63, +88
T
frame
(msec) 2.5, 4, 5, 8, 10, 12.5, 20
Table C.1  1: Values for primary parameters.
APPENDIX C. PARAMETERS OF THE SIMULATOR 106
C.2 WiMAX vs. WiFi simulator
As already mentioned in Section 1.1.2, there are several diﬀerences between
WiMAX and WiFi systems. In this way, both simulators will diﬀer from
each other in some parameter values. The main diﬀerences between both are
summarized in the following chart:
WiMAX WiFi
N
data
192 48
N
pilot
8 4
N
FFT
256 64
BW variable ﬁxed
(1.25 to 20 MHz) (20 MHz)
Coding CC+RS CC
CP variable ﬁxed
Table C.2  1: Diﬀerences between WiMAX and WiFi parameters.
Appendix D
WiMAX simulator block diagram
In order to have a general view of the WiMAX simulator described through
the thesis, a complete block diagram of the Simulink model ﬁle is given in
this appendix (see Figure D.0  1). A brief description of the diﬀerent blocks
is exposed with the purpose of oﬀering a better understanding of the ﬁgure.
As mentioned in Chapter 2, data from a binary source is ﬁrst encoded
and mapped into QAM symbols. The block "Coding TX" performs these
operations. It is composed of a bank of seven diﬀerent sources, encoders,
and mappers, each of which is optimized to work with a diﬀerent data rate
depending on the modulation and coding scheme being used. The encoder,
as explained, consists on a concatenation of an outer ReedSolomon encoder
with an inner convolutional encoder. It is a ﬂexible coding process due to
the puncturing of the signal, allowing diﬀerent coding rates. The last part
of the encoder is a process of interleaving to avoid large blocks of bit errors.
Once the data from the source is mapped into QAM symbols, the OFDM
symbols must be constructed. An OFDM symbol is composed by 192 data
subcarriers, 8 pilot subcarriers, 1 zero DC subcarrier, and 55 guard carriers.
Furthermore, preambles consisting of 3 OFDM symbols are appended at
the beginning of each frame. Preambles are formed with a short training
sequence, followed by a long training sequence, and the FCH
1
. Depending
on the number of transmit antennas, two kinds of long training sequences
are used. If only one antenna is transmitting, the long training sequence
utilizes even subcarriers, therefore it is called P
EVEN
. However, another long
training sequence shall be used when transmitting spacetime coded downlink
bursts. Because the STC scheme achieves diversity by transmitting with two
antennas, a preamble has to be transmitted from both transmit antennas
simultaneously. Thus, the ﬁrst antenna transmits a preamble using P
EVEN
1
Frame Control Header
107
APPENDIX D. WIMAX SIMULATOR BLOCK DIAGRAM 108
and the preamble transmitted from the second antenna is set according to
the sequence P
ODD
, which uses, in this case, a subset of odd subcarriers.
Blocks "Pilot", "Training Ant. 0", and "Training Ant. 1" generate
the pilot and both training sequences, respectively.
OFDM data symbols are obtained after rearranging the data vector from
the "Coding TX" block in a matrix form that has 192 rows (number of data
subcarriers in an OFDM symbol). Moreover, if Alamouti coding is selected
in a parameter ﬁle, "STC" performs the Alamouti algorithm described in
Section 5.1.2 to the OFDM data symbols. Otherwise, this block has no
impact on the signal.
The next block, called "Assembler", deals with the task of rearranging
data, pilots, trainings, and zero DC subcarrier, as explained in Section 2.6.
After the assembling process, the 55 guard bands are appended at the end of
each frame, the signal is converted to the time domain and the cyclic preﬁx
is added. Then, the signal is sent over the channel, which is implemented in
the block "Channel Model".
The receiver performs the reverse operations to get the transmitted data.
The cyclic preﬁx is removed from each symbol and the signal is converted to
the frequency domain using an FFT algorithm. As it has been told before,
an OFDM symbol consists of data, pilot, trainings, a zero DC subcarrier,
and some guard bands. Thus, a process to separate all these subcarriers is
needed. First, the guard bands are removed, and then, a disassembling is
performed to obtain pilots, data, and trainings. The trainings are utilized in
the "Channel estimator". The estimated channel coeﬃcients can be used
in the demapper to realize an equalization of the data symbols to compensate
the frequencyselective fading of the multipath propagation channel. To end,
data is decoded following the inverse steps as performed in the transmitter
(deinterleaving, inserting zeros as the inverse process of puncturing, Viterbi
decoding of the convolutional code, and ReedSolomon decoding). These two
last steps, demapping and decoding, are performed in the "Decoding RX"
block. As its analogous block, it consists of a bank of seven demappers and
decoders, where the appropriate modulation and coding scheme is selected
by the AMC signal explained next.
Furthermore, a feedback mechanism of adaptive modulation and coding
(AMC) is performed in order to allow the system to shift modulation scheme
and so, maintain the connection quality and link stability, thus allowing the
system to overcome timeselective fading. This AMC mechanism works by
estimating the SNR of the channel, and depending on the desired conditions
of the channel established by a given target BER, changing modulation and
coding. These operations are performed in the "Calculate AMC" block.
APPENDIX D. WIMAX SIMULATOR BLOCK DIAGRAM 109
T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
A
n
t
.
1
T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
A
n
t
.
0
A
M
C
C
o
d
e
d
E
r
r
o
r
v
e
c
U
n
c
o
d
e
d
E
r
r
o
r
v
e
c
T
a
r
g
e
t
B
E
R
T
X
R
X
A
M
C
F
E
R
/
B
E
R
T
X
R
X
A
M
C
F
E
R
/
B
E
R
G
r
o
u
p
D
a
t
a
f
o
r
O
F
D
M
S
y
m
b
o
l
s
R
e
m
o
v
e
Z
e
r
o
s
Z
e
r
o
P
a
d
d
i
n
g
R
e
m
o
v
e
C
P
A
d
d
C
P
C
h
a
n
n
e
l
E
s
t
i
m
a
t
o
r
S
T
C
1
9
.
8
7
S
N
R
[
d
B
]
P
i
l
o
t

1
Z
I
F
F
T
F
F
T
S
y
m
D
a
t
a
T
r
a
i
n
A
M
C
D
a
t
a
C
h
a
n
n
e
l
D
a
t
a
B
i
t
s
C
o
d
e
B
i
t
s
D
e
c
o
d
i
n
g
R
X
A
M
C
S
y
m
b
o
l
s
D
a
t
a
B
i
t
s
C
o
d
e
B
i
t
s
C
o
d
i
n
g
T
X
C
h
a
n
n
e
l
M
o
d
e
l
E
s
t
i
m
a
t
e
d
S
N
R
T
a
r
g
e
t
B
E
R
A
M
C
C
a
l
c
u
l
a
t
e
A
M
C
P
i
l
o
t
T
r
a
i
n
0
T
r
a
i
n
1
D
a
t
a
S
y
m
3
A
M
C
[
2
0
1
x
3
6
6
]
[
2
0
1
x
3
6
6
]
[
2
5
6
x
3
6
6
]
[
2
5
6
x
3
6
6
]
[
2
5
6
x
3
6
6
]
[
3
2
0
x
3
6
6
]
[
3
2
0
x
3
6
6
]
[
3
2
0
x
1
8
3
]
[
3
2
0
x
1
8
3
]
[
2
5
6
x
1
8
3
]
[
2
5
6
x
1
8
3
]
[
2
5
6
x
1
8
3
]
[
2
0
1
x
1
8
3
]
[
3
4
5
6
0
x
1
]
[
1
x
1
8
0
]
[
1
x
1
8
0
]
[
2
0
1
x
3
]
[
2
0
1
x
3
]
[
2
0
1
x
3
]
[
2
0
1
x
3
]
[
3
8
4
x
1
[
3
8
4
x
1
]
[
3
8
4
x
1
]
[
3
4
5
6
0
x
1
]
[
3
4
5
6
0
x
1
]
[
1
9
2
x
1
8
0
]
[
1
9
2
x
3
6
0
]
[
1
9
2
x
3
6
0
]
[
2
0
1
x
3
]
[
2
0
1
x
3
]
[
1
5
5
5
2
0
x
1
]
[
1
5
5
5
2
0
x
1
]
[
1
5
5
5
2
0
x
1
]
[
1
5
5
5
2
0
x
1
]
[
7
x
1
]
[
7
x
1
]
[
7
x
1
]
[
2
0
7
3
6
0
x
1
]
[
2
0
7
3
6
0
x
1
]
[
2
0
7
3
6
0
x
1
]
[
2
0
7
3
6
0
x
1
]
F
i
g
u
r
e
D
.
0

1
:
S
i
m
u
l
i
n
k
b
l
o
c
k
d
i
a
g
r
a
m
o
f
t
h
e
W
i
M
A
X
s
i
m
u
l
a
t
o
r
.
Appendix E
Abbreviations and Symbols
E.1 List of abbreviations
3G Third Generation
3GPP Third Generation Partnership Project
4G Fourth Generation
AAS Adaptive Antenna System
AMC Adaptive Modulation and Coding
AP Access Point
ARQ Automatic Retransmission Request
AWGN Additive White Gaussian Noise
BER Bit Error Rate
BS Base Station
BTC Block Turbo Coding
CC Convolutional Coding
CIR Channel Impulse Response
CP Cyclic Preﬁx
CSI Channel State Information
CTC Convolutional Turbo Coding
DC Direct Current
DFS Dynamic Frequency Selection
DL DownLink
DSL Digital Subscriber Line
FCH Frame Control Header
FDD Frequency Division Duplexing
FDM Frequency Division Multiplexing
FEC Forward Error Correction
110
APPENDIX E. ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS 111
FFT Fast Fourier Transform
GF Galois Field
HSDPA High Speed Downlink Packet Access
ICI InterCarrier Interference
i.i.d. Independent Identically Distributed
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IFFT Inverse Fast Fourier Transform
IMETRA Intelligent MultiElement Transmit and Receive Antennas
IMT International Mobile Telecommunications
IP Internet Protocol
IQ Inphase Quadraturephase
ISI InterSymbol Interference
LGPL Lesser General Public License
LLR LogLikelihood Ratio
LoS Line of Sight
LS Least Squares
LSE Least Squares Estimation
MAC Medium Access Control
MAN Metropolitan Area Network
MAP Maximum A Posteriori
MEA MultiElement Antenna
MIMO MultipleInput MultipleOutput
MISO MultipleInput SimpleOutput
MRC Maximum Ratio Combining
MS Mobile Station
MSS Mobile Subscriber Station
NLoS Non Line of Sight
OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing
OFDMA Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access
PAM Pulse Amplitude Modulation
PDA Personal Digital Assistant
pdf Probability Density Function
PDP Power Delay Proﬁle
PRBS PseudoRandom Binary Sequence
QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
QoS Quality of Service
RRC RootRaised Cosine
RF Radio Frequency
RMS Root Mean Square
RS ReedSolomon
SC Single Carrier
APPENDIX E. ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS 112
SIMO SingleInput MultipleOutput
SINR SignaltoInterferenceplusNoise Ratio
SISO SingleInput SingleOutput
SNR SignaltoNoise Ratio
SOHO SmallOﬃce HomeOﬃce
SS Spread Spectrum
SS Subscriber Station
STBC SpaceTime Block Coding
STC SpaceTime Coding
TDD Time Division Duplexing
TDM Time Division Multiplexing
TDMA Time Division Multiple Access
UL UpLink
UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System
VoIP Voice over IP
WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
WiFi WirelessFidelity
WiMAX Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access
WLAN Wireless Local Area Network
WMAN Wireless Metropolitan Area Network
APPENDIX E. ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS 113
E.2 List of symbols
⊗ Continuoustime convolution
()
∗
Complex conjugation operation
()
−1
Inversion operation
()
T
Transposition
()
H
Hermitian operation
a Binary inversion of the sequence a
A
s
Vector that represents the points in the constellation map
b
k
Bit on position k
B
coh
Coherence bandwidth
B
d
Doppler spread
BER
0
Target BER
BW Nominal channel bandwidth
c Speed of light
c
i
(t) Tap coeﬃcients
C Amplitude of the fading component
C
m
Normalization factor in the modulation map
C Set of complex numbers
d
E
Euclidean distance
E¦¦ Mathematical expectation
E
b
/N
0
Bit energy to noise rate
f
c
Carrier frequency
f
d
Doppler frequency
f
M
Maximum Doppler shift
f
N
Nyquist frequency
f
Ray
(a) Rayleigh fading distribution
f
Rice
(a) Rice fading distribution
f
sam
Sampling frequency of the channel simulator
F
s
Sampling frequency of the OFDM symbol
G Ratio of the CP time to the useful symbol time
G Channel gain matrix
h Vector of channel coeﬃcients
ˆ
h Channel coeﬃcients estimates
h(t) Channel impulse response
h(t, τ) Channel timevarying impulse response
h
b
(t, τ) Baseband equivalent impulse response of the channel
H Channel matrix
H
rc
(f) Raised cosine ﬁlter frequency response
H
rrc
(f) Rootraised cosine ﬁlter frequency response
APPENDIX E. ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS 114
H
R
(f) Frequency response of the receive ﬁlter
H
T
(f) Frequency response of the transmit ﬁlter
H
ν
Virtual channel matrix
I Vector for the interleaving matrix
I
0
Modiﬁed Bessel function of ﬁrst kind and order zero
I
2
2 2 identity matrix
k Number of uncoded bits that enter the RS encoder
K Rice distribution factor
l Length of the binary sequences of a Galois ﬁeld GF(2
l
)
L Number of multipath components
N
T
Number of transmit antennas
M
a
Number of transmitted bits per symbol (modulation alphabet)
n Number of coded bytes at the output of the RS encoder
n Average noise power
n Noise vector
¯ n Modiﬁed noise vector
n
f
Sampling factor, used in the deﬁnition of the OFDM symbol
N
R
Number of receive antennas
N
c
Number of subbands the OFDM signal is divided in
N
columns
Number of columns in the interleaving matrix
N
cpc
Number of transmitted bits per symbol
N
data
Number of used data subcarriers
N
FFT
Number of points used when performing the FFT algorithm
N
OFDM
Number of transmitted OFDM symbols in one frame
N
path
Number of paths of the timevariant channel model
N
rows
Number of rows in the interleaving matrix
N
RS
Number of blocks used in the RS encoder
N
tcb
Total number of coded bits
N
train
Number of training symbols per frame
N
txdata
Number of transmitted data symbols
N
txsym
Total number of transmitted OFDM symbols
N
Tsym
Total number of transmitted symbols in one frame
N
used
Number of used nonzero subcarriers
^
C
(0, 1) Set of complex numbers, with zero mean and unit variance
p
s
Vector containing the pilot subcarriers
p(y[s) Conditional probability, probability of y given s
P
b
Probability of bit error
P
bc
Probability of bit error per carrier
P
ALL
Frequency domain sequence from which are derived all full
bandwidth preambles
APPENDIX E. ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS 115
P
EVEN
Frequency domain sequence for long training symbols constructed
with even subcarriers of P
ALL
P
ODD
Frequency domain sequence for long training symbols constructed
with odd subcarriers of P
ALL
P
SHORT
Frequency domain sequence for short training symbols
Q(x) Complementary Gaussian error function
r Vector of received symbols
R Overall rate
Re¦¦ Operation to extract the real part
R
MIMO
Spatial correlation matrix of the MIMO channel
R
R
Transmit correlation matrix
R
sym
Symbol rate
R
T
Receive correlation matrix
s Average signal power
s Vector containing the transmitted symbols
´ s Transmit symbol estimates
S
packet
Packet size, in bits, that is transmitted by the source
S Symbol block matrix
t Number of bytes a RS encoder can correct
T
b
Useful symbol time
T
coh
Coherence time
T
g
CP symbol time
T
frame
Frame duration
T
m
Multipath spread
T
s
Sampling time of the OFDM symbol
T
sym
OFDM symbol time
v Vehicle speed
w
k
Output of the PRBS generator
W Signal bandwidth
y Vector containing the received symbol
α Rolloﬀ factor
α
nm
Complex transmission coeﬃcient from antenna m to antenna n
β
i
Weight factor
γ
n
SNR threshold
δ(t) Dirac delta function
∆f Subcarrier spacing
Property operator
ϕ Angle of arrival of the received signal component
φ Phase delay of a multipath signal
ρ
2
Power of the received nonfading signal
ρ
TX
ij
Spatial correlation coeﬃcient at the transmitter
APPENDIX E. ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS 116
ρ
RX
ij
Spatial correlation coeﬃcient at the receiver
σ
x
Standard deviation of x
σ
τ
RMS delay spread
σ
2
v
Noise variance
θ Phase alteration experienced by the multipath fading signal
τ Channel multipath delay
Bibliography
[1] S. Sampei: ”Applications of Digital Wireless Technologies to Global
Wireless Communications,” Prentice Hall, 1997.
[2] Intel White Paper, WiFi and WiMAX Solutions: ”Understanding Wi
Fi and WiMAX as MetroAccess Solutions,” Intel Corporation, 2004.
http://www.intel.com/netcomms/technologies/wimax/304471.pdf
[3] J. Pino Lacosta: ”WiMAX: una alternativa d’accés a les xarxes,” Master
Thesis, Universitat Oberta de Catalunya, Enginyeria Informàtica, June
2004.
[4] LAN/MAN Standards Committee: ”802.16 IEEE Standard for Lo
cal and Metropolitan Area Networks. Part 16: Air Interface for Fixed
Broadband Wireless Access Systems,” IEEE Standards, October 2004.
[5] C. Eklund, R. B. Marks, K. L. Stanwood, and S. Wang: ”IEEE Standard
802.16: A Technical Overview of the WirelessMAN Air Interface for
Broadband Wireless Access,” IEEE Communications Magazine, pp. 98
107, June 2002.
http://www.wirelessman.org/tutorial
[6] WiMAX Forum: ”Mobile WiMAX. Part I: A Technical Overview and
Performance Evaluation,” August 2006.
http://www.intel.com/netcomms/technologies/wimax
[7] T. Cooklev: ”Wireless Communication Standards. A Study of IEEE
802.11
TM
, 802.15
TM
, and 802.16
TM
,” Standards Information Networks
IEEE Press, 2004.
[8] P. Stavroulakis: ”Third generation mobile telecommunication systems:
UMTS and IMT2000,” Springer, 2001.
[9] A. M. Michelson, and A. H. Levesque: ”Error Control Techniques for
Digital Communications,” WileyInterscience Publications, 1985.
117
BIBLIOGRAPHY 118
[10] S. B. Wicker: ”Error Control Systems for Digital Communication and
Storage,” School of Electrical and Computer Engineering, Georgia Insti
tute of Technology, Prentice Hall, 1995.
[11] E. P. Lawrey: ”Adaptive Techniques for Multiuser OFDM,” Ph. D. The
sis, School of Engineering, James Cook Univeristy, December 2001.
http://www.skydsp.com/publications
[12] K. V. Ramasami: ”A Primer on Root Raised Cosine Filter Design,”
December 2004.
http://www.ittc.ku.edu/ rvc/documents/rcdes.pdf
[13] T. S. Rappaport: ”Wireless Communications: principles and practice,”
Prentice Hall, 1996.
[14] R. J. McEliece, and W. E. Stark: ”Channels with block interference,”
IEEE Transactions on Information Theory, vol. 46, no. 2, pp. 325343,
March 2000.
[15] W. C. Jakes: ”Microwave Mobile Communications,” IEEE Press, 1994.
[16] L. Staphorst: ”Viterbi decoded linear block codes for narrowband and
wideband wireless communication over mobile fading channels,” Master
Thesis, Department of Electrical, Electronic and Computer Engineering,
University of Pretoria, July 2005.
http://upetd.up.ac.za/thesis/available/etd08082005120839/
[17] C. Mehlführer, F. Kaltenberger, M. Rupp, and G. Humer: ”A Scal
able Rapid Prototyping System for RealTime MIMO OFDM Transmis
sions,” Institute of Communications and RF Engineering, Vienna Uni
versity of Technology, and ARC Seibersdorf Research GmbH, Tech Gate
Vienna, Proceedings on the second IEE/EURASIP on DSP enabled Ra
dio, September 2005.
http://publik.tuwien.ac.at/files/pubet_10207.pdf
[18] Ki Seol Kim et al.: ”General LogLikelihood Ratio Expression and
its Implementation Algorithm for GrayCoded QAM Signals,” ETRI
Journal, vol. 28, no. 3, pp. 291300, June 2006.
http://etrij.etri.re.kr/Cyber/servlet/BrowseAbstract?paperid
=RP05080161
[19] ”The Matlab help: Communications Blockset,”
http://www.mathworks.com
BIBLIOGRAPHY 119
[20] I. E. Telatar: ”Capacity of MultiAntenna Gaussian Channels,” Euro
pean Transactions on Telecommunications, 1999, Technical Memoran
dum, Bell Laboratories, Lucent Technologies, vol. 10, no. 6, pp. 585595,
October 1998.
[21] G. J. Foschini, and M. J. Gans: ”On Limits of Wireless Communica
tion in a Fading Environment when Using Multiple Antennas,” Wireless
Personal Communications, vol. 6, no. 3, pp. 311335, 1998.
[22] S. Yang, and F. Kaltenberger: ”MIMO Algorithms for Wireless LAN,”
Proceedings Wireless Congress, Munich, Germany, October 2005.
[23] D. Pérez Palomar: ”A Uniﬁed Framework for Communications through
MIMO Channels,” Ph. D. Thesis, Departament de Teoria del Senyal i
Comunicacions, Universitat Politècnica de Catalunya, May 2003.
http://www.istimetra.org/thesis/Palomar_phd_thesis.pdf
[24] G. Gritsch, G. Kolar, H. Weinrichter, and M. Rupp: ”Two Adaptive
SpaceTime Block Coded MIMO Systems Exploiting Partial Channel
Knowledge at the Transmitter,” Institute for Communications and Ra
dio Frequency Engineering, Vienna University of Technolgoy, 5th In
ternational ITG Conference on Source and Channel Coding (SCC04),
Erlangen, Germany, January 2004.
http://publik.tuwien.ac.at/files/pubet_8504.pdf
[25] S. M. Alamouti: ”A Simple Transmit Diversity Technique for Wireless
Communications,” IEEE Journal on Selected Areas in Communications,
vol. 16, no. 8, pp. 14511458, October 1008.
[26] A. van Zelst, R. van Nee, and G. A. Awater: ”Space division multi
plexing (SDM) for OFDM systems,” IEEE 51st Vehicular Technology
Conference (VTC) Proceedings, vol. 2, pp. 10701074, Tokyo, Spring
2000.
[27] V. Tarokh, N. Seshadri, and A. R. Calderbank: ”Spacetime codes for
high data rate wireless communication: performance criterion and code
construction,” IEEE Transactions on Information Theory, vol. 44, no. 2,
pp. 744765, 1998.
[28] A. J. Goldsmith, and S. G. Chua: ”Adaptive Coded Modulation for Fad
ing Channels,” IEEE Transactions on Communications, vol. 46, no. 5,
pp. 595602, May 1998.
http://wsl.stanford.edu/ ee359/adapt_cod.pdf
BIBLIOGRAPHY 120
[29] T. Keller, and L. Hanzo: ”Adaptive Multicarrier Modulation: A Conve
nient Framework for TimeFrequency Processing in Wireless Communi
cations,” IEEE Transaction on Communications, vol. 88, no. 5, pp. 611
640, May 2000.
http://eprints.ecs.soton.ac.uk/4099
[30] L. W. Couch: ”Digital and Analog Communication Systems,” 6th edi
tion, Prentice Hall, 2001.
[31] L. Schumacher, J. P. Kermoal, K. I. Pedersen, P. E. Mogensen, and
F. Frederiksen: ”A Stochastic MIMO Radio Channel Model with Experi
mental Validation,” IEEE Journal on Selected Areas in Communications,
vol. 20, no. 6, pp. 12111226, August 2002.
[32] M. Engels: ”Wireless OFDM systems. How to make them work?,”,
Kluwer Academic, 2002.
[33] R. S. Bahai, and B. R .Saltzberg: ”Multicarrier digital communications:
theory and applications of OFDM,” New York Springer, 2004.
I certify that the work presented in this diploma thesis was done by myself and the work of other authors is properly cited.
Amalia Roca Vienna, February 2007
i
Acknowledgements
I would like to acknowledge many people who helped me during the course of this work, supporting it in one way or another. First and foremost, my appreciation and thanks go to my family. In particular, I can never thank my parents enough for their commitment, sacriﬁce, and overalls, their consistent encouragement and support. I wish to express my gratitude to my supervisor, Christian Mehlführer, for his seasoned guidance. Without his helpful suggestions this thesis could not be done. I also want to thank the people I met during my stay in Vienna and my colleagues at UPV for their friendship, help, and cheerfulness. I could not possibly forget M.J, and C. and the rest of A.C. Thank you for your support when my conﬁdence was down. Last, but not least, I want to mention A.F., who would be very proud of me to see that, at the end, all the eﬀorts have their recompense.
ii
For this issue. iii . In order to combat the temporal variations in quality on a multipath fading channel. thus maximizing the system throughput and improving BER performance. such as the MIMO extension. This technique employs multiple modulation and coding schemes to instantaneously adapt to the variations in the channel SNR. which are characterized by high quality features. In addition to not only topographic but also technological limitations. also covering the performance gains of some optional features. the telecommunication industries’ development has focused on an intensive use of broadband systems. WiMAX allows for an eﬃcient use of bandwidth in a wide frequency range. Likewise.162004 in Matlab Simulink. Based on the IEEE 802. Optional spacetime coding for more than one transmit antenna is implemented to allow performance investigations in various MIMO scenarios.Abstract In the last few years. That is the very base of the WiMAX concept: a wireless transmission infrastructure that allows a fast deployment as well as low maintenance costs. wireless solution alternatives have been found. an adaptive modulation and coding technique is used. The thesis gives an overview about the WiMAX standard and studies the performance of a WiMAX transmitter and receiver. The broadband wireless access has become the best way to meet escalating business demand for rapid internet connection and integrated "triple play" services. a maximum ratio combining diversity scheme is implemented in the receiver for the same purpose. The inﬂuence of these parts on the system performance is shown and analyzed in great detail in simulation results. new technologies with high transmission abilities have been designed.162004 standard. and can be used as a last mile solution for broadband internet access. The aim of this diploma thesis is to implement all compulsory features of the WiMAX OFDM physical layer speciﬁed in IEEE 802.
. . . . . . .8 Inverse Fast Fourier Transform algorithm 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Assembler . . . . . .4 Channel model implementation . . . . . . . . . 3. . . . . . .7 The guard bands . . . . . . . . . 3 Channel 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. .2. . .Contents 1 Introduction 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 ReedSolomon encoder . 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. . . . . . . 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Pilot symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Modulation mapper .2. .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 The cyclic preﬁx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Frequencyselective fading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . 3. . . . . . . . .1 Source . . technologies . . . . . . 3. . . . . . .2 Relationship with other wireless 1. . . . . . . . . . . 2. . . 2 Transmitter 2. .2. . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . iv . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Interleaver .1 Technical overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . 2. .2 Outline of the thesis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Fading channel models . 1 3 3 8 11 14 15 16 17 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 27 28 28 30 30 33 33 37 38 38 . . . .1 Filters . .1 The WiMAX standard . .2 Flat fading . . . . . . . . . . .2 Convolutional encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. . . 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. 2. .2 Encoder . .5 Training sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 Puncturing process . . . 1. . . . . . . 2. . . . . .1 Description of the fading channel 3. . . . . . . . . .
.3 Viterbi decoder . .1 Theory on the AMC technique . .1 MIMO communications theory . . . 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Channel estimator . . 4.5. . 4. . . . . . . . . . .6. . . . .3 Coding and decoding . 4. . . .3 Maximum Ratio Combining 5. . . . . . . . . . .2 SpaceTime Coding . . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 The MIMO channel model . . . . . . . . . .3 The IMETRA channel model . . . . . . . .1 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . . . . . .1 Deinterleaving . . . . . . . . . 5. . 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 43 44 44 44 44 46 46 47 49 50 50 50 52 53 53 54 56 60 61 62 64 66 66 66 68 69 70 71 72 4 Receiver 4. .5. . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. . . . . 5. . . . . .1 A single antenna transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 SNR estimation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . 4. .2 Receiver . . 6. . . . . . . . . . 6. . . . 5. . . 4. . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . .4 ReedSolomon decoder . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . .2. . .2 MIMO implementation .3 Disassembler . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . .2 The AMC block . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Simulation results 73 7. . . . . . 5 MIMO transmission 5. . .2 Removing the guard bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 AMC implementation . . . . . . . . .2 Inserting zeros . . .5 Demapper . . . . . . . mechanisms . . . . . 6 Adaptive Modulation and Coding 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. . . . . . . .1 Introduction to adaptive transmission 6. . . . . . .2. . . . . . .2 Soft demapping .6. . . . . . . . . . . 5. . . .1. . .2. . . .1 Hard Demapping . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Types of channel fading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . 73 7. . . . . . . . . 74 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Decoder . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Modulation schemes and coding rates . 6. 76 v .2 Performance of the AMC scheme . . . . . . 6. . . . . . .1 Fast Fourier Transform algorithm 4. . . . . . . . . . . .3. . 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . 101 . A. . .5 Summary . . . . C. .2 Alamouti with two receive antennas . . . . . . . B. . . 104 . 105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Transmission parameters . . . . . . WiFi simulator . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. . . . .2. . . . . . . .4 AMC and its eﬀects in the results . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . 113 Bibliography 120 vi . . . . . . . .1 OFDM symbol description C.1. . . . . 101 . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Channel model scenarios . 7. . .4 The OFDM system model A. . .1. B. . . . . . MISO. . . . . . . .2 7.2 Estimation of the transmitted symbols when using B. .1 Parameters description . . . . . 110 E. . .3 Demapping and channel estimation . . 7. . . . .7. . .1.4 Parameter values . . . . . . . . . . . .1 SISO. .3 Cyclic Preﬁx .2. . D WiMAX simulator block diagram . . . . . SIMO. .2 WiMAX vs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Description of the correlation matrices . . A. . . . . . . C Parameters of the simulator C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Channel parameters . . . . . . . . .2 List of symbols . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. . . C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Alamouti with one receive antenna . . . . . . . STC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Orthogonality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 . . . . 106 107 E Abbreviations and Symbols 110 E. . . . and MIMO systems 7. . . . 77 80 83 83 85 86 89 89 90 91 93 94 95 95 97 97 99 8 Conclusion A OFDM theory A. . . . .1 Multicarrier modulation . . Multiple antenna transmission . . . . .1.1 List of abbreviations . . . B Derivation of formulas B. . . . . . . . . . . . C. . . . . . . .
WiMAX deﬁnes a WMAN2 . DSL3 .Chapter 1 Introduction The experienced growth in the use of digital networks has led to the need for the design of new communication networks with higher capacity. The telecommunication industry is also changing. Moreover. the huge uptake rate of mobile phone technology. thus becoming a solution to develop broadband industry 2 Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Wireless Metropolitan Area Network 3 Digital Subscriber Line 4 WirelessFidelity. such as video conferences. a kind of a huge hotspot that provides interoperable broadband wireless connectivity to ﬁxed. The increased reliance on computer networking and the Internet has resulted in a wider demand for connectivity to be provided "any where. Wireless digital communications are an emerging ﬁeld that has experienced an spectacular expansion during the last several years.11b standardbased products. coming up as an alternative connection for cable. or applications with multimedia contents. name given to WLAN IEEE 802. leading to a rise in the requirements for higher capacity and high reliability broadband wireless telecommunication systems. with a demand for a greater range of services. 1 1 . as well as a possible transport network for WiFi4 hotspots. and T1/E1 systems.16 standardbased products. Broadband availability brings high performance connectivity to over a billion users worldwide. any time". WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network) and the exponential growth of Internet have resulted in an increased demand for new methods of obtaining high capacity wireless networks [1]. portable. is a wireless networking standard which aims for addressing interoperability across IEEE1 802. known as WiMAX. Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access. and nomadic users. It allows communications which have no direct visibility. thus developing new wireless broadband standards and technologies that will rapidly span wireless coverage.
. WiMAX will substitute other broadband technologies competing in the same segment and will become an excellent solution for the deployment of the wellknown last mile infrastructures in places where it is very diﬃcult to get with other technologies.0 .1.CHAPTER 1. as shown in Figure 1. products based on WiMAX technology can be combined with other technologies to oﬀer broadband access in many of the possible scenarios of utilization. Likewise.16e speciﬁcation. WiMAX will represent a serious competitor to 3G (Third Generation) cellular systems as high speed mobile data applications will be achieved with the 802. WiMAX oﬀers a good solution for these challenges because it provides a costeﬀective. INTRODUCTION 2 platforms.1: Possible scenarios for the deployment of WiMAX. enterprise campus. It can even be used to deliver backhaul for carrier structures. Additionally. Figure 1. and where the costs of deployment and maintenance of such technologies would not be proﬁtable. and WiFi hotspots. where examples of the deployment of WiMAX systems are illustrated. such as cable or DSL. rapidly deployable solution [2]. In this way.0 . WiMAX will connect rural areas in developing countries as well as underserved metropolitan areas.
162004 base speciﬁcation with the aim of targeting the mobile market by adding portability.1.162004 but also with the IEEE 802.162004 is primarily intended for stationary transmission.16a was speciﬁed for working in a lower frequency band.162004 [3]. The original MAC is enhanced to accommodate multiple physical layer speciﬁcations and services. In the downstream direction there is only one transmitter.1 Technical overview The WiMAX standard deﬁnes the air interface for the IEEE 802. with a base station controlling independent sectors simultaneously. This air interface includes the deﬁnition of the medium access control (MAC) and the physical (PHY) layers. The last revision of this speciﬁcation is better known as IEEE 802. addressing the needs for diﬀerent environments. Due to the fact that nonlineofsight transmissions are diﬃcult when communicating at high frequencies.16d speciﬁcation is a variation of the ﬁxed standard (IEEE 802. Therefore. the IEEE 802. the 802.162004 speciﬁcation working in the frequency band 211 GHz.16 standard was ﬁrstly designed to address communications with direct visibility in the frequency band from 10 to 66 GHz. 1. Access and bandwidth allocation algorithms must be able to accommodate hundreds of terminals per channel.16e is oriented to both stationary and mobile deployments. Medium Access Control (MAC) layer Some functions are associated with providing service to subscribers. They include transmitting data in frames and controlling the access to the shared wireless medium.1 The WiMAX standard The IEEE 802. which is situated above the physical layer.16e speciﬁcation. It is generally designed to work with pointtomultipoint topology networks.16e standard is an amendment to the 802. with terminals that may be shared by multiple end users. groups the mentioned functions. between 2 and 11 GHz. and the MAC . INTRODUCTION 3 1.16a) with the main advantage of optimizing the power consumption of the mobile devices. While the 802. On the other hand. The IEEE 802. the MAC protocol deﬁnes how and when a base station (BS) or a subscriber station (SS) may initiate the transmission on the channel. WiMAX standardbased products are designed to work not only with IEEE 802.CHAPTER 1. the amendment 802. The medium access control (MAC) layer.
The services required by the multiple users are varied. where multiple SSs compete for accessing to the medium. in the upstream direction. • Low latency for delay sensitive services (TDM. exploiting system capacity. Both modulation and coding schemes are speciﬁed in a burst proﬁle that is adjusted adaptively for each burst to each subscriber station. adapting the data velocities and delays to the needs of each service. the MAC layer must accommodate both continuous and bursty traﬃc. INTRODUCTION Feature TDM/TDMA scheduled uplink/downlink frames Scalable from one to hundreds of subscribers Connectionoriented QoS support Beneﬁt • Eﬃcient bandwidth usage. VoIP).CHAPTER 1. • Improves endtoend performance by hiding RF layer induced errors from upper layer protocols. mechanisms in the MAC provide for diﬀerentiated quality of service (QoS) supporting the needs of various applications. However. • Per connection QoS. • Allows cost eﬀective deployments by supporting enough subscribers to deliver a robust business case. eﬃcient. The requestgrant mechanism is designed to be scalable. the MAC protocol applies a time division multiple access (TDMA) technique. 4 Automatic retransmission request (ARQ) Support for adaptive modulation Security and encryption (TripleDES) Automatic power control Table 1. • Faster packet routing and forwarding. • Enables cellular deployments by minimizing selfinterference. and self5 6 Time Division Multiplexing Variable Bit Rate . • Data priorization. Internet protocol (IP) connectivity. including voice and data. • Enables highest data rates allowed by channel conditions.1: 802.162004 MAC features. providing maximum data rates. and voice over IP (VoIP). Voice. making the use of bandwidth eﬃcient. and improving the capacity of the system. protocol is quite simple using TDM5 to multiplex the data. • Protects user privacy. • Optimal transport for VBR6 traﬃc (video).1 . In order to support this variety of services. thus providing an eﬃcient use of the bandwidth. Issues of transport eﬃciency are also addressed. Additionally.
The standard also supports automatic power control. and oﬀer the users a broadband connectivity without needing a direct lineofsight to the base station. The ﬁxed WiMAX standard deﬁnes proﬁles using the 256point FFT OFDM PHY layer speciﬁcation. and security and encryption mechanisms. 7 8 Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access . INTRODUCTION 5 correcting. While the SC air interface is used for lineofsight (LoS) transmissions. The possibility of working with mesh topologies allows direct communication between SSs. These PHY speciﬁcations are: • A single carrier (SC) modulated air interface. • Design of an adaptive modulation and coding mechanism that depends on channel and interference conditions. selective fading is localized to a subset of carriers that are relatively easy to equalize. Furthermore. • A 256point FFT OFDM7 multiplexing scheme. It adjusts the modulation method almost instantaneously for optimum data transfer. which allows the transmission of multiple signals using diﬀerent subcarriers simultaneously. • A 2048point FFT OFDMA8 scheme.162004 standard deﬁnes three diﬀerent PHYs that can be used in conjunction with the MAC layer to provide a reliable endtoend link. ﬁxed WiMAX systems provide up to 5 km of service area allowing transmissions with a maximum data rate up to 70 Mbps in a 20 MHz channel bandwith. thus making a most eﬃcient use of the bandwidth. Another feature that improves the transmission performance is the automatic repeat request (ARQ) as well as the support for mesh topology rather than only pointtomultipoint network architectures. Further information about the MAC features can be found in [4] and [5]. the two OFDMbased systems are more suitable for non lineofsight (NLoS) operations due to the simplicity of the equalization process for multicarrier signals. The main features of the mentioned ﬁxed WiMAX are detailed next: • Use of an OFDM modulation scheme. enhancing this way the scalability of the system. Because the OFDM waveform is composed of multiple narrowband orthogonal carriers. Physical (PHY) layer The IEEE 802. allowing the system a scalability from one to hundreds of users.CHAPTER 1.
used to detect and correct errors in order to improve throughput. however. There are two basic types of smart antennas. and increasing the spectral density and the SNR. and combating interference. • Optional support of both transmit and receive diversity to enhance performance in fading environments through spatial diversity. allowing the system to be adapted to the regulations in diﬀerent countries. These smart antennas are becoming a good alternative for BWA10 deployments. FDD and TDD. comprised from 1. In addition. The ﬁrst ones can use either a ﬁxed number of beams choosing the most suitable for the transmission or an steering beam to the desired antenna. whose beams can steer their focus to a particular direction or directions always pointing at the receiver. The transmitter implements spacetime coding (STC) to provide transmit source independence. and those known as adaptive antenna systems (AAS). avoiding interference between adjacent channels. The FEC scheme is implemented with a ReedSolomon encoder concatenated with a convolutional one. and consequently. • Robust FEC9 techniques. those with multiple beam (directional antennas). thus providing the necessary ﬂexibility to operate in many diﬀerent frequency bands with varying channel requirements around the world. it is also crucial for cell planning. allowing the system to increase capacity. reducing the fade margin requirement. and followed by an interleaver. The second type works with multielement antennas with a varying beam pattern.CHAPTER 1. • Use of ﬂexible channel bandwidths. • Design of a dynamic frequency selection (DFS) mechanism to minimize inteferences.25 to 20 MHz. • Optional support of smart antennas. INTRODUCTION 6 • Support of both time and frequency division duplexing formats. Optional support of block turbo coding (BTC) and convolutional turbo coding (CTC) can be implemented. uses maximum ratio combining (MRC) techniques to improve the availability of the system. This ﬂexibility facilitates transmissions over longer ranges and from diﬀerent types of subscriber platforms. The receiver. especially in the licensed spectrum. 9 10 Forward Error Correction Broadband Wireless Access .
162004 PHY features. their ability to suppress interference and increase system gain is more important to BWA deployments. allowing transmission rates of 5 Mbps in a 5 MHz channel bandwidth. maximizing battery life 11 12 All these features are in great detail explained in [5]. and as these costs come down. It presents the same features as those of the ﬁxed WiMAX speciﬁcation that have been already mentioned. • Implementation of channel quality measurements which help in the selection and assignment of the adaptive burst proﬁles. .16e)12 uses the 2048point FFT OFDMA PHY speciﬁcation. and wireless systems that use FDM. • STC algorithms at the transmitter. Battery life and handoﬀ are two critical issues for mobile applications. It provides a service area coverage from 1. • Smart antennas are fast becoming more aﬀordable. However. • Addresses varying worldwide regulations when one or both may be allowed. • Support of both time and frequency division multiplexing formats (TDM and FDM).25 to 20 MHz) DFS support Designed to support AAS Beneﬁt • Simple equalization of multipath channels in outdoor LoS and NLoS environments.2: 802. • Implemented in DL to increase diversity and capacity.1 . INTRODUCTION Feature11 256point FFT OFDM waveform Adaptive modulation and variable error correction encoding per radio frequency (RF) burst TDD and FDD duplexing support Flexible channel sizes (from 1. A complete description of the mobile WiMAX can be found in [6]. MRC at the receiver. The mobile WiMAX (IEEE 802. • Provides the necessary ﬂexibility to operate in many diﬀerent frequency bands with varying requirements around the world. • Allows interoperability between cellular systems (TDM) and wireless systems (FDM). to allow interoperability between cellular systems working with TDM. other features such as handoﬀs and powersaving mechanisms are added to oﬀer a reliable communication. On one hand. • Minimizes interference between adjacent channels. 7 TDM and FDM support Designed to support multipleinput multipleoutput (MIMO) schemes Table 1. and with a user maximum speed below 100 km/h. • Ensures a robust RF link while maximizing the number of bits per second for each subscriber unit.6 to 5 km.CHAPTER 1.
1 .162004 OFDMA with 2048 subcarriers 2PAM.16a 802.5G 3. and those of the socalled ﬁxed and mobile WiMAX.1.16d ol u v se W s les ire wo net rk 802. 16QAM.75G 4G 802. handoﬀ and handovers are necessary to enable the MS to switch from one BS to another at vehicular speeds without interrupting the connection.16. and 64QAM Fixed and Pedestrian 802. 25 and 28 MHz 2PAM. 4QAM. (maximum of 50 km) Flexible.16 1066 GHz 32134 Mbps (28 MHz channel) LoS 25 km approx. and 64QAM Vehicular (20100 km/h) Mobility Table 1.162004 < 11 GHz up to 70 Mbps (20 MHz channel) LoS and NLoS 510 km approx. are summarized in the following chart: Spectrum Maximum data rate Alignment Coverage range Channel bandwidth Modulation 802. and 64QAM Fixed 802. INTRODUCTION 8 implies minimizing the mobile station (MS) power usage. 4QAM. 1.162004 and 802. and IEEE 802.16e < 6 GHz up to 15 Mbps (5 MHz channel) LoS and NLoS 25 km approx.3: IEEE 802. 16QAM. .11b Time Proprietary Figure 1. 802. 20.16 standard.162004. 4QAM.25 up to 20 MHz OFDM with 256 subcarriers 2PAM.11g 802. 16QAM.1: Convergence in wireless communications.16e standards. IEEE 802.CHAPTER 1. On the other hand.2 Relationship with other wireless technologies Range Cellular evolution 2G 2.16e n tio 802.5G 3G 3. from 1. The main features of the initial IEEE 802. Equal to 802.1 .16e respectively.
CHAPTER 1. As shown in Figure 1.2.1. and high service areas and data rates. Internet access. i. it ﬁlls the gap between WiFi and UMTS.16e). it provides lower data rates. WiMAX will compete with WiFi and 13 Universal Mobile Telecommunications System .1 . computing. On the other hand. Therefore. The mentioned convergence between wireless and cellular networks is illustrated in Figure 1. they face several problems in the deployment and they do not oﬀer enough capacity to serve all possible users.1 .2: WiMAX ﬁlls the gap between WiFi and UMTS. WiMAX tries to balance this situation . coverage area. WLANs and the exponential growth that is experiencing the use of the Internet have resulted in an increased demand for new methods to obtain high capacity wireless networks. and requires high investments for its deployment. INTRODUCTION 9 Wireless access to data networks is expected to be an area of rapid growth for mobile communication systems. thus providing vehicular mobility (included in IEEE 802. The huge uptake rate of mobile phone technologies. and infrastructure costs.1 . UMTS13 oﬀers larger ranges and vehicular mobility. Rate WiFi WiMAX UMTS Mobility Figure 1. WiMAX may be seen as the fourth generation (4G) of mobile systems as the convergence of cellular telephony. both WLAN and cellular mobile applications are being widely expanded to oﬀer the demanded wireless access. On one hand. WiFi provides a high data rate. However. they experience several diﬃculties for reaching a complete mobile broadband access. while WiMAX will complement WiFi and UMTS in some of the possible scenarios where these systems are not suﬃciently developed. bounded by factors such as bandwidth. In any case. but only on a short range of distances and with a slow movement of the user. and potentially many multimedia applications become a real fact. but instead.e.
WiMAX appeared to fulﬁl the need for delivering wireless access to MANs.4: Comparative table between WiFi. WiFi Standard Channel width Spectrum Data rate Range Multiplexing Transmission Mobility Advantages Disadvantages IEEE 802. which provides users with data rates of 11 Mbps. where.11 standardbased products are known. WiMAX vs. Table 1.1 .11a speciﬁcation.4/5.16e) No Throughput and range Interference issues? UMTS HSDPA IMT200014 Fixed 5 MHz ∼2 GHz 1/14 Mbps 50 km FDM WCDMA Vehicular Mobility and range Low rates and expensive Table 1. and the 802. WiMAX systems are able to support users in ranges up to 50 km with a direct visibility to the base station and ranges from 1 to 7 km where no visibility is available.1 . WiMAX and UMTS. Rates from 70 to 240 Mbps are oﬀered and can be achieved with this technology. maintenance. in general.11b speciﬁcation.CHAPTER 1.16 Variable Variable ≤ 20 MHz ≤ 28 MHz 211 GHz 1066 GHz 70 Mbps 240 Mbps 17 km 1215 km FDM/TDM FDM/TDM OFDM/OFDMA SC Vehicular (802. WiFi WiFi or WLAN is the name with which the IEEE 802. INTRODUCTION 10 UMTS also in other possible scenarios. It was designed to oﬀer BWA services to metropolitan areas providing users with larger coverage ranges and higher data rates. WiMAX and its two closest competitors.4 gives an overview on the comparison between the mentioned systems. A deeper analysis of these three systems will be developed next.2 GHz. It includes the 802. in the 2. or just the supply of the service would not be proﬁtable. capable to oﬀer data rates of 54 Mbps working in the frequency band of 5. This technology has generally a coverage area of 100 meters and ﬁxed channel bandwidths of 20 MHz [7]. WiFi and UMTS.4 GHz frequency band.2 GHz 2/54 Mbps 100 m TDM SS15 /OFDM Pedestrian Throughput and costs Short range WiMAX IEEE 802. 15 15 International Mobile Communications Spread Spectrum . the costs in the deployment.11 Fixed 20 MHz 2.
2 Outline of the thesis This thesis examines the implementation of a WiMAX simulator built with Matlab Simulink. WiMAX does not create a conﬂict with the mentioned WiFi. oﬀering a wireless last mile extension for cable and DSL infrastructures. which rise as high as 2 Mbps in stationary user environments. oﬀering data rates that may decrease while the velocity of the user increases. as the investments the operators need to carry out for its deployment are not so high. INTRODUCTION 11 However. WiMAX is becoming a serious threat for 3G cellular networks because of its broadband and distance capabilities. providing theoretical data rates as high as 14 Mbps [8]. WiMAX is also able to oﬀer higher data rates than UMTS. as they are complementary technologies. This simulator is targeted to the 256point FFT OFDM PHY layer. An overview of the WiMAX system has already been exposed in the present chapter. 1. employing a 5 MHz channel width. it is expected to be set up as an alternative to cellular networks.CHAPTER 1. where the main features of the standard are summarized. However. UMTS UMTS is identiﬁed with the socalled third generation of cellular networks standardized by the 3GPP16 . HSDPA17 technology further increases the throughput speeds. In order to understand the objectives and the applications of this system. and it has been speciﬁed as an integrated solution for mobile voice and data with wide coverage area. a 16 17 3rd Generation Partnership Project High Speed Downlink Packet Access . and from 2110 to 2200 MHz. The thesis is organized in eight chapters. as well as its ability to eﬀectively support voice with full QoS. WiMAX provides a low cost way to backhaul WiFi hotspots and WLAN points in businesses and homes. This system provides for theoretical bit rates of up to 384 kbps in high mobility situations. WiMAX vs. It uses wideband code division mutiple access (WCDMA) as the carrier modulation scheme. which are necessary to understand all the diﬀerent methods and processes that have been used. but it does not allow the same grade of mobility. in which a detailed overview of every element of the system is given taking into account both the standard speciﬁcations and the corresponding theoretical aspects. Moreover. The frequency bands that are assigned to this technology are the licensed frequencies from 1885 to 2025 MHz.
it also needs to be conformed into an OFDM symbol by performing the corresponding operations. Before sending it. discussed in the next chapter. and a channel over which the information is sent.2 . For the WiMAX system. which include a frequencytime transformation and the addition of a guard period. The performance of any wireless communication system is highly dependent on the propagation channel. and multipath delay spread have to be considered for the optimization of the communication link. WiMAX has three basic elements. this chapter gives a theoretical explanation about timevariant channels. is the one who generates the signal to be sent over the channel. These operations include a channel estimation as well as an equalization process to solve the degrading eﬀects of the signal caused by 18 Intelligent MultiElement Transmit and Receive Antennas . The remaining seven chapters discuss the implementation of the WiMAX simulator. such as path loss. Chapter 3 examines the communication channel. presented in Chapter 2.CHAPTER 1. the signal has to be adapted to the channel conditions using a speciﬁc adaptive modulation and coding scheme. and so.1. Transmitter Channel Receiver feedback Figure 1. It observes the signal after the channel and performs the necessary operations to obtain the transmitted information. the signal is sent over the channel. a transmitter. a detailed knowledge of radio propagation eﬀects. As data is transmitted using the OFDM transmission technique. INTRODUCTION 12 comparison between WiMAX and other wireless systems is also included in the chapter. to afterwards outline two fading channel models. The receiver is examined in Chapter 4. frequencyselective fading. which oﬀers in its end an overview of the wellknown IMETRA18 used to model fading channels.2 . This way. The transmitter. ﬂat and frequencyselective fading channels. a receiver. The channel implementation of our simulator is also discussed in this chapter.1: Basic communication system. As any other communication system. Doppler spread. Then. it is a wireless channel. The main components of a WiMAX communication system are shown in Figure 1.
improving the performance of the system substantially. The use of multiple antennas at the transmitter and/or at the receiver in a communication link opens a new dimension in reliable wireless communications. simulations with MIMO channels show not only the improvement in BER20 performance but also the increase in data rate that can be achieved without any bandwidth expansion when using these systems. Finally. INTRODUCTION 13 multipath propagation. a feedback mechanism that allows to transfer information about the channel state back to the transmitter is described. A comparison between parameters used in a previously implemented WLAN and those of the newly built WiMAX simulator is also given in this appendix. a set of values for the parameters of the simulator is listed. the data that was transmitted is also implemented. is used in the MIMO receiver. Chapter 6 is devoted to the analysis of the mentioned AMC process. In Appendix C.CHAPTER 1. Using this information. The MRC diversity scheme. and the second includes the notations that have been employed through this work. the concluding remarks are summed up in Chapter 8. Firstly. Chapter 5 introduces MIMO systems. Additionally. Lastly. written in their full length. Chapter 7 analyzes the obtained results. Appendix B presents a detailed analysis on the derivation of some formulas explained in the thesis. Finally. 19 20 Additive White Gaussian Noise Bit Error Rate . Appendix A is intended to give an overview of OFDM systems. Based on the current channel characteristics. Appendix D gives a general view of the WiMAX simulator through the whole Simulink block diagram. the ﬁrst contains the acronyms used in the thesis. The core idea in the MIMO transmitter is STC in which signal processing in time is completed with signal processing in the spatial dimension by using multiple spatially distributed antennas at both link ends. this work also includes ﬁve appendices that complete the thesis already outlined. Appendix E includes two lists. a method that accomplishes the proper decoding of soft or hard demodulator outputs to reproduce. simulation results using an AWGN19 channel are discussed. an adaptive modulation and coding (AMC) mechanism can be implemented. Next. by which multiple replicas of the same information signal received over diﬀerent diversity branches are combined so as to maximize the instantaneous signaltonoise ratio (SNR) at the combiner output. as accurately as possible. it adaptively changes the coding and the carrier modulation scheme allowing the data rate to be maximized. several results show the enhancement in throughput obtained with the performance of the AMC mechanism. Additionally. Furthermore.
These training sequences are used for performing an estimation of the channel coeﬃcients at the receiver. Furthermore. 1 zero DC subcarrier. a process of assembling the zero DC subcarrier. preambles consisting of training sequences are appended at the beginning of each burst. and pilots is needed to built the symbols. the data from the source is randomized and afterwards.1: Transmitter of the WiMAX system. 8 pilot subcarriers.0 . 14 . 1 2 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation A detailed analysis of the OFDM theory is given in Appendix A. As previously explained in Chapter 1. Pilot Input bits Transmitted signal Encoder Mapper Assembler Add Zeros IFFT256 Add CP Training Figure 2. Therefore. Encoder Encoder the simulator implemented in the thesis works for the WirelessMANOFDM physical (PHY) layer of WiMAX. data. The functional blocks that compose the transmitter of the WiMAX simulator are depicted in Figure 2. and 55 guard carriers.1. This PHY layer uses orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) with 256 subcarriers. coded Reed Convolutional Solomon Puncture Interleaver and mapped into QAM1 symbols. Each OFDM2 symbol is composed of 192 data subcarriers.0 .Chapter 2 Transmitter This chapter describes the diﬀerent steps the transmitter performs before transmitting the data. First of all.
instead of performing a randomization process.CHAPTER 2. The signal is converted to the time domain by means of the inverse fast Fourier transform (IFFT) algorithm.1 Source As described in the standard [4]. 2. Ndata is the number of used data subcarriers.2) In the formula. and ﬁnally.3) Here. speciﬁed by Ntrain : NOFDM = NTsym − Ntrain . R represents the overall coding rate. which is speciﬁed by the number of transmitted bits per symbol. a cyclic preﬁx (CP) with the aim of preventing intersymbol interference is added. the total number of transmitted symbols is deﬁned as NTsym = Tframe .1. and on each allocation of a data block (subchannels on the frequency domain and OFDM symbols on the time domain).1) Furthermore. the information bits must be randomized before the transmission.1 .1 . the number of bits to be sent by the source is calculated: Spacket = NOFDM RNdata Ma . The packet size depends on the number of transmitted OFDM symbols and the overall coding rate of the system. The process of randomization is performed on each burst of data on the downlink and uplink. a binary source that produces random sequences of bits is used. Once the number of OFDM symbols is known. NTsym . and Tframe denotes the frame duration. and Ma deﬁnes the modulation alphabet. It depends on the total number of transmitted symbols.1. Tsym (2. (2. (2. In our case. TRANSMITTER 15 After the assembling process. Tsym is the OFDM symbol time. The randomization process is used to minimize the possibility of transmissions of nonmodulated subcarriers. a zero padding is performed.1 calculates the number of transmitted OFDM symbols in one frame.1 . The expression that deﬁnes Tsym as well as the possible values speciﬁed for the frame duration can be found in Section C. which also includes the symbols used for the preamble. The number of bits that are generated is speciﬁed to be framebased and is calculated from the packet size required in each situation.1 . as well as the modulation alphabet. Equation 2. .
2 . A variablerate coding scheme that depends on the channel conditions is designed to oﬀer optimal error protection levels to the users.1 gives the block sizes and code rates used for the diﬀerent modulations.1. at a given time.96.48. the encoding process consists of a concatenation of an outer ReedSolomon (RS) code and an inner convolutional code (CC) as a FEC scheme.CHAPTER 2. and then.6) CC code rate 1/2 2/3 5/6 2/3 5/6 3/4 5/6 Overall code rate 1/2 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 2/3 3/4 Table 2. It is a ﬂexible coding process due to the puncturing of the signal.2 .12.4) (80. a speciﬁc coding rate is selected for the downlink data transmissions.24. users who experience a "bad" channel condition. low SNR.2 .2 Encoder As shown in Figure 2.2) (64.4) (40. Thus.e. TRANSMITTER 16 2.2 . will be provided with better error correction 3 Pulse Amplitude Modulation . That means that ﬁrst data passes in block format through the RS encoder.108. The FEC options are paired with several modulation schemes to form burst proﬁles of varying robustness and eﬃciency. and allows diﬀerent coding rates. Table 2.4) (108.36.1: The coding process in WiMAX.6) (120.1: WiMAX modulation and coding schemes.0) (32. based on this report. i. AMC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Modulation 2PAM3 4QAM 4QAM 16QAM 16QAM 64QAM 64QAM RS code (12.72. ReedSolomon Encoder Convolutional Encoder Puncture Interleaver Figure 2. The users report the current channel condition to the base station (BS) and. The last part of the encoder is a process of interleaving to avoid long error bursts. it goes across the convolutional encoder.
2) Further information of the AMC mechanism can be found in Chapter 6. Thus. A ReedSolomon code is speciﬁed as RS(n. then a ReedSolomon code can correct up to t symbols. • k: number of data bytes before encoding.2 . • t: number of data bytes that can be corrected.1 ReedSolomon encoder The properties of ReedSolomon codes make them suitable to applications where errors occur in bursts. ReedSolomon error correction is a coding scheme which works by ﬁrst constructing a polynomial from the data symbols to be transmitted. where t can be expressed as t = (n − k)/2. The error correction ability of any RS code is determined by (n − k).(x + λ2t−1 ) 4 (2. k and t can be deﬁned as: • n: number of bytes after encoding.CHAPTER 2. . 2. the ReedSolomon encoding shall be derived from a systematic RS(n = 255.. As speciﬁed in the standard. k. The primitive and generator polynomials used for the systematic code are expressed as follows: Primitive Polynomial: p(x) = x8 + x4 + x3 + x2 + 1 Generator Polynomial: g(x) = (x + λ0 )(x + λ1 )(x + λ2 ).1) (2. t) with lbit symbols. This means that the encoder takes k data symbols of l bits each and adds 2t parity symbols to construct an nsymbol codeword. each one of the diﬀerent encoder blocks will be explained in detail. This process is called adaptive modulation and coding (AMC)4 . and then sending an oversampled version of the polynomial instead of the original symbols themselves. TRANSMITTER 17 than those users experiencing "good" channel conditions at the same time. It will be given a thorough description of how they work and are implemented in the simulator. n. t = 8) code using a Galois ﬁeld speciﬁed as GF(28 ).. In the next sections.2 . the measure of redundancy in the block. If the location of the erroneous symbols is not known in advance. k = 239.2.
and puncturing process. and the output. it is shortened and punctured. to allow for variable block sizes and variable correction capabilities. 239 − k zero bytes are added as a preﬁx. a vector whose length is the same integer multiple of ln.e.2: Process of shortening and puncturing of the RS code. the number of symbols going in and out of the RS encoder change. and.2 shows the RS encoding. At the same time. after the encoding process. t. only the ﬁrst 2t of the total 16 parity bytes5 shall be employed. TRANSMITTER 18 The primitive polynomial is the one used to construct the symbol ﬁeld and it can also be named as ﬁeld generator polynomial. shortening. The code generator polynomial is used to calculate parity symbols and has the form speciﬁed as before. See [9] and [10] for more information about ReedSolomon codes. the ﬁrst step to implement is to divide the data vector in a number of blocks whose length ﬁts the requirement quoted above. as 2t = n−k. being l the length of the binary sequences corresponding to elements of the Galois ﬁeld GF(2l ). and also the number of symbols that can be corrected.CHAPTER 2. The input of the RS encoder block deﬁned by Simulink is speciﬁed to be a vector whose length is an integer multiple of lk. 8) code. With the puncturing. To make the RS code ﬂexible. . 239. Figure 2. Once the process of shortening has been done. 5 The parity bytes are calculated from the systematic RS(255. When a block is shortened to k bytes.2 . i. the 239 − k encoded zero bytes are discarded. Therefore. it has to be taken into account that the number of data bytes before encoding.2 . k data bytes 239k zeros k data bytes 239k zeros k data bytes k+2t 16 parity Figure 2. where λ is the primitive element of the Galois ﬁeld over which the input message is deﬁned.
determines the number of columns.2 . k. the data bits are further encoded by a binary convolutional encoder. Reshape 1 Zero padding Reshape 2 RS encoder Reshape 3 Select rows Reshape 4 Figure 2.2 Convolutional encoder After the RS encoding process. t. denoted X and Y. as speciﬁed in Equation 2. TRANSMITTER 19 k. 2.2 . To end. "Reshape 4" rearranges the matrix data in a column vector.2 . the zero preﬁx is discarded. which has a native rate of 1/2 and a constraint length of 7. (2.3. "Reshape 1" arranges the input data of the RS encoder in a matrix form.5) The RS encoder block of Simulink only works with vector structures. ready for the convolutional coding. n. where the corresponding number of rows is calculated from the length of the blocks before encoding.3) A block diagram of the ReedSolomon encoder implemented in Matlab Simulink is depicted in Figure 2. The "Select rows"block deals with selecting the correct amount of bytes after the encoding process.CHAPTER 2. and the number of calculated ReedSolomon blocks.2 . Thus. for Y.2 . as previously explained. 8k (2. the number of blocks used in the ReedSolomon encoder is calculated as NRS = Spacket . and data is punctured by taking only the ﬁrst 2t bytes of the total parity bytes. Zero padding along columns at the beginning is performed to achieve a length of 239 bytes for each block. and they change for every modulation scheme. The generator polynomials used to derive its two output code bits. "Reshape 2" shapes out the matrix structure into a vector6 . the block "Reshape 3" distributes the output vector of the encoder in a matrix with size 255 × NRS . Thus. are the ones speciﬁed in Table 2.2.3.2 . the number of overall bytes after encoding. .1.3: Block diagram of the ReedSolomon encoder of WiMAX.2 .4) (2. Once data has passed through the encoder. and the number of data bytes that can be corrected. are speciﬁed in the following expressions: G1 = 171OCT G2 = 133OCT 6 for X.
4: Convolutional encoder of binary rate 1/2. thus forming a highrate code.3 Puncturing process Puncturing is the process of systematically deleting bits from the output stream of a lowrate encoder in order to reduce the amount of data to be transmitted.2 . where L denotes the constraint length. and no connection is represented by a "zero". rate 3/4.2: Puncture vectors for diﬀerent convolutional coding rates.2 . Rate 1/2 2/3 3/4 5/6 Puncture vector [1] [1 1 1 0] [1 1 0 1 1 0] [1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0] Table 2. TRANSMITTER 20 A convolutional encoder accepts messages of length k0 bits and generates codewords of n0 bits.2 . A connection line from the shift register feeding into the adder means a "one" in the octal representation of the polynomials.2. . where a "zero" means a discarded bit. This block was used for the implementation. The process of puncturing is used to create the variable coding rates needed to provide various error protection levels to the users of the system.2 . 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 X = 171OCT T T T T T T Y = 133OCT 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 Figure 2.4. Generally. it is made up of a shift register of L segments. rate 2/3. and rate 5/6. 2. The diﬀerent rates that can be used are rate 1/2.2. The puncturing vectors for these rates are given in Table 2. The binary convolutional encoder that implements the described code is shown in Figure 2.CHAPTER 2. The convolutional coding and puncturing is directly supported by Simulink in a single block. The bits are deleted according to a perforation matrix.
• Ntxdata is the total number of transmitted data symbols.2 . WiMAX uses an interleaver that combines data using 12 interleaving levels. TRANSMITTER 21 2. The eﬀect of this process can be understood as a spreading of the bits of the diﬀerent symbols. s Ntcb (2. such that the data enters the buﬀer in rows. which specify the number of interleaving levels. First.6) where: • Ntcb is the total number of coded bits. being the same as speciﬁed with the modulation alphabet. Ntcb = Ncpc Ntxdata • Ncpc is the number of coded bits per subcarrier. data passes through a matrix interleaver which performs block interleaving by ﬁlling a matrix with the input symbols row by row. This vector is deﬁned as Ntcb −1 I= i=0 s i iNrows + mod i + Ntcb − . Ma . and Ntxdata = Ndata NOFDM • s= Ncpc 2 . which are more easily correctable. and then sending this matrix content column by column. which are combined to get new symbols. It rearranges the elements of its input according to an index vector. Ncolumns = Ntcb . The interleaver of the simulator has been implemented in two steps. with the same size but with rearranged bits. Interleaving is normally implemented by using a twodimensional array buﬀer. it is read out in columns. The parameters used for this block are the number of rows and columns that compose the matrix: Nrows = 12. The result is that a burst of errors in the channel after interleaving becomes in few scarcely spaced single symbol errors.4 Interleaver Data interleaving is generally used to scatter error bursts and thus.s + 1 . reduce the error concentration to be corrected with the purpose of increasing the eﬃciency of FEC by spreading burst errors introduced by the transmission channel over a longer time. . Nrows The second step consists of a block interleaver.2. and then.CHAPTER 2.
it enters the modulation block. the 64QAM modulation. The support of the last one. and 64QAM modulations are supported by the system.3 . A010000 011000 the Matlab mﬁle. 4QAM. the constellations described above are normalized by multiplying all of its points by an appropriate factor Cm . Gray coding is a method for this allocation so that adjacent points in the constellation only diﬀer by a single bit.1.3 Modulation mapper Once the signal has been coded.3 . 1101 1 0  1001 3j  0001 0101 1100 3 1000 j1 0000 1 0100 3    10 j1 00 1 . The constellation maps for 2PAM. All wireless communication systems use a modulation scheme to map coded bits to a form that can be eﬀectively transmitted over the communication channel.001100 000100 010100 011100  . the bits are mapped to a subcarrier amplitude and phase.2. 111010 110010 100010 101010 001010 000010 010010 011010 5Values for this factor Cm are given in Table 2.3 . 111011 110011 100011 101011 7 001011 000011 010011  011011 To achieve equal average symbol power.and is deﬁned in Table 2. coordinate points in the constellation map 111001 7 110001 5 100001 3 101001 1 1 001001 1 000001 3 010001 5 011001 7        111101 110101 100101 1011011. which is represented by a complex inphase and quadraturephase (IQ) vector. The modulation mapping is built in the simulator by a Simulink block implemented as a 110000 100000 101000symbol alphabet. is optional for licenseexempt bands.CHAPTER 2. 2PAM. The IQ plot for a modulation scheme shows the transmitted vector for all data word combinations. 1110 1010 j  0010 0110   1111 1011 11 j  01 3j  0011 0111 Figure 2. represents 111000 001000 000000 3 . and 16QAM modulations are shown in Figure 2. 16QAM. TRANSMITTER 22 2.1. 4QAM and 16QAM constellation maps.3 . The s . Thus. This coding helps to minimize the overall bit error rate as it reduces the chance of multiple bit errors ocurring from a single symbol error.001101 000101 010101 011101 111100 110100 100100 1011003.1: 2PAM. 4QAM.
moreover. These pilots are obtained by a pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS) generator that is based on the polynomial x11 + x9 + 1.1: Normalization factors. A + 3.4 Pilot symbols Pilot symbols can be used to perform a frequency oﬀset compensation at the receiver. A + 5. 7j − j. 2PAM modulated. −3j. Modulation scheme 2PAM 4QAM 16QAM 64QAM Symbol alphabet As = (1. Furthermore. . where wk is the sequence produced by the PRBS generator. A − 1. −j. Pilot symbols allocate speciﬁc subcarriers in all OFDM data symbols. they can be used for channel estimation in fast timevarying channels. −5j. A − 3) A = (j. 5j.3 . A − 5. 3j. A + 3. and wk denotes the binary inversion.3 . p63 = p13 = p13 = p38 = 1 − 2wk . A − 1. −1 + j. −7j) As = (A + 1. They are. 3j. TRANSMITTER Modulation scheme 2PAM 4QAM 16QAM 64QAM Normalization constant for unit average power Cm = 1 √ Cm = 1/ 2 √ Cm = 1/√10 Cm = 1/ 42 23 Table 2. −1) As = (1 + j. −3j) As = (A + 1.CHAPTER 2. −1 − j) A = (j. A − 7) Table 2. an adaptive modulation and coding mechanism is supported in the downlink with the purpose of allowing the number of transmitted bits per symbol to be varied depending on the channel conditions. A − 3. This kind of mapping is given by the operations 1 − 2wk and 1 − 2wk . Additionally.2: Modulation alphabet for the constellation map. A + 7. A more detailed explanation of adaptive modulation as well as a description of how it is implemented in the simulator is given in Chapter 6. 2. 1 − j. The indices represent the subcarrier numbers where the pilots are going to be inserted: p88 = p38 = p63 = p88 = 1 − 2wk . as recent results showed [11].
TRANSMITTER 24 The initialization sequences for the PRBS generator vary depending on the direction of transmission.CHAPTER 2. PSHORT . i. Although three types of training sequences are speciﬁed. The frequency domain sequence for this ﬁrst DL preamble is deﬁned in Equation 2. the downlink or the uplink.1 and Equation 2. necessary in the receiver for channel estimation.5 . As it occurs with the ﬁrst OFDM symbol of the preamble. the long training sequence utilizes only even subcarriers. The second OFDM symbol uses a long training sequence. It is a sequence which uses only the subcarriers of PALL whose indices are a multiple of 4. √ √ 2 2conj(PALL (k)) 0 √ PEVEN (k) = 2conj(PALL (k)) 0 k mod 4 = 0 k mod 4 = 0 k mod 2 = 0 k mod 2 = 0 PSHORT (k) = (2. 7 8 DownLink UpLink . it is called PEVEN and its time domain waveform consists of two repetitions of a 128sample fragment. A sequence of all "ones" is used in the downlink while a sequence of alternated "ones" and "zeros". there is an additional factor of 2 in PSHORT which has the aim of equating the rootmeansquare (RMS) power with the power of the data symbols. used for synchronization. This sequence.5 Training sequences In WiMAX systems. are composed using training sequences.2 deﬁnes the frequency domain sequence for this long training.5 . being the ﬁrst bit equal to "one". they are derived from the same sequence in the frequency domain. Equation 2.e.5 . Therefore.5 . 2. In this case. Furthermore. the ﬁrst preamble as well as the initial ranging preamble consists of two consecutive OFDM symbols. a factor of 2 representing √ a boost of 3 dB appears. preambles. in the time domain it is composed of four repetitions of a 64sample fragment.5 . For DL transmissions. the long training sequence is constructed also using a subset of the subcarriers of PALL .2) √ In both. is used in the uplink. The ﬁrst symbol is a short training sequence.2.5 .1.1) (2. ﬁlling the other subcarriers with "zeros". is called PALL . Equation 2. Thus. both in DL7 and in UL8 . that has a length of 201 subcarriers. A deeper deﬁnition of it can be found in [4].
2. 9 Frame Control Header .1: Long preamble structure. a subset of odd subcarriers.e. like PEVEN . the ﬁrst antenna transmits a preamble using PEVEN and the preamble transmitted from the second antenna is set according to the sequence PODD .5 .1. which contains T Tb decoded information for the gsubscriber station. pilot and null. Again. In the WiMAX simulator the FCH is ﬁlled with dummy data. The rest of the potential carriers are nulled and set aside for guard bands and removal of the center frequency subcarrier.5 .3) The time domain structure of the described preamble.6 Assembler WiMAX speciﬁcations for the 256point FFT OFDM PHY layer deﬁne three types of subcarriers. PODD (k) = √ 0 2conj(PALL (k)) k mod 2 = 0 k mod 2 = 0 (2. data. in this case. it is assumed that the receiver knows all FCH information perfectly. a preamble has to be transmitted from both transmit antennas simultaneously. i. but using. CP Tg 64 64 Tb 64 64 CP Tg 128 Tb 128 Figure 2.e. 200 of the total 256 subcarriers are used for data and pilot subcarriers. the long preamble is followed by the FCH9 . The remaining 192 active carriers take up the data subcarriers. as shown in Figure 2. i. User data follows the FCH and contains several OFDM symbols of payload data. CP 128 128 Furthermore. is shown in the next ﬁgure. referred to as the long preamble.6 . used for DL transmissions. TRANSMITTER 25 Another training sequence shall be used when transmitting spacetime coded (STC) downlink bursts.CHAPTER 2. information about the modulation type and the FEC code length for each burst proﬁle as well as the DL and UL maps. Thus. it is derived from the sequence PALL . eight of which are pilots permanently spaced throughout the OFDM spectrum. Because the STC scheme achieves diversity by transmitting with two antennas.
. Frequency indices are deﬁned in the standard from index 127 to index 128. and then appending the training symbols at the beginning of each burst in an horizontal way. 63.2. With this purpose. Therefore.6 . the assembler block is inserted in the simulator. the second step does it in the time domain. Matlab allows only positive indices. TRANSMITTER Data subcarriers DC subcarrier Pilot subcarriers 26 Guard band Channel Guard band Figure 2. However. 38. a shift on these index values is needed in the simulator. and 189. 88. It is shown that while the ﬁrst step performs a concatenation in the frequency domain.2: OFDM burst structure obtained after assembling.1: OFDM frequency description. 164.6 . 114. a process to rearrange these carriers is needed. pilot subcarriers are inserted in frequency oﬀset indices of 13.6 . It performs this operation in two steps by ﬁrst inserting the pilot tones and the zero DC subcarrier between data with a process of vertical concatenation. 139.CHAPTER 2. t Pilots Zero DC f Trainings OFDM data symbols Figure 2. In order to construct an OFDM symbol. and so. The process of assembling the total number of 201 subcarriers is explained next. as shown in Figure 2.
the training symbols are appended at the beginning of each burst. After this ﬁrst concatenation.6. only 201 of the total 256 subcarriers are used.2: Structure after appending the guard bands. the one with index 101.7 The guard bands The OFDM physical layer of the IEEE 802.7 . act as guard bands with the purpose to enable the naturally decay of the signal. situated in the centered subcarrier. pilots and zero DC subcarriers.1: Structure composed with data. 2. The remaining 55 carriers.1 and Figure 2. Figure 2. The total amount of subcarriers to be used is determined by the number of points needed to perform the IFFT. After the assembling process described in Section 2.162004 standard speciﬁes that transmission must be performed using 256 frequency subcarriers.2 show the structure of the subcarriers before and after appending the guard bands.7 . These guard bands are used to decrease emissions in adjacent frequency channels. TRANSMITTER 27 The same action occurs with the zero DC.CHAPTER 2. data DC 1 101 201 Figure 2. which is.7 . data DC guards 1 101 201 202 256 Figure 2.7 . that are zero subcarriers appended at the end of the cited structure. in this case. .
the FFT (or IFFT) should be of length 2r (where r is an integer number) to facilitate the realization of the algorithm. is avoided. the subcarriers are rearranged. the IFFT represents also a rapid way for modulating these subcarriers in parallel. the FFT length is given by NFFT = 2 log2 (Ndata ) . This guard interval. Before doing the IFFT operation in the simulator. data DC guards 1 2 101 102 156 157 256 Figure 2.9 . Besides ensuring the orthogonality of the OFDM subcarriers. TRANSMITTER 28 2. (2. is known as the cyclic preﬁx (CP).CHAPTER 2. As seen in the following ﬁgure.8 . the use of multiple modulators and demodulators.1 shows the subcarrier structure that enters the IFFT block after performing the cited rearrangement.8 Inverse Fast Fourier Transform algorithm The IFFT is used to produce a time domain signal. Figure 2. as the symbols obtained after modulation can be considered the amplitudes of a certain range of sinusoids.8 .1: Rearrangement performed before realizing the IFFT operation. and thus. which spend a lot of time and resources to perform this operation.9 The cyclic preﬁx The robustness of any OFDM transmission against multipath delay spread is achieved by having a long symbol period with the purpose of minimizing the intersymbol interference.8 . This means that each of the discrete samples before applying the IFFT algorithm corresponds to an individual subcarrier. . For this reason. Furthermore.1) 2. Figure 2. zero subcarriers are kept in the center of the structure. that is actually a copy of the last portion of the data symbol. creating a cyclically extended guard interval where each OFDM symbol is preceded by a periodic extension of the signal itself.1 depicts one way to perform the cited long symbol period.
TRANSMITTER 29 CP CP Tg Tb Tsym Figure 2. (2. it has to be taken into account that the CP must be longer than the dispersion of the channel.CHAPTER 2. The parameter G deﬁnes the ratio of the CP length to the useful symbol time. When eliminating ISI10 .9 . Copying the end of a symbol and appending it to the start results in a longer symbol time. • Tb is the useful symbol time.1: OFDM symbol with the cyclic preﬁx. G11 is usually less than 1/4: Tg G= .2) Tb (2. the total length of the symbol is Tsym = Tb + Tg . where: • Tsym is the OFDM symbol time.9 . For these reasons.1) 10 11 InterSymbol Interference Values for this parameter are speciﬁed in Appendix C.9 . Moreover. and • Tg represents the CP time. it should be as small as possible since it costs energy to the transmitter. Thus. .
analysis. it is very important to use accurate and realistic channel models in the simulation to enable realistic and reliable results. are utilized as interpolation ﬁlters in the simulator. As the simulation results depend strongly on the radio channel.1 Filters Data transmission over band limited channels requires a technique of pulse shaping at the transmitter. This chapter deals with the modeling. and simulation of the channel. 3.Chapter 3 Channel When communicating over a wireless radio channel the received signal cannot be simply modeled as a copy of the transmitted signal corrupted by additive Gaussian noise. usually used for bandlimiting the transmitted signal. In this way. In addition. Furthermore. this implies the fundamental shapes of the 30 . the cyclic preﬁx time has to be chosen larger than the maximum delay spread of the channel. shortterm ﬂuctuations caused by signal scattering of objects in the propagation environment lead to a phenomenon known as multipath propagation. Instead. The time dispersion in a multipath environment causes the signal to undergo either ﬂat or frequencyselective fading. Since the pulse shaping ﬁlter does not cause intersymbol interference (ISI). appears. while caused by the timevarying characteristics of the propagation environment. rootraised cosine (RRC) ﬁlters. signal fading. the wellknown IMETRA channel model is introduced. Thus. In order to avoid ISI in OFDM systems. the time dispersion is manifested by the spreading in time of the modulated symbols leading to intersymbol interference (ISI). It provides a description of the mentioned RRC ﬁlters as well as a brief explanation about the fading characteristics.
1 . and a total attenuation at high frequencies.1 .3) Nyquist’s ﬁrst criterion establishes the conditions the transmission pulse p(t) must accomplish to avoid ISI. which satisﬁes Nyquist’s ﬁrst criterion1 . also known as rootraised cosine (RRC) ﬁlters. CHANNEL 31 pulses to be such that they do not interfere each other. However. and zero for the another symbols: p(iTs − kTs ) = 1 0 i=k i=k 1 .CHAPTER 3. (3.1 . The RRC frequency response is speciﬁed in Equation 3. It speciﬁes p(t) to be one for the sampling interval of the desired symbol. therefore setting up a matched ﬁlter and maximizing the SNR while at the same time minimizing ISI [12]. HT (f ) = HR (f ) = Hrrc (f ). The RRC ﬁlter is generally used in series pairs so that the total ﬁltering eﬀect is that of a raised cosine ﬁlter. The ideal rootraised cosine ﬁlter frequency response is simply the square root of the frequency response of a raised cosine ﬁlter. the receiver sees a signal that has been ﬁltered by a raised cosine ﬁlter overall: HT (f )HR (f ) = Hrc (f ).3. and it consists of a unity gain at low frequencies. A widely used ﬁlter for this purpose is the well known raised cosine ﬁlter. in practical applications the overall magnitude response of the raised cosine spectrum is equally split between the transmitter and the receiver.1 . thus obtaining squareroot raised cosine ﬁlters. A criteria that ensures noninterference speciﬁes the shape of the pulses to be such that its amplitude decays rapidly outside the pulse interval. then the receive one is forced to ﬁlter an input pulse with a shape that is identical to its own impulse response. f  ≤ fN (1 − α) 1 1−α Hrrc (f ) = cos πTsym f  − 2Tsym fN (1 − α) ≤ f  ≤ fN (1 + α) 2α 0 f  > fN (1 + α) (3. The advantage of such subsystems is that if the transmit side ﬁlter is stimulated by an impulse. while Hrc(f) is used for deﬁning the raised cosine ﬁlter.1) (3. Since the frequency response of the transmit and receive ﬁlters is multiplied at the receiver.2) Hrrc (f ) deﬁnes the rootraised cosine ﬁlter frequency response. the square root of a raised cosine function in the middle.
CHANNEL fN is the Nyquist frequency deﬁned as fN = 1 Rsym = . which determines the sharpness of the frequency response and can take values comprised between 0 and 1.2 0.1 .5 (a) Impulse response hrrc (t).2 0 0.5 3 4 5 Time 6 7 8 0. The width of the central frequencies is deﬁned by the rolloﬀ factor. Therefore. Speciﬁcally.6 h(t) 0. The more the number of frequency samples. α. Figure 3.1 .2 1 0. . and Rsym is the symbol rate. That means that if more ﬁlter taps are used. the more eﬃcient is the scheme since it gives the narrowest bandwidth.5 1 1.1 shows that when α = 0 the frequency response has a form of a rectangle oﬀering the narrowest bandwidth but the slowest rate of decay in the time domain. the more will the actual response match the desired response.4 2 0 0 0. it can be deduced that the smaller the rolloﬀ factor.1: Spectral shape and inverse Fourier transform of the RRC pulse. where the frequency response of the ﬁlter is sampled at constant intervals and an inverse fourier transform (IFFT) is applied to the frequency samples to obtain the ﬁlter coeﬃcients. 1.5 1 1. and therefore. However. when α = 1 the frequency response is completely round but the impulse response presents the added beneﬁt of rapidly decaying time domain tails. The most commonly used design methodology for this kind of ﬁlters is the frequency sampling design.5 2 2.CHAPTER 3. α governs the bandwidth occupied by the pulse and the rate at which the tails of the pulse decay. (b) Frequency response Hrrc (f ).4 1. a more accurate response is obtained. better rejection is given.8 0.4 0. 2Tsym 2 32 where Tsym is the modulation symbol duration. Figure 3.5 3 3.
Physical factors inﬂuencing the characteristics of the fading experienced by the transmitter are multipath propagation. where: • fM = fc v/c is the maximum Doppler shift. the received signal is subject to a constant frequency shift. a single received signal is composed of a number of scattered waves. multipath propagation occurs causing signal fading. CHANNEL 33 3. Therefore.2. (3. The transmitted signal arrives at the receiver via multiple propagation paths.1). • fc is the carrier frequency. The presence of reﬂecting objects and scatterers in the wireless channel causes a constant change in the propagation environment.1 Fading channel models Description of the fading channel In a realistic wireless radio environment. and the relative motion between the transmitter and the receiver. the channel is said to be time dispersive. This changing environment alters the signal energy in amplitude.2 3. and • ϕ is the arrival angle of the received signal component. fd = fM cos ϕ. • v is the vehicle speed. as it occurs in the time domain.CHAPTER 3. The diﬀerence between the largest and the smallest among these delays deﬁnes the maximum delay spread. and as a result.1) . called the Doppler shift (see Equation 3.2 . when the receiver and the transmitter are in relative motion. These multipath waves are combined at the receiver to give a resultant signal that can widely vary in amplitude and phase. causing frequency dispersion. Furthermore. a timevarying Doppler shift is induced on each multipath component if the reﬂecting objects and scatterers in the propagation channel are in motion. caused by the reﬂection and diﬀraction of the original transmitted signal by objects in the surrounding geographical area. • c is the speed of light.2 . mobility of the reﬂecting objects and scatterers. each of which has an associated time delay. phase. Because the received signal is spread in time due to the multipath scatterers at diﬀerent delays. the Doppler spread is deﬁned as the diﬀerence between the largest and the smallest among these frequency shifts. On the other hand. and time.
τ ).2 .2 . the passband output signal is given by r(t) = s(t) ⊗ h(t. the response of the channel to any signal transmitted through it will change with time. Such linear ﬁlters are described by a timevarying impulse response. whereas τ represents the channel multipath delay for a ﬁxed value of t. physical channels with timevarying transmission characteristics may be characterized as timevarying linear ﬁlters.3) where hb (t.4. τ ) = 2πfc τi (t) + θi (t. τ ) and τi (t. Hence. τ ) is the baseband equivalent impulse response of the channel. as the one depicted in Figure 3. The instantaneous phase shift encountered by the ith multipath component due to its delay is represented by the factor 2πfc τi (t).1. whereas any other phase alteration experienced by this multipath component is incorporated in θi (t. the variable t speciﬁes the time dependance in the variations of the impulse response due to motion. τ )δ(τ − τi (t)) exp(j(2πfc τi (t) + θi (t. τ ) exp(j2πfc t)}. h(t. (3. To simplify Equation 3.2 . which represents the response of the channel at time t due to an impulse applied at time t − τ . (3. When L discrete multipath components exist in the multipath fading channel. τ ) = Re{hb (t. and ignoring the eﬀects of AWGN.4) αi (t. The passband channel impulse response can also be written as h(t. (3. Hence.CHAPTER 3. τ ) are the delay dependent instantaneous amplitude and the time delay associated with the ith multipath component. Tapped delay line channel model A general model for a timevariant multipath channel consists of a tapped delay line with uniformly spaced taps. τ ) = i=1 αi (t. τ ))).2) where ⊗ represents the continuoustime convolution. CHANNEL 34 As a result of such time variations. Thus. where W is the bandwidth of the signal that is being transmitted through the channel. the phase delays are lumped together and represented by φi (t. this baseband channel impulse response is written as L hb (t. τ ). respectively. and fc is the carrier frequency of the passband input signal.2 . τ ). Assuming that the passband input signal to a multipath fading channel is s(t). τ ). The spacing between adjacent taps is K/(M W ). K/(M W ) .2 .
It is the frequency separation at which two .2 . Moreover. where an interpolation factor of M/K is being used. the tap coeﬃcients. Tm = L/W . usually called the multipath spread.CHAPTER 3. the delay spread is a measure of the spread in time over which the multipath signals arrive. It is a measure of the time dispersion of a channel. Depending on their values. One of the most widely used measurement for characterizing the delay spread of a multipath channel is the rms delay spread. Furthermore. The length of the delay line corresponds to the amount of time dispersion in the multipath channel. and is very important in determining how fast the symbol rate can be in digital communications. Tm Input signal K/(MW) K/(MW) K/(MW) c1(t) X c2(t) X cL1(t) X cL(t) X + + Aditive noise Channel output Figure 3. the signal transmitted through the channel will undergo ﬂat or frequencyselective fading. two manifestations of the channel time variations are the delay spread and the Doppler spread. Bcoh .1: Model for a timevariant multipath channel based on a tapped delay line. are usually modeled as complexvalued Gaussian random processes which are mutually uncorrelated. where L represents the maximum number of possible multipath signal components. στ . the inverse of the delay spread deﬁnes the coherence bandwidth. On one hand. Delay spread and Doppler spread As previously explained. CHANNEL 35 deﬁnes the time resolution of the channel model implementation. denoted as ci (t) = αi (t) exp(jφi (t)).
On the other hand. the phase. A channel model where there are only non lineofsight communications is characterized by a Rayleigh distribution. The pdf of the Ricean fading amplitude is given by fRice (a) = a σ2 +ρ exp(− a 2σ2 )I0 0 2 2 aρ σ2 if if a≥0 a < 0. which has zeromean Gaussian components. The coherence time. is the time domain dual of Doppler spread and is used to characterize the timevarying nature of the frequency dispersiveness of the channel in the time domain. (3. It is statistically characterized by a fading amplitude.5) On the other hand.CHAPTER 3. the amplitude is characterized statistically by the Rice probability distribution. On the contrary.e. α(t). Tcoh . As already mentioned. (3. Inversely proportional to one another are the Doppler spread and the coherence time.2 . is uniformly distributed over the interval (0. The fading amplitude is described by the probability density function (pdf): fRay (a) = a σ2 a exp(− 2σ2 ) 0 2 if if a≥0 a < 0. modeled with a Rayleigh probability distribution. when the components of α(t) are Gaussian with nonzero mean values and the phase is also nonzero mean. 2π). It is a statistical measure of the time duration over which the channel impulse response is essentially invariant quantifying the similarity of the channel response at diﬀerent times [13]. the channel coeﬃcients are modeled by a Ricean distribution. representing a major part of the channel energy. is a measure of the spectral broadening caused by the time rate of change of the multipath components due to the relative motion between transmitter and receiver. the channel may be classiﬁed either as a fast or a slow fading channel. CHANNEL 36 frequency components of the signal undergo independent attenuations and a measure of the range of frequencies over which the multipath fading channel frequency response can be considered to be ﬂat or not.2 . In this case.6) . a Rayleigh distribution is normally used to model NLoS communications. In 802. φ(t). i. leading to quasistatic scenarios. the Doppler spread. Rayleigh and Ricean fading models Wireless channels can be characterized with tap coeﬃcients that are complexvalued Gaussian random variables. Bd . Depending on how rapidly the multipath components change. the coherence time of the channel is assumed to be longer than the frame duration.162004. the channel presents multipath propagation with some dominating paths. if dominating paths are present. Furthermore.
7) K = 2. However. a signal undergoes ﬂat fading if W < Bcoh and Tsym > στ .2.9) The region of support of a function f (x) is deﬁned as the set χ = xf (x) = 0.2 .2 . Therefore. the spectral characteristics of the transmitted signal are preserved when it propagates through the channel. The size of such region is deﬁned to be maxx∈χ (x) − minx∈χ (x). . CHANNEL 37 where the parameter ρ2 represents the power of the received nonfading signal component. then the region of support2 of the transmitted signal is larger than the coherence interval. when the channel has a constant gain and linear phase response over a bandwidth that is greater than the bandwidth of the transmitted signal. 3. To summarize. ﬂat fading channels are also known as amplitude varying channels. K is prone to −∞ dB. If the channel is selective. This relationship existing between the coherence of the channel and the properties of the signal is captured by the notion of selectivity. Furthermore. For this kind of fading. they are sometimes referred to as narrowband channels since the bandwidth of the applied signal is narrow as compared with the fading bandwidth. the channel is not ﬂat with respect to the signal in that domain. the properties of that signal play a role in determining whether the eﬀects caused by the channel on it are invariant in any given domain. 2σ If K approaches zero. 2 (3. The Ricean distribution is usually expressed with the Kfactor deﬁned as the ratio of the power of the deterministic signal to the variance of the multipath component: ρ2 (3. the Rice distribution becomes a Rayleigh distribution.8) (3. corresponding to a LoS scenario. if K approaches inﬁnity. For this reason.CHAPTER 3. and I0 is the modiﬁed Bessel function of ﬁrst kind and order zero. and only the received signal power ﬂuctuates due to the multipath eﬀects. when ρ has values near to 0. Thus. then the Rice distribution degenerates in a Rayleigh distribution.2 . the received signal undergoes ﬂat fading. and since the dominant path decreases in amplitude. one path will contain the whole channel energy.2 Flat fading When considering the transmission of a speciﬁc signal. Moreover.
Under such conditions the channel impulse response has a multipath delay spread that exceeds the symbol period of the transmitted symbol. and hence. . the signal is sent through the channel itself. the received signal is distorted. The maximum frequency diﬀerence for which a high correlation level between the signals are kept is known as the coherence bandwidth of the channel. some noise is added. CHANNEL 38 3. When this occurs. the eﬀects of frequencyselective channel conditions can be decreased.CHAPTER 3. that is the channel simulator sampling frequency.3 Frequencyselective fading The frequencyselective behaviour of the wireless propagation channel can be obtained easily from the correlation between two signals (which have diﬀerent frequencies) in the receiver.11) However. a timevariant channel. and a timevariant block fading channel. Since the signal is split into many narrowband subchannels. a signal undergoes frequencyselective fading if W > Bcoh and Tsym < στ . it is ﬁltered and downsampled. Frequencyselective fading is due to time dispersion of the transmitted symbols within the channel. (3. This channel model distinguishes three kinds of channels: a block fading channel.2. At the receiver. thus inducing to intersymbol interference (ISI). The resulting signal is resampled to 100 MHz. Finally.10) 3. (3. That means that for frequencyselective fading the spectrum of the transmitted signal has a bandwidth which is greater than the coherence bandwidth of the channel. and the signal is decimated from the channel simulator sampling frequency.2 . characterized by the channel model.4 Channel model implementation The goal of this section is to describe the diﬀerent steps that have been performed to implement the channel in our simulator. The existence of diﬀerent delay spread for the diﬀerent propagation paths cause the statistical properties of two carriers to be independent if they are suﬃciently frequency spaced. provided that the respective conditions for ﬂat fading channels are accomplished.2. To summarize. when communicating with OFDM techniques.2 . the received signal includes multiple versions of the transmitted waveform that are attenuated and delayed in time. The signal is ﬁrstly oversampled and ﬁltered using an RRC interpolation ﬁlter at the transmitter. After resampling. the channel can be considered as constant (ﬂat) over each OFDM subchannel.
τ ). that has been vertically polarized. Since such a ﬁltering operation is of very high complexity. fd . and a frequency shift appears in the received signal. channel N 1 OFDM frame N OFDM frames Figure 3. .2 . The timevariant ﬁltering is implemented in the function "tvﬁlter ". the "timevariant block fading" model was implemented.2 .2: Block fading channel model. The assumptions of this model are [16]: • The transmitter is ﬁxed and employs an omnidirectional antenna. the function "jakes" is used.2. do not change during the transmission of one OFDM frame. It utilizes a socalled sum of sinusoids to perform this operation. which allows for fast BER simulations but not for simulations incorporating adaptive modulation and coding (AMC). the variation in time of the wireless channel is caused by user mobility and multipath propagation. as it is shown in Figure 3. Timevariant channel As previously explained. Here.. To generate the timevarying characteristic of the fading channel [15]. h(t. which convolutes every sample of the transmitted signal with the instantaneous impulse response.. CHANNEL Block fading channel 39 The block fading channel [14] is used for simulating slowlyvarying fading channels. when users are in relative motion. hi . the channel realizations for consecutive frames are independent.CHAPTER 3. That means that the fading varies slowly in time and the channel coeﬃcient. channel 1 channel 2 . The impulse response of timevarying channels is characterized as a timevariant linear ﬁlter. • The ﬁeld incident on the receiver consists of N azimuthal plane waves.
1. Therefore. 1. where n = 0. can be expressed as in Equation 3. 3. . ϕn . (3. diﬀerent spectrum shapes are obtained depending on the values the parameters φnk and ϕnk take. a ﬂat spectrum.. For this situation. Hence.. and a Clarke’s spectrum are deﬁned.13) where Cnk . 2. that denotes the nth arrival angle in the kth fader.2 .2 .2 . and φnk represent the amplitude.. The parameter Cnk can be reduced to a constant value by assuming a uniform antenna gain pattern and uniformly distributed incident power [15]: 1 C=√ . .2 . 2. 1. Note that ϕnk . the kth fading waveform. The model assumes that N equalstrength rays arrive at a moving receiver with uniformly distributed arrival angles. M − 1. . ωnk . the exponential describing the fading waveform follows the next expression: Xt = exp(j(2πfd t + φnk )). (3. 2. N − 1. such that ray n experiences a Doppler shift given by ωn = ωM cos(ϕn ).. The phase angles are assumed to be uniformly distributed. k = 0. and uniformly random phase of the nth complex sinusoid in the kth fader.. depends on both. a Jake’s spectrum..Flat spectrum The parameter ϕnk takes the values ±π/2 thus making null the operation cos ϕnk . CHANNEL 40 • Each of the N azimuthal plane waves has an arbitrary carrier phase and an arbitrary angle of arrival.14) N Furthermore. . (3.. M − 1.. 3. ωnk = ωM cos ϕnk .12) As a result. implying the absence of a LoS path.2 . • The N azimuthal plane waves have equal average amplitudes.CHAPTER 3. the fading waveform and the sinusoid. and k = 0.15) .. each of which is composed of N sinusoids. (3.13: N −1 Tk (t) = n=0 Cnk exp j(ωnk t + φnk ). frequency. from a system that has M independent fading waveforms. Tk (t).
2 .probability density funtions (pdf) of these processes are affected by two independent factors: Clarke’s spectrum For of a sum of statistically independenthowever. of the doppler effect.1: Spectrum shapes for timevariant channels. the doppler effect plays a crucial role.1 doppler frequency depends on the angle of incident α of the signal. . i. into account permanently changing echopaths proves to be too costly.Streuobjekte Sender CHAPTER 3. they are described by a random process. The power within that segment results of Xt = lines comprised by the segment.4.max = 50Hz 1 Cf.2 . The . if no line of sight is available (”worst case”).3 or [OL02] section 6.e. Taking pdf this kind of spectrum.16) sight exists the simulation of mobilechannels demands a d cos ϕnk )). is zero. that effects the position of the spectral lines . The values of the parameters for the three kinds of spectrum already deﬁned are summarized in Table 3. if a line of Xt = exp(j(2πf Ricean process and (3.4: Szenario of a frequencyselective. respectively.3: Jake’s Doppler spectrum. Figure 3.5: Jakesspectrum. According to its mean the magnitude of a complexvalued Gaussian process is Ricean or Rayleigh distributed. pdf’s. the formula for the fading waveform isThe central limit theorem 1 states that a sufﬁcient number of independent random processes are approximating a Gaussian or normalpdf. 3 Simulation results have been performed using this spectrum. Furthermore. On account (3. CHANNEL v bewegter Empfänger feststehende Streuobjekte 41 Figure 2. Therefore.the spectral distribution of the power corresponds to the power density spectrum. maximum doppler frequency f D.5) that fD = f0 cos α c0 3 have been previously described : Thinking of the receiving signal as a superposition of many discrete frequencies of identical amplitude the pdf describes the amount of spectral lines in a frequency segment ∆f .2 .1. 2 The [Kam96] section A3. hence. a Rayleigh process. theisphase of the convolution of all φnk . the Jakes spectrum takes vinto account all the parameters(2.17) adding all powers of those spectralexp(j(2πfd t cos ϕnk + φnk )). that such a distribution is given by the socalled Jakes distribution. 10 1 S(f ) in dB PSfrag replacements 10 0 10 1 10 100 80 60 40 20 2 0 20 40 60 80 100 f in Hz Figure 2. random processes identical to the sinusoid. The doppler frequency f D in turn is a random Jake’sdue to the random direction of motion2 of the receiver in regard of the transmitter. Arising from the movement between transmitter and receiver the receiving signal is shifted in frequency domain. Spectrum Flat Clarke Jake ϕnk ±π/2 = ±π/2 = ±π/2 φnk =0 0 =0 Table 3.2 . we are interested in the pdf of that sum. process spectrum Finally.2 . One ﬁnds.e. i. The At the receiving side we encounter the sum of all paths. timevariant fadingchannel The recently mentioned factors are of a random character.
U is a simple uncorrelated ﬂat fading channel. which also have uncorrelated ﬂat fading. The channel ﬁltering operation is the same as in the block fading channel. The scenarios A to F are from IMETRA. B and C. utilized when LoS transmissions are being performed. The IMETRA channel model speciﬁes the channel taps at a sample rate of 100 MHz. 3. a constant channel is assumed during one OFDM frame.3 . the channel changes steadily.e. and specify the power delay proﬁle of each scenario from the relative delays and the average power for each delay. respectively. Model U A B C D (A) E (B) F (C) Environment Uncorrelated ﬂat fading Flat fading Residential Residential/Small oﬃce Typical oﬃce Large oﬃce Wide space (in. Table 3.3 The IMETRA channel model The power delay proﬁles (PDP) specifying the energy distribution for several propagation scenarios are deﬁned according to IMETRA.1 shows all diﬀerent scenarios supported by the channel model. The Rician factor.CHAPTER 3. i. E.1: Channel model scenarios. i. and F have been obtained from Medbo models A. K. it assumes that the 20 MHz bandwidth signal is oversampled by a factor of ﬁve. The steading changing channel allows for AMC simulations when the channel changes slowly compared to the OFDM frame duration. The generated channel impulse responses in successive frames are changing in a timevarying manner. it is assumed that the channel supports a maximum number of eight paths [17]. i. 4 . The values for scenarios D. is only applied for the ﬁrst tap.e.and outdoor) Scattering situation LoS/NLoS LoS/NLoS LoS/NLoS LoS/NLoS NLoS NLoS NLoS K (dB)4 −∞ −∞ 10 3 −∞ −∞ −∞ RMS delay spread (ns) 0 0 15 30 50 100 150 Table 3.e. These scenarios are derived from measurements in typical indoor and outdoor environments. Moreover.3 . and AWGN represents a channel that is only aﬀected by an additive white Gaussian noise. CHANNEL Timevariant block fading channel 42 This kind of channels are a combination of block fading channels and timevariant channels.
the guard bands are removed. a disassembling is performed to obtain pilots. a process to separate all these subcarriers is needed. the receiver basically performs the reverse operation as the transmitter as well as a channel estimation necessary to reveal the unknown channel coeﬃcients.Chapter 4 Receiver As illustrated in Figure 4. the and the received signal is converted to the frequency domain using. compensate the frequencyselective fading of the multipath propagation channel. data.6. the FFT algorithm. Encoder Convolutional CP Encoder is removed Puncture Interleaver 43 .1. The training is used in the channel estimator. As it has been previously explained in Section 2.0 . and some guard bands. and so. in this case. which calculates the channel coeﬃcients. First. Thus. The estimated channel coeﬃcients can be used in the demapper to perform an equalization of the data. This section explains the diﬀerent steps performed by the receiver to reconstruct the transmitted bits. and trainings. pilots. an OFDM symbol is composed by data. a zero DC subcarrier. it enters the decoder block. Once the data has been demapped. and then. Pilot Received data Remove CP FFT256 Remove zeros Disassembler Demapper Decoder Output bits Training Channel estimator Figure 4.1: Receiver of the WiMAX system. Reed Solomon Firstly.0 .
4. 4. The number of points used to perform the FFT is also described in Section 2. This way. the channel estimator is able to estimate CIR for each burst separately Remember that the data symbols.1 Fast Fourier Transform algorithm As explained in Section 2. the frequency structure has to be taken into account.1. This knowledge can be provided by performing channel estimation. that is where they are allocated after the arranging process. a rearrangement of this subcarriers is performed when doing the IFFT operation. Furthermore. to get data. Either the FFT or the IFFT are a linear pair of processes.4 Channel estimator The message sent by the transmitter is modiﬁed when it passes through the channel. originally in frequency domain. detection algorithms at the receiver require knowledge of the channel impulse response (CIR).8. were converted to the time domain in the transmitter using the IFFT. Thus. the guard bands are removed from the center of the OFDM symbol. channel estimation is based on known sequences of bits. which are unique at the transmitter and repeated in every transmission burst. from the received signal. RECEIVER 44 4. which of all possible messages was the transmitted one.3 Disassembler The disassembler deals with the task of separating the signal. 4.CHAPTER 4. On the other hand. the receiver must determine. as some noise is added to the transmitted signal. the IFFT algorithm represents a rapid way for modulating a group of subcarriers in parallel. as shown in Figure 2.8 . the received signal is additionally aﬀected by the multiple reﬂections due to multipath transmission. 1 . either in time or in frequency domain. Thus.2 Removing the guard bands When removing the subcarriers that correspond to the guard bands. and pilots. if the channel is a wireless channel. therefore the FFT is necessary to convert the signal again to the frequency domain1 . Usually. Although zero padding acting as guard band is appended at the end of the subcarrier structure at the transmitter. training. These three diﬀerent symbol streams form the output of the disassembler.8.
3) where the expressions (·)∗ and (·)−1 denote conjugation and inverse operation.25p∗ yk .5 . The received signal on the kth subcarrier yk can be expressed as follows: yk = pk hk + nk . RECEIVER 45 by exploiting the known transmitted bits and the corresponding received samples. If only the long training sequence is used for channel estimation. as expressed in Equation 4. (4.LS = 0. Equation 4. the averaging parameter deﬁnes how many subcarriers are taken into account when performing the cited averaging.4 .1. large averaging factors improve the performance in ﬂat fading channels.4 . A value . and as described in Equation 2.4 .1) where hk is the channel coeﬃcient for the kth subcarrier. (4. pk is the training symbol.3 reduces to the expression hk. channel estimation is based on the technique of leastsquares (LS) and is performed using one training symbol per carrier.4 . The LS channel estimates can be obtained by ﬁnding the minimum squared error. channel estimation is implemented using either the short.4 .4 . This way. This estimator is implemented for all subcarriers where a pilot symbol unequal to zero is transmitted.4 .5) k A better channel estimate can be achieved if averaging in the frequency domain is performed.4) The short training has values diﬀerent than zero only for the indices that are multiple of 4.5 . In the simulator. hk (4.LS = 0. In our case.LS = (p∗ pk )−1 p∗ yk . it has null values for the odd indices.2: hk = arg min yk − pk hk . k (4. Equation 4.2) If white Gaussian noise is assumed. the long or both training symbols.2 results in hk. k k (4. While small averaging factors improve the performance in strongly frequencyselective channels.4 . as deﬁned in Equation 2.CHAPTER 4. The long training used for channel estimation is PEVEN . and nk is a noise symbol. The use of one or another training sequence depends on the values of the averaging parameters. and can be zero or positive. Here. respectively. Equation 4. The two parameters deﬁning the described averaging factors are called LongAveraging and ShortAveraging.3 results in hk.125p∗ yk .2.4 .
or its estimates. This is the logarithm of the ratio between the likelihood that the target produced the speech input and the likelihood that a nontarget produced the input. "zero" or "one". or both training sequences are used for channel estimation. and so. Equation 4. in the form of a loglikelihood ratio. This decision metric can be as simple as hard decision. (4. is needed to implement hard demapping: dE = y − hs. However. being then a soft decision. and this form of output is applicationdependent. or more sophisticated. 4. In contrast.5 Demapper At the receiving end of the communication link the demapper provides the interface between the transmission channel and the functions that compute and deliver estimates of the transmitted data bits to the user. it can also be determined if only the short or long training sequence. 4. the demapper operates on the waveform that is received in each separate transmission symbol interval and produces a number or a set of numbers that represent an estimate of a transmitted binary or Mary symbol.CHAPTER 4.1 gives the formula to calculate the Euclidean distance from which the decision metric is obtained. As it can be seen. Hard demapping methods output a hard decision as a function of the input. the demapping methods are used for decision metrics with the aim of making a decision about which bit. the soft demapping outputs a real number.5 .5 .5. This method involves calculating all cited distances and selecting as the received symbol the point in the constellation map with the smallest Euclidean distance. RECEIVER 46 of "zero" means that no averaging over the corresponding training sequence is performed.1 Hard Demapping Hard demapping is based on the minimum Euclidean distances between the received symbol and all allowed points in the constellation map. this form of output is applicationindependent in the sense that this likelihood ratio output can theoretically be used to make optimal decisions for any given target prior. the knowledge of the channel coeﬃcients. the corresponding training symbol is not used while performing the channel estimation. was transmitted.1) . Furthermore. In this way. Thus.
the socalled maxlogMAP was implemented. Thus.4) Since the calculation of Equation 4. (4. RECEIVER 47 dE is the Euclidean distance.5 . is deﬁned as follows: p(ys) = √ 1 hs − y2 1 exp − 2 2 σv 2πσv . The method gives probabilities of well receiving a bit or not.CHAPTER 4.5 . (4. (4.3) The conditional pdf2 of the received bit. This approximation is good as long as the sum in the lefthand side is dominated by the largest term: ln j zj ≈ maxj ln zj .5 . and s is used to denote the transmitted symbols. y denotes the received symbol.5 . and the LLR is calculated as in Equation 4. In the simulator.5 . h represents the channel coeﬃcients.5 . Thus. Equation 4. This loglikelihood ratios are calculated for every bit of the symbol. which is complex Gaussian. and σv the standard deviation. the computational complexity is reduced. These probabilities can be further used to improve the performance of the succeeding Viterbi decoder. Thus. The loglikelihood ratio (LLR) of decision ˆk is deﬁned in Equation 4.5 .4 is of very high complexity a logsum approximation is used.2) 4.5: maxsbk =1 exp − 1 hs−y 2 σ2 v 2 LLR(bk ) ≈ ln 2 maxsbk =0 exp − 1 hs−y 2 σ2 v 2 .2 Soft demapping Soft demapping uses loglikelihood ratios [18] to propose a decision metric.3: b LLR(bk ) = ln sbk =1 sbk =0 p(ys) p(ys) .5.3 yields 1 exp − 2 hs−y σ2 v 2 LLR(bk ) = ln sbk =1 sbk =0 exp 2 − 1 hs−y 2 2 σv .5) Probability Density Function .5 . (4. the decision metric is calculated as follows: s = argmins dE = argmins y − hs. 2 where σv is the noise variance of the signal.
as shown in Figure 4.  11 01 b1b0 11 1  01 b1b0 (a) (b)  11 01 d1 is the minimum distance between the received bit and the points in 1 b have a bit equal to "one" in the position of the bit the constellation map that1b0 b0 . situated on the right side. The numerical values for these distances are d1 = 1. . the larger the LLR is in10 absolute00 term the higher is 1the probability that a "zero" or a "one" was transmitted. and then.56 and d2 = 0. RECEIVER 48 At the end. and the1 received symbol has d 11 01 been represented with an "x". the minimum distance between the received bit and b0 = 1 is calculated. the algorithm consists on calculating the minimum distance between the received symbol and all symbols in the constellation map where the bit bk is equal to "one". The same operation is performed for the bit b0 equal to "zero".1. channel coeﬃcients equal to "one" 1 b1b have been assumed to make the example easier to explain.5 . x 1 An example of how the LLR calculation works is going. taking the diﬀerence between both distances: LLR(bk ) = min hs − y2 − min hs − y2 .d2 Subﬁgure (b) makes the same calculation for b0 = 0.  00 d2 x 1 .92.6) A positive LLR corresponds to a "zero". 1 The example uses a 4QAM constellation map. 0 The example begins with the calculation of the LLR for the bit b0 .CHAPTER 4. Replacing the numerical values. In subﬁgure 10 00 (a). and a negative LLR corresponds to a "one". obtaining the distance d2 . the minimum distance between the received symbol and the constellation points where the bit bk is equal to "zero" in this position. The LLR can be calculated as the diﬀerence between both distances: LLR = d1 − d2 .1: Example of calculating the LLR for the bit b0 . 1 .5 . Therefore. x 1 1 . it has been obtained a result of 0.64 for LLR(b0 ). to be shown next.  10 11 00 x d1 1  10 11   1 . sbk =1 sbk =0 (4.5 .  Figure 4. Moreover.
   11 1  01 b1b0 11 1  01 b1b0 (a) Calculation of d1 .10 1 00 d1 x 1 . (b) Calculation of d2 . CHAPTER 4.5 . Deinterleaver Insert Zeros Viterbi Decoder ReedSolomon Decoder Figure 4. in accordance with the encoding method that was used.92. concluded that the symbol "00" is the one that have been transmitted with 11 the highest probability.1: Block diagram of the decoding process.  . 10 11 00 d1 x 1 . 01 1 b1b0 4. 10 11 00 d2 x 1 . attempts to reproduce the information originally generated by the source. 10 00 1 d2  x Both LLR(b1) and LLR(b1 ) have positive values. d1 = 1. Figure 4. RECEIVER 1 49  11 1  01 b for The same steps must be followed to get the LLR value1b0 the bit b1 .5 . A block diagram of the decoder is depicted in Figure 4.6 Decoder The ﬁnal stage of receive processing is the decoder. The decoder accepts the sequence of bits or LLRs from the demapper and.51.6 .2: Example of calculating the LLR for the bit b1 . d2 = 0.1.6 . This process is depicted in Figure 4. Like in the encoder block.2. In this case. it can be 0 1 . which perform diverse operations with the aim of reversing the process done by the encoder.43. Therefore. and LLR(b1 ) = 0. the decoder is also composed of four steps.
When two paths enter the same state. The Viterbi algorithm performs approximate maximum likelihood decoding. It consists of two blocks. which is not a function of the number of symbols that compose the codeword sequence.3.3 Viterbi decoder The Viterbi algorithm reduces the computational load by taking advantage of the special structure of the trellis code. It involves calculating a measure of similarity or distance between the received signal at time ti .2. and all the trellis paths entering each state at the same time. The selection of the diﬀerent "surviving" paths is performed for all the states. The receiver does not know the value of the deleted bits but it can know their position from the puncturing vectors.1 Deinterleaving The deinterleaver rearranges the bits from each burst in the correct way by ordering them consecutively as before the interleaving process. The general block deinterleaver rearranges the elements of its input according to an index vector.6. Another advantage is its complexity. RECEIVER 50 4. 4.2 Inserting zeros The block named "Insert Zeros" deals with the task of reversing the process performed by the "Puncture" block. They have no inﬂuence on the metric calculation of the succeeding Viterbi decoder described in the following section. The decoder continues in this way See Section 2. As previously explained in Section 2.6. a general block deinterleaver and a matrix deinterleaver. sending its contents to the output row by row.CHAPTER 4. The parameters used in both blocks are the same as those ones used in the interleaving process3 . 3 . The algorithm works by removing those trellis paths from consideration that could not possibly be candidates for the maximum likelihood choice. These blocks work similarly as the ones used in the interleaver.2. the puncturing process consists of deleting bits from a stream.4 for the equations that describe the parameters of both. and then.6. the one that has the best metric is chosen as the "surviving" path. Thus. The matrix deinterleaver performs block deinterleaving by ﬁlling a matrix with the input symbols column by column. the interleaver and the deinterleaver. 4. The inserted zeros can also be seen as erasures from the channel. zeros are used to ﬁll the corresponding hollows of the stream in order to get the same code rate as before performing the puncturing process.
RECEIVER 51 to advance deeper into the trellis making decisions by eliminating the least likely paths. that is the "unquantized". The goal of selecting the optimum path can be expressed equivalently as choosing the codeword with the maximum likelihood metric. the entries of this block are integers between 0 (most conﬁdent decision for logical zero) and 2b (most conﬁdent decision for logical one). the decision type of decoding. The early rejection of unlikely paths is the fact that reduces the complexity. harddecision. is the one used in our simulator. The rejection of possible paths does not really begin until the third step in the representation in the trellis diagram. which speciﬁes how many symbols may preceed the beginning of the algorithm. and the operation mode. or see [19]. Furthermore. This delay eﬀect is considered in a parameter called traceback depth. in which each frame is treated independently and the traceback depth parameter starts at the state with the best metric and ends in the allzeros state. This parameter can have three values: unquantized. the delay introduced in the decoding process has to be taken into account. the last kind of decision type. • The operation mode parameter controls which method the block uses for transitioning between successive frames. no decision can be done. . As the decision process has been implemented in the demapper. For code rates of 1/2. and thus. when this parameter is set to "softdecision". Other values for this parameter are the "continuous" and "terminated" modes. However. and the negative ones. This is due to the fact that until this time two branches can not have converged in one state. being b the number of softdecision bits. a typical value for the traceback depth is about ﬁve times the constraint length of the code. For more details about these parameters consult the documentation help of Matlab. They are deﬁned as follows: • The type of signals that can support the Viterbi decoder block are based on the decision type parameter. or as choosing the codeword with the minimum distance metric. or softdecision.CHAPTER 4. Another parameters of the Viterbi decoder block of Simulink are the trellis structure used in the convolutional encoder. as a logical one. is the operation mode used in the simulator. The "truncated" mode. It accepts real numbers as inputs for the decoder block. The positive numbers are interpreted as a logical zero.
It has to be taken into account that this block introduces a delay equal to one frame in the system. Finally. Reshape 1 Insert zeros 1 Insert zeros 2 Unbuffer RS decoder Select rows Buffer Figure 4. "Select rows" has the task of selecting only the k original data bytes. the implementation for the RS decoder block has been performed with a Matlab Sfunction using a Cﬁle4 . at the end.2: Block diagram of the ReedSolomon decoder. The block "Insert zeros 1" adds 239 − k zerobytes at the beginning of the structure with the aim Reshape Insert Insert RS Select Buffer Unbuffer of constructing the zero preﬁx. a vector Zeros 1 with a length that is the same integer multiple of lk. as it can be appreciated in Figure 2.sourceforge. Hence.6 . kNRS . the same as the ones described in the RS encoder.2 . The sourcecode used to generate a Matlab Sfuncion is available from http://rscode. after decoding the signal. the RS decoder takes codewords of length n.net and has been published under the Lesser General Public License (LGPL). and.CHAPTER 4. and get. It performs the necessary operations to decode the signal.1. rows 1 2 3 4 rearranges these bytes. RECEIVER 52 4. Furthermore.1.rows 2 afterwards. The 16 − 2k parity bytes are obtained from 1 zeros 1 zeros 2 decoder rows "Insert zeros 2". the RS decoder reverses the diﬀerent steps performed by its corresponding encoding block. with the speciﬁed size (k + 2t) × NRS . needs to be performed ﬁrstly. The block diagram of the RS decoder is depicted in Figure 4. Zeros 2 After the encoding process. being k and t the parameters listed in Table 2. a process to get Reshape Vertical Select RS Reshape Select Reshape the correct amount of bytes thatReshape thedecoder decoder block. before discarding the corresponding added bytes from the shortening and puncturing process. The input of the RS decoder block of Simulink accepts vectors.6 . in this case. Nonetheless. 4 . "Unbuﬀer" arranges the data from the matrix structure in a row vector. As in all the receiver blocks. Thus. the structure that will enter the decoder block has to be the same as the one that outputs the encoder block.2.2 . a data block with size (k + 2t) × NRS is obtained. enter RS and 1 concat. Its output is. with a length that are integer multiples of ln.6. the original message sent by the source.2.2. explained in Section 2. being n = 255 and k = 239.4 ReedSolomon decoder The last part of the decoding process is the ReedSolomon decoding. "Reshape 1" deals with the task of rearranging the data in a matrix form. it returns messages of length k. and the "Buﬀer"block redistributes its input samples in a new frame size.
1 MultiElement Antenna 53 . that means a signiﬁcant increase in capacity. High data rates are achieved when implementing such structures without increasing neither the bandwidth nor the total transmission power.e. MIMO systems utilize antenna diversity to obtain the mentioned improvement and hence combat fading. a detailed description of the MIMO implementation in the simulator is included. transmitted signals suﬀer from attenuation and fading due to multipath in the channel. 5.Chapter 5 MIMO transmission Applying multiple antennas at both ends of a communication system can not only greatly improve the capacity and the throughput of a wireless link in ﬂatfading but also in frequencyselective fading channels. thus making it diﬃcult for the receiver to determine these signals. have MEA1 arrays at both transmit and receive sides. the use of multiple antennas at both transmitter and receiver provides a diversity advantage. i. This chapter presents the theoretical background of the MIMO channel. Additionally. Finally. Diversity techniques take advantage of the multipath propagation characteristics to improve receiver sensitivity. Multipleinput multipleoutput systems. Spacetime coding (STC) as well as the maximum ratio combining (MRC) technique are presented as the solutions implemented to perform the MIMO transmission and reception. also known as MIMO.1 MIMO communications theory When communicating through a wireless channel. specially when the environment provides rich scattering. respectively. improvement in SNR and hence in BER at the receiver [20] [21].
the MIMO system changes into a SIMO. (5. When both. Array gain is the improvement in SINR2 obtained by coherently combining the signals on multiple transmit or multiple receive dimensions and is easily characterized as a shift of the BER curve due to the gain in SINR. and spatial diversity.1. Array gain and diversity gain are not exclusive of MIMO channels and also exist in SIMO and MISO channels. is a unique characteristic of MIMO channels [23]. In this way. Multiplexing gain. frequency. spacetime coding. The three major forms of diversity exploited in wireless communication systems are temporal. 2 Signal to InterferenceplusNoise Ratio . MISO or SISO system [22]. Diversity gain is the improvement in link reliability obtained by receiving replicas of the information signal through independently fading links. and n ∈ CNR ×1 is the noise vector.1 . However. when the system has only one receive antenna but multiple antennas at the transmitter side. whereas receive diversity simply needs the multiple receive dimensions to fade independently without requiring any speciﬁc modulation or coding scheme. Transmit diversity is more diﬃcult to exploit than receive diversity since special modulation and coding schemes are required.1) where s ∈ CNT ×1 is the transmitted vector. or both ends use a single antenna. where it may be denoted as H(t). Similarly. MIMO TRANSMISSION 54 A MIMO system characterizes itself by using multiple antennas at both transmitter and receiver. and the multiplexing gain. The main advantages of MIMO channels over traditional SISO channels are the array gain. the diversity gain. The channel can even be considered timevarying. y ∈ CNR ×1 is the received vector. if only multiple antennas are deployed at one end of the communication system. i. H ∈ CNR ×NT is the channel matrix.e. It is characterized by an steepen slope of the BER curve in the low BER region. For a communication with multiple transmissions the signals are indexed with a timediscrete index as y(t) = Hs(t)+n(t). 5. however. or dimensions. the MIMO system simpliﬁes to a singleinput singleoutput(SISO). transmitter and receiver. branches. the MIMO system reduces to a multipleinput singleoutput (MISO). use a single antenna. when only multiple antennas are deployed at the receiver. the MIMO system reduces to a singleinput multipleoutput (SIMO) system.CHAPTER 5.1 The MIMO channel model The signal model for a MIMO channel composed by NT transmit and NR receive dimensions is y = Hs + n. This signal model represents a single transmission.
. . . . two diﬀerent spatial channel models are considered. . sNT (t)]T . where (·)T denotes transposition.1 depicts a MIMO scenario with NT transmit antennas and NR receive antennas. . and sm (t) and ym (t) are the signals at the mth transmit antenna port and at the mth receive antenna port..2) αNR 1 αNR 2 · · · αNR NT where αnm is the complex transmission coeﬃcient from antenna m at the transmitter to antenna n at the receiver. .1 .CHAPTER 5. . α1NT α2NT . . MIMO TRANSMISSION 55 Figure 5. . . . y(t) sNT(t) NT transmit antennas NR receive antennas yNR(t) Figure 5.. . . The MIMO radio channel describing and receiver can be expressed as α11 α12 α21 α22 H= . . y2 (t). the signals at the receiver are y(t) = [y1 (t). . {αij }.1 . (5. the polarization of the antenna elements.1: A MIMO channel model in a scattering environment. . the path gains.1 . . . scattering medium y2(t) . ... s2 (t). The signals at the transmit antenna array are denoted by vector s(t) = [s1 (t). . . . which has a strong impact on the achievable performance of the system. ..3) In order to take the channel correlation into account. yNR (t)]T . ..1 . and similarly. (5. .. Moreover. s1(t) y1(t) s2(t) s(t) . The relation between the vectors s(t) and y(t) can be expressed as y(t) = H(t)s(t). . and the spacing between them. are correlated depending on the propagation environment. . the connection between transmitter ··· ··· . respectively.
Thus. .d. MIMO TRANSMISSION Spatially uncorrelated channel 56 In spatially uncorrelated channels. circularly symmetric.1.5) The correlation matrices RR and RT are taken from the IMETRA model explained in Section 3. One popular representation of these codes is the Alamouti scheme [25] for two transmit antennas. a transmit correlation matrix RT . With this purpose. Thus. a receive correlation matrix RR .i. Their central issue is the exploitation of multipath eﬀects in order to achieve very high spectral eﬃciencies. complex Gaussian matrix N G ∈ NC T ×NR are used: 1/2 1/2 H = RR G(RT )T .d.2 SpaceTime Coding Spacetime coding (STC) is an eﬃcient approach to exploit the enormous diversity oﬀered by the MIMO.). 3 A complete deﬁnition of the correlation matrices is held in Section B. Therefore. complex Gaussian random variables. with zero mean and unit variance: N H ∼ NC T ×NR (0. These matrices are calculated as RR = E{HHH } and RT = E{HH H}. Moreover.i.d. as well as a obtaining a coding gain.1 . the widely known Kronecker model is used [24]. (5. the transmit diversity plays an integral role in the STC design.3. as in the i. It is used to obtain gains due to spatial diversity via multiple transmit and receive antennas.4) Spatially correlated channel For spatially correlated channels. case3 . the entries of the channel matrix H can be modeled as independent identically distributed (i. and redundancy in time through channel coding. (5. STC techniques are used to improve the performance of MIMO systems. Furthermore. the principal aim of the spacetime coding lies in the design of twodimensional signal matrices to be transmitted during a speciﬁed time period on a number of antennas. a diversity gain proportional to the number of antennas at both transmit and receive sides can be achieved.1 . it introduces redundancy in space through the addition of multiple antennas. In order to model this kind of channel.i. 5. the antenna elements are located far away from each other. they are normalized in such a way that E{tr(HH H)}= NR NT .1.CHAPTER 5. 1). and an i. enabling us to exploit diversity in the spatial dimension.
CHAPTER 5. MIMO TRANSMISSION The Alamouti concept
57
Alamouti [25] [26] introduced a very simple scheme of spacetime block coding (STBC) allowing transmissions from two antennas with the same data rate as on a single antenna, but increasing the diversity at the receiver from one to two in a ﬂat fading channel. As shown in Figure 5.1  2, the Alamouti algorithm uses the space and the time domain to encode data, increasing the • 2x1 Alamouti Scheme performance of the system by coding the signals over the diﬀerent transmitter branches. Thus, the Alamouti code achieves diversity two with full data rate • STC with rate 1 as it transmits two symbols in two time intervals.
Spacetime coding
(f1) t1 (f0) t0
1 s 2 0
2 input symbols are transmitted in two time steps
1 s* 2 1
Input s = (s0s1)
Output r = (r0r1)
1 s* 2 0
1 s 2 1
The received symbols are:
Figure 5.1  2: 2×1 Alamouti scheme. In the ﬁrst time slot, transmit antennas Tx1 and Tx2 are sending symbols s0 and s1 , respectively. In the next time slot, symbols −s∗ and s∗ are sent, 0 1 where (·)∗ denotes complex conjugation. Each symbol is multiplied by a factor of a squared root of two in order to achieve a transmitted average power of one in each time step. Furthermore, it is supposed that the channel, which has transmission coeﬃcients h1 and h2 , remains constant and frequency ﬂat over the two consecutive time steps. The received vector, r, is formed by stacking two consecutive received data samples in time, resulting in 1 r = √ Sh + n, 2 (5.1  6)
where r = [r0 , r1 ]T represents the received vector, h = [h1 , h2 ]T is the complex channel vector, n = [n0 , n1 ]T is the noise at the receiver, and S deﬁnes the STC: S= s0 s1 s∗ −s∗ 1 0 .
CHAPTER 5. MIMO TRANSMISSION The vector equation in Equation 5.1  6 can be read explicitly as 1 1 r0 = √ s0 h1 + √ s1 h2 + n0 , 2 2
58
(5.1  7)
1 −1 (5.1  8) r1 = √ s∗ h1 + √ s∗ h2 + n1 . 1 0 2 2 At the receiver, the vector y of the received signal is formed according to ∗ y = [r0 , r1 ]T , which is equivalent to 1 1 r0 = √ s0 h1 + √ s1 h2 + n0 , 2 2 (5.1  9)
1 1 ∗ r1 = √ s0 h∗ − √ s1 h∗ + n∗ . (5.1  10) 2 1 1 2 2 These both equations can be rewritten in a matrix system as speciﬁed in Equation 5.1  11: r0 ∗ r1 1 =√ 2 h1 h2 h∗ −h∗ 1 2 s0 s1 + n0 n∗ 1 . (5.1  11)
The short notation for this system is the following: 1 y = √ Hν s + n, (5.1  12) 2 where n represents the new noise vector obtained after the conjugation of the second equation, n = [n0 , n∗ ]T . 1 The resulting virtual (2 × 2) channel matrix, Hν , is orthogonal, i.e. Hν H Hν = Hν Hν H = h2 I2 , where (·)H represents the hermitian operation, I2 is the 2 × 2 identity matrix, and h2 is the power gain of the channel, with h2 = h1 2 + h2 2 . Due to this orthogonality, the Alamouti scheme decouples the MISO channel into two virtually independent channels with channel gain h2 and diversity d = 2. The mentioned channel gain is deduced from Equation 5.1  13, which speciﬁes that transmitted symbols can be estimated at the receiver as the result of multiplying the received signals by the hermitian of the virtual channel matrix. After performing the corresponding operations it results in a signal with a gain of h2 plus some modiﬁed noise4 : 1 s = Hν H y = √ h2 s + HH n. ν 2
4
(5.1  13)
The whole derivation of Equation 5.1  13 can be found in Section B.2.1.
CHAPTER 5. MIMO TRANSMISSION Alamouti scheme with arbitrary number of receive antennas
59
A system with two transmit antennas and an arbitrary number of receive antennas [27], as the one depicted in Figure 5.1  3, is analyzed next. The already2x1 Alamouti Scheme to each of the receive antennas, denoting • explained steps are applied the received signal in the ﬁrst and second time slot as r0 and r1 , respectively.
Spacetime coding
(f1) t1 (f0) t0
1 s 2 0
• STC with rate 1
Input s = (s0s1)
1 s* 2 1
Output (r0r1)T
1 s* 2 0
1 s 2 1
Figure 5.1  3: 2×NR Alamouti scheme. Vectors h1 = [h11 , h12 , ..., h1NR ]T and h2 = [h21 , h22 , ..., h2NR ]T contain the channel coeﬃcients corresponding to the transmission from antenna Tx1 and antenna Tx2 to every receive antenna, respectively. As in the previous section, the received vector is y0 y1 = r0 r∗ 1 1 =√ 2 h1 h2 ∗ h2 −h∗ 1 s0 s1 + n0 n∗ 1 , (5.1  14)
where n0 and n1 are noise vectors, corresponding to the noise added in each receive branch. Following the same steps as in the 2 × 1 Alamouti scheme, the estimation of the transmitted symbols at the receiver is performed in Equation 5.1  15. Since the power gain of the channel is, in this case, h2 = h1 2 + h2 2 , it is possible to achieve a diversity order of 2NR . The whole description of this formula for a 2 × 2 Alamouti scheme is further explained in section Section B.2.2. 1 s = Hν H y = √ h2 s + HH n ν 2 (5.1  15)
3 Maximum Ratio Combining n0 s1·h1 h1 h1* s1·h12+n0h1* s1 h2 n1 s1h2+n0h1*+n1h2* s1·h2 h2* s1·h22+n1h2* Figure 5. are combined in order to maximize the instantaneous SNR at the combiner output. r0 (2) and r1 (2) are the symbols received in antenna Rx2 during the two time slots. MIMO TRANSMISSION Input s = (s0s1) STC * 1 withs0two sreceive 60 For a system antennas.17) . and according h2 to the above equations. r1 Input 2 1 11 1 21 s = (s0s1) n∗ (2) h∗ −h12 r∗ (2) 1 22 1 STC Receiver (5.1 . The weight factor corresponds with the complex conjugated channel coeﬃcient of each receive branch. · · · .1 . the symbol received at time slot t1 .1 . received over diﬀerent diversity branches.(f1) t1 s1* (f0) t0 s0 h1 noise Output r = (r0r1) Receiver CHAPTER 5. i = 1. and r1 (1). The signal received on each antenna is given by yi = hi s + ni . Maximum ratio combining (MRC) [26] is a special form of diversity where multiple replicas of the same signal. where r0 (1) is the symbol received in antenna Rx1 at time slot t0 . the received signals would be r0 = [r0 (1)r0 (2)]T and r1 = [r1 (1)r1 (2)]T . the signal that is received at the end is y = [r0 r∗ ]T : 1 n0 (1) r0 (1) h11 h21 1 n0 (2) r (2) 1 r0 h22 hs0 = √ h12 noise = 0 ∗ r∗ (1) h∗ −h∗ s1 + n∗ (1) . In the same way. NR . Output r= (r0r1) 5. Rx1 and Rx2. Before summing the signals of every receive branch the symbols on all receive antennas are weighted.16) In this case the power gain of the channel is h2 h h1 2 + h2 2 and a = 2 2 2 diversity order of 4 is achieved.4: A system using two antennas in reception. (5.1. 2. Therefore.
where an example of a receiver with dual antenna diversity is depicted.1 . Then. Moreover. and at the end. the resultant signal is not multiplied by the factor each 1/ 2 as in the Alamouti scheme. the signals from both branches are summed. The signal is sent over a channel with transmission coeﬃcients h1 and h2 . and NR is the number of receive antennas.1 .4. the process consists of multiplying the signal in each receive branch by the corresponding conjugated channel coeﬃcient. as well as some modiﬁed noise. Therefore. hNR ) = SNR i=1 hi 2 . thus explaining in detail the respective changes to be performed in both transmitter and receiver.18) From this combination. it is considered that the antennas are suﬃciently spaced from each other and the channel coeﬃcients. respectively. · · · . The weighted combination for the input antennas to be taken into account is expressed as follows: NR NR NR y= i=1 βi yi = s i=1 βi hi + i=1 βi ni .1 .19) Applying the CauchySchwartz inequality. h2 . i the maximal SNR yields NR SNR(h1 . MIMO TRANSMISSION 61 where hi and ni are the channel coeﬃcients and the noise experienced by antenna i. However. it is straightforward to verify that βi = h∗ maximizes the SNR. and reaches both receive antennas with some added noise. a gain of 3 dB in power is obtained.2 MIMO implementation This section describes the implementation of the mentioned MIMO in the simulator.CHAPTER 5. NR 2 i=1 βi  (5. hNR ) = Es E NR 2 i=1 βi hi  NR 2 i=1 βi ni  =  NR 2 i=1 βi hi  . can be assumed to be independent. better performance is obtained with this scheme as only one symbol is transmitted in one time interval and the unity average transmit power is already achieved in √ interval. It can be appreciated that the received signal is very similar to the one obtained with the Alamouti scheme in Equation 5.1 . as the same gain in the signal is achieved. aﬀected by fading.20) The process described above is shown in Figure 5.19. (5.13.1 . s is the transmitted signal. the SNR of the channel is given by SNR(h1 .1 . Replacing this value in Equation 5. · · · . (5. and consequently. 5. .
as well as in the assembling process.1 . Reed Solomon Puncture Interleaver The main aspects to be taken into account when implementing the MIMO Encoder Encoder transmitter are focused on applying the STC algorithms in both OFDM symbols and pilot subcarriers. and ps for antenna 2. symbols −s∗ and s∗ 0 1 are transmitted from Tx1 and Tx2 respectively. the modulation on the pilot subcarrier shall be −ps for antenna 1. s0 and s1 .11.1: MIMO transmitter in the WiMAX system.2 . the same pilot symbol is used for the STC block. The pilot symbol for pilot subcarrier "s" obtained after it has been 2PAM modulated is ps . and antenna Tx2.CHAPTER 5. and the OFDM symbols that enter into the STC block are symbols "k" and "k+1". Convolutional STC block This block performs the Alamouti algorithm described in Equation 5. During the ﬁrst channel use antenna Tx1 transmits s0 . during symbol "k+1". using the multipleinput singleoutput channel twice with channel vector values h1 and h2 .1 Transmitter Pilot from Encoder to Add Zeros Mapper STC Assembler Training0 Training1 Figure 5. the basic Alamouti scheme transmits two complex symbols. as two long training sequences are used now. s1 .2. Pilot symbols On a given pilot subcarrier. MIMO TRANSMISSION 62 5. symbol k symbol k + 1 Antenna 1 pilot ps pilot −ps Antenna2 pilot ps pilot ps . The standard [4] speciﬁes that the modulation on pilot subcarrier "s" during the transmission of symbol "k" shall be ps on both transmit antennas. Nevertheless. In the following channel use. As explained.
5. necessary in the receiver for channel estimation.. is used for synchronization.. the last symbol of the preamble is the FCH. Following . S1* = (s1. preambles for DL transmissions are composed of three consecutive OFDM symbols.3* … s1. S2* .2: STC usage with OFDM.6.CHAPTER 5.2 s0.n) . the STC usage with the OFDM symbols is illustrated in Figure 5...2 s1...n*) S3 t2 . respectively.n*) S2 .. t1 .3 … s0. Assembler frequency S0 = (s0.3* … s0.2* s0.. The following expressions describe the idea already explained: Antenna 1 = PSHORT + PEVEN + FCH. MIMO TRANSMISSION Preambles 63 Two long training sequences are needed when using the MIMO transmission..1* s1.1* s0. and the second antenna transmits the sequence PODD .n1 s0.2 . For a better understanding. The second symbol uses a long training sequence. The assembling process for the MIMO system is very similar to the SISO transmission explained in Section 2.n1* s0.. .1 s1. The ﬁrst one.. set according to the short training PSHORT .n) ...1 s0. Antenna 2 = PSHORT + PODD + FCH. During the ﬁrst time step.2* s1. As in the SISO case.2. symbols S0 and S1 are sent simultaneously from antenna 1 and antenna 2.n1* s1..n1 s1. The ﬁrst antenna transmits the sequence PEVEN as long training sequence. As explained in Section 2.3 … s1..2 . modulated data modulated data symbol time pilot subcarrier pilot subcarrier Figure 5.  t0 S1 = (s1. S0* = (s0.. t3 S3* .
PEVEN and PODD . thus the symbol pair (S2 . However. However. only ps is transmitted from antenna 2 during both time intervals. when the two transmit antennas are being used. and next. S3 ) is sent during the time steps t2 and t3 . 3Dmatrices would be needed in order to also specify. pilot subcarriers. these OFDM symbols of diﬀerent antennas are processed consecutively. The mentioned disassembling process separates ﬁrst the two transmitted OFDM symbols. On the other hand. performs the separation of training sequences. two OFDM symbols are transmitted in each time interval. MIMO TRANSMISSION 64 ∗ ∗ the Alamouti algorithm. and so on.4. Channel estimator The estimated channel coeﬃcients are calculated for each receive antenna as explained in Section 4. the pilot symbols are inserted between the OFDM symbols as previously explained. and therefore. Moreover.2. the antenna from where the OFDM is being transmitted in each time step. and so. are used when applying MIMO transmissions. the second antenna will estimate its channel coeﬃcients with PODD . Antenna 1 transmits ps and −ps in time steps t0 and t1 .CHAPTER 5. The same operations are performed for the next time intervals. In this way. the channel estimation is performed using the sequence PEVEN .3. the OFDM symbols −S1 and S0 are sent in the next time step. as explained in Section 4. 5. Each OFDM symbol is processed as a matrix. However.2 Receiver At the receiver only the blocks described in the following have to be changed to allow detection of Alamouti coded signals. both have to be considered for the channel estimation. although from diﬀerent antennas. where each row represents a subcarrier. This is possible because PEVEN . If only one transmit antenna exists. two long training sequences. Disassembler When implementing the MIMO disassembler it has to be taken into account that. respectively. in this case. and DC subcarrier from the original data subcarriers. Simulink does not support 3Dmatrices.
making the OFDM symbols PEVEN and PODD orthogonal. .1 . the estimation is performed as in Equation 5.15: 1 s = √ h2 s + HH n.5. and depending on the diversity scheme. the estimate of the received signal is obtained following the MRC formula: s = s1 h2 + n0 h∗ + n1 h∗ . 1 2 where h2 = h1 2 + h2 2 . Demapper The aim of the demapper is determining the symbol that was transmitted.CHAPTER 5. Finally.1 . With this purpose. However. ν 2 On the other hand. When a scheme with two transmit antennas and only one receive antenna is being used. MIMO TRANSMISSION 65 uses only even subcarriers and PODD only odd subcarriers. the channel gain is h2 = h1 2 + h2 2 . the receive estimates are calculated from Equation 5. this calculation is performed in a diﬀerent way. when two antennas at both ends of the communication system are used. Both hard demapping and soft demapping are implemented as described in Section 4. decision metric algorithms are developed. the estimate of the received signal has to be calculated ﬁrst. ν 2 In this case. when there is one transmit antenna and two receive antennas.13: 1 s = √ h2 s + HH n.
are a good way for reaching the cited requirements. 6. 66 . A theoretical explanation.Chapter 6 Adaptive Modulation and Coding The growing demand of all types of services. aims for the design of increasingly more intelligent and agile communication systems. as these services become more and more complex. Also a performance analysis of the AMC scheme implemented in the simulator is furthermore presented in this chapter.1 Theory on the AMC technique Introduction to adaptive transmission mechanisms Since the available radio spectrum for wireless communications is extremely scarce. They are designed to track the channel variations. thus changing the modulation and coding scheme to yield a higher throughput by transmitting with high information rates under favorable channel conditions and reducing the information rate in response to channel degradation. and. These systems are able to adapt and adjust the transmission parameters based on the link quality. is brieﬂy given. This chapter is focused on the implementation of such techniques. often referred to as adaptive modulation and coding (AMC). there is a rapid growth in the demand of services for portable and wireless devices. capable of providing spectrally eﬃcient and ﬂexible data rate access. improving the spectrum eﬃciency of the system. in this way.1 6. the use of spectrally eﬃcient transmission schemes supporting higher information rates is needed. necessary to understand the operation principles of adaptive modulation and coding. not only voice and data but also multimedia services. the capacity limits of the underlying wireless channel. and reaching. Link adaptation techniques.1.
constellation size. with the purpose of improving the link average spectral eﬃciency. are designed to track the channel quality by adapting the channel throughput to the actual channel state.e.1 . but as closer to the base station. For example. lowing the eﬀective SNR to make transmission more robust. It shows that as the range increases. higher order modulations can be used for increased throughput. Adaptive transmission schemes.1: Scheme for the utilization of AMC. In AMC. symbol rate. i.CHAPTER 6. or any combination of these parameters. the transmission is designed for a "worst case" channel scenario thus coping with the channel variations and still delivering an error rate below a speciﬁc limit. 4QAM 2PAM 64QAM 16QAM Figure 6. thus improving the instantaneous SNR. in periods of high fade when the channel is in a poor state. ADAPTIVE MODULATION AND CODING 67 In traditional communication systems. Adaptive modulation and coding (AMC) is a promising tool for increasing the spectral eﬃciency of timevarying wireless channels while maintaining a predictable BER [28].1 . An example of utilization of the cited AMC scheme is illustrated in Figure 6. the system steps down to a lower modulation. coding scheme. not only the modulation order but also the FEC scheme are varied by adjusting their code rate to the variations in the communication channel. These techniques take advantage of the timevarying nature of the wireless channel to vary the transmitted power level. i. low SNR.e. the number of information bits transmitted per second per Hz bandwidth used. the signal constellation size is reduced in order to improve ﬁdelity.1. . however. Conversely. the signal constellation size is increased in order to allow higher data rate modulation schemes to be employed with low probability of error. in periods of low fade or high gain (high SNR).
1 . . The transmitter then adapts its transmission rate and coding and modulation schemes by transmitting with a modulation scheme such that it guarantees a BER below BER0 . As outlined in Figure 6. The SNR thresholds are obtained from the BER vs. BER0 . is deﬁned by the system for each scheme whenever the SNR is above the SNR threshold. as it is often used in many systems as the channel quality information. An SNR threshold such that it guarantees a BER below the target BER. the method consists on splitting the SNR range into N + 1 SNR regions by N + 2 SNR thresholds. ADAPTIVE MODULATION AND CODING 68 6.1.2 Performance of the AMC scheme A good performance of AMC schemes requires accurate channel estimation at the receiver and a reliable feedback path between that estimator and the transmitter on which the receiver reports channel state information (CSI) to the transmitter. based on the prediction of the channel conditions for the next time interval. the AMC scheme explained in this section is related with the measurement of the SNR.CHAPTER 6. Although there are diﬀerent ways to estimate the channel quality. with γ0 = 0 and γN +1 = ∞. {γ}N +1 . Therefore. In order to perform a good implementation the next steps must be followed: Channel quality estimation The transmitter requires an estimate of the expected channel conditions for the next transmission interval. Parameter adaptation The choice of the appropriate modulation and coding mode to be used in the next transmission is made by the transmitter. Since this knowledge can only be gained by prediction from past channel quality estimations. When the SNR γ falls within the SNR region γn ≤ γ ≤ γn+1 . and to reduce the spectral eﬃciency as the SNR decreases. the associated channel state information is sent back to the transmitter. the delay between the quality estimation and the actual transmission in relation to the maximal Doppler frequency of the channel is crucial for the system implementation since poor system performance will result if the channel estimate is obsolete at the time of transmission.2. n=0 Each of the N schemes is then assigned to operate within a particular SNR region. This enables the system to transmit with high spectral eﬃciency when the SNR is high. the adaptive system can only operate eﬃciently in an environment with relatively slowlyvarying channel conditions [29]. SNR characteristics of a modulation mode on an AWGN channel.
the challenge associated with adaptive modulation and coding is that the mobile channel is timevarying. no delay or transmission error can occur in the feedback channel so that no discrepancy between the predicted and the actual SNR of the next frame appears. besides the channel coeﬃcients.2: BER vs. ADAPTIVE MODULATION AND CODING 0 69 10 10 1 2PAM 4QAM 16QAM 64QAM 10 2 BER 10 3 BER0 γ1 γ2 γ3 γ4 10 4 10 5 10 6 5 0 5 10 15 SNR(dB) 20 25 30 Figure 6. SNR relationship and corresponding SNR thresholds for N coding and modulation schemes employed by AMC. Feedback mechanism Once the receiver has estimated the channel SNR. the receiver must also be informed of which demodulator and decoding parameters to employ for the next received packet. In this way. On one hand. Therefore. it has to feed back the selected mode to the transmitter in order that the adaptation can be performed. However. the channel . based on a target BER. selected the mode that yields the largest throughput while remaining within the BER target bounds.1 . and.2 AMC implementation This section explains the implementation of the cited adaptive modulation and coding scheme. the feedback of the channel information becomes a limiting factor. Moreover.CHAPTER 6. and thus. the assumption of a slowlyvarying as well as a reliable feedback channel is necessary in order to achieve an accurate performance of the AMC scheme. converted it into BER information for each mode candidate. A few diﬀerences between this simulator version and the last one that was mentioned when implementing the MIMO system are encountered. 6.
CHAPTER 6. ADAPTIVE MODULATION AND CODING
Transmitter
70
estimator also estimates the corresponding SNR. On the other hand, a new block is introduced with the aim of deciding the modulation and coding mode to be switched at the transmitter. Furthermore, as appreciated in Figure 6.2  1, not only the encoder and mapper in the transmit side but also the decoder and demapper in the receiver are grouped into a unique block, which implementation and function will be later discussed.
from Disassembler channel coefficients data symbols from Disassembler SNR Output bits
Channel Estimator
Decoder & Demapper
AMC Encoder & Mapper
to Assembler
Figure 6.2  1: AMC mechanism in the WiMAX system.
6.2.1
SNR estimation
The calculation of the SNR is performed in the channel estimator. As well known, the SNR is obtained from dividing the signal power between the noise power. Thus, the instantaneous SNR for each frame is calculated as SNR = s , n
where s and n are the average signal and noise power, respectively, in each frame. While the signal power is obtained from the channel coeﬃcients, the 2 noise power is calculated from the noise variance, σν . As stated in Section 2.5, the long training sequences are an interpolated version of the sequence PALL , where either PEVEN or PODD use a subset of even or odd subcarriers, respectively, while keeping null the remaining subset. However, the training symbols are received with some additive noise, and thus, the previous null carriers have now a nonzero value. The noise is calculated from these carriers. Furthermore, as it happened with the channel estimation, it has to be taken into account whether the system uses one or two transmit antennas. When only one transmit antenna is used the noise is obtained from PEVEN . If the system has two transmit antennas, both PEVEN and PODD are used instead.
CHAPTER 6. ADAPTIVE MODULATION AND CODING
71
6.2.2
The AMC block
This block deals with the task of ﬁnding the decision thresholds, deciding which of the modulation and coding schemes shown in Table 2.2  1 may be employed in the next frame transmission, and feeding back this information not only to the transmitter but also to the receiver. As explained before, the SNR thresholds are calculated from the BER vs. SNR curves. The curves depicted in Figure 6.2  2 have been obtained from simulations performed with a perfect knowledge of the channel coeﬃcients in an AWGN scenario. The ﬁgure shows seven curves corresponding to the seven diﬀerent modulation and coding schemes allowed by the WiMAX system, deﬁned from AMC1 to AMC7. The set of adaptation/switching thresholds is obtained by reading the SNR points corresponding to a target BER.
AM C1
10
0
AM C1 AM C2 AM C3 AM C4 AM C5 AM C6 AM C7
AMC1 AMC2 AMC3 AMC4 AMC5 AMC6 AMC7
Coded BER
10
1
Target BER
10
2
5
0
5
10 15 Channel SNR [dB]
20
25
Figure 6.2  2: BER vs. SNR curves. The implementation of this method is performed in a Matlab ﬁle. The obtained coded BER values for a given SNR, for each of the diﬀerent AMC schemes, are programmed. According to a target BER speciﬁed by the user a selection function calculates the SNR thresholds, and the AMC scheme to use in the next frame is decided by comparing these thresholds with the estimated SNR of the channel.
CHAPTER 6. ADAPTIVE MODULATION AND CODING
72
6.2.3
Coding and decoding
Both transmitter and receiver have to be informed about which AMC scheme to employ in the next transmission frame. An encoder and mapper in which the parameters to be used were speciﬁed by the user were performed in the simulator without the adaptive modulation and coding mechanism. However, a bank of seven encoders and mappers, each one with a ﬁxed AMC scheme, is now set up so that the transmitter can switch from one AMC scheme to another based on the feedback information. The same operation is performed at the receiver, where instead of only a demapper and a decoder, a bank with seven demappers and decoders is also implemented.
thus showing the mentioned increase in spectral eﬃciency and data throughput. not only the two demapping methods but also the impact of the channel estimation are analyzed.Chapter 7 Simulation results In this chapter. Thus. The common assumptions to most of the simulations are as follows: the simulation is carried out for downlink transmissions at a carrier frequency of 2 GHz and a 20 MHz channel bandwidth. 7. Furthermore. Thus. The goal is to evaluate the performance of the simulator as well as to obtain a more accurate understanding of the operation of the WiMAX system.5 msec. Through numerous comparisons between simulation results obtained with diﬀerent simulation parameters. the transmission gain obtained when using multiple antennas instead of only a single antenna at one or both ends of the transmission link is also examined. only changes performed on these assumptions will be mentioned from now on. simulation results will be presented along with the underlying assumptions. To end. The diﬀerent channel models and scenarios are applied in diﬀerent simulations so that the fading phenomenon can be studied.1 A single antenna transmission This section shows simulation results when using a single antenna not only at the transmitter but also at the receiver. 73 . some discussions about the use of these diﬀerent parameters and options are given with the purpose of oﬀering a complete view on the better manner of performance of the transmission. results when activating the AMC mechanism are oﬀered. The length of the cyclic preﬁx is deﬁned by G = 1/32 and the frame duration is speciﬁed to be 2.
1.1 . As speciﬁed in the standard. Low spectral eﬃciency modulation schemes. 0 10 10 −1 Uncoded BER 10 −2 10 −3 2−PAM 4−QAM 16−QAM 64−QAM −15 −10 −5 0 5 10 15 20 25 10 −20 −4 Channel SNR [dB] Figure 7.1 .1: Comparison between modulation schemes in the uncoded BER. If a higher Eb /N0 is needed to transfer data for a given modulation scheme. WiMAX allows for seven diﬀerent combinations of modulation order and coding rates. AMC Mode AMC1 AMC2 AMC3 AMC4 AMC5 AMC6 AMC7 Modulation scheme 2PAM 4QAM 4QAM 16QAM 16QAM 64QAM 64QAM Overall coding rate 1/2 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 2/3 3/4 Table 7.2. it means that more energy is required for each bit transfer. which are brieﬂy summarized next.1 Modulation schemes and coding rates This section gives a comparison between the diﬀerent modulation schemes and coding rates used in the simulator. such as 2PAM and 4QAM. require a lower .1 and Figure 7.1 .1: Modulation schemes and coding rates. The simulated performance for diﬀerent modulation schemes and coding rates tested is shown in Figure 7.1 . The curves show the BER as a function of the bit energy to noise rate (Eb /N0 ). SIMULATION RESULTS 74 7. These results have been obtained in an AWGN channel. with a system using leastsquares channel estimation and hard demapping.CHAPTER 7. which is a measure of the energy eﬃciency of a modulation scheme.
Furthermore. (7. and Q(x) is related to the complementary Gaussian error function 2 ∞ x by Q(x) = √1 x exp −x dx = 1 erfc √2 .1 . Ma deﬁnes the modulation alphabet. which is the probability that 2 2 2π a Gaussian distributed variable x0 is larger than x. They have been calculated from the probability of bit error expressions as follows [30]: Pbc = 2 1 − √ 1 Ma Q 3 Eb Ma − 1 N0 . This shift can be calculated analytically and is a loss 200 in the SNR of the system: SNRloss = 10 log10 192 33 = 0. the signal power corresponds to the energy per bit times the number of bits per symbol. SIMULATION RESULTS 75 Eb /N0 .1 . and so. Therefore. the probability of bit error is calculated as Pb = 1 − (1 − Pbc )2 .1) where Pbc is the probability of bit error per carrier.1 represent the AWGN theoretical BER curves.1 .2: Comparison between diﬀerent modulation chemes and coding rates in the coded BER. a comparison between the diﬀerent modulation schemes is performed. The SNR for each modulation takes into account the number of bits per symbol. where 200/192 is the ratio of the number of nonzero . (7. are more energy eﬃcient and less vulnerable to bit errors. It expresses 32 the mentioned shift.CHAPTER 7. As we can see. and hence. 10 0 Coded BER 10 −1 AMC1 AMC2 AMC3 AMC4 AMC5 AMC6 AMC7 10 −2 −5 0 5 10 15 20 25 Channel SNR [dB] Figure 7.2) Note that the theoretical curves experiment a small shift if compared with those simulated. the BER versus the SNR can be calculated from Eb /N0 .3dB.1 . The dashed black curves in Figure 7.
the more the curves are shifted to the right.1 . block fading. Block fading TV block fading TV fading 10 −1 Coded BER 10 −2 10 −3 10 −4 −5 0 5 10 15 20 Channel SNR 100 [dB] Figure 7. and timevariant block fading channel. which has no variation of its channel coeﬃcients through the whole process of transmission. where the coded BER vs.2. the higher the modulation scheme.CHAPTER 7. As expected.1 .3. a timevariant channel estimator could be implemented. and 33/32 represents the relationship between the data symbol with and without adding the cyclic preﬁx. In order to improve the performance of this timevariant channel. is deﬁned by G = 1/32. are shown in Figure 7. analyzed next. SNR curves have been plotted. which regard to the diﬀerent fading types. and as it has been discussed for the uncoded BER curves. With this purpose. where the parameters are set to be AMC3. timevariant fading. the higher the bit error rate. It can be noticed that the higher the code rate. As mentioned through the thesis. which.3: Comparison between diﬀerent types of fading. These observations. the timevariant channel experiments the worse results as a consequence of the varying channel coeﬃcients. The block fading channel. in this case. three kinds of channel fading are implemented in the simulator.1. Also discussed in this section is the velocity of the user terminal. 7.2 Types of channel fading The diﬀerent channel fading and the eﬀects of the velocity of the user are discussed in the current section. perfect channel knowledge. and a user velocity of 3 km/h. A comparison between all diﬀerent modulation schemes and coding rates is given in Figure 7.1 . SIMULATION RESULTS 76 subcarriers (data and pilots) to the data subcarriers. is the one that obtains better results instead. the following graphics show the performance of the . hard demapping.
SIMULATION RESULTS 77 system not only for the uncoded BER curves. hard demapping has been used at the receiver. 7. in scenario F. In the same way. The ﬁgure shows that soft demapping outperforms hard demapping in approximately 2 dB in SNR.5 shows the BER performance for both hard and soft (maxlogMAP) demapping. the maxlogMAP algorithm implemented for the soft demapping is analyzed. SNR curves where a perfect knowledge of the channel coeﬃcients has been assumed.CHAPTER 7.1 . and AMC3. it plays an essential role in the coded BER curve. when passing the signal through a timevariant channel. As expected. It is shown that while the velocity of the user is not an important factor when computing the uncoded BER curve. Figure 7. 10 0 10 0 v=0 km/h v=30 km/h v=100 km/h −1 10 −1 v=0 km/h v=30 km/h v=100 km/h Uncoded BER 10 Coded BER 10 −2 10 −2 10 −3 10 −4 10 −3 −5 0 5 10 15 20 10 −5 −5 0 5 10 15 20 Channel SNR [dB] Channel SNR [dB] (a) (b) Figure 7. as expected. a comparison between channel estimation and a perfect knowledge of the channel coeﬃcients is made.1 . when removing the assumption of ideal channel knowledge it is noticed that the performance curves become 1 dB more degraded in SNR. It is a plot of the coded BER vs. Figure 7. and an overall coding rate of 1/2 (AMC2). perfect channel knowledge. Therefore.4: BER vs. where. More speciﬁcally. the lower the velocity the better the results. In this case. The parameters used in this simulations are soft demapping. SNR curves in a timevariant channel for scenario F.1. in an .3 Demapping and channel estimation This section compares hard and soft demapping.1 .4 depicts results obtained for a timevariant channel. better results are obtained with the knowledge of the channel coeﬃcients. However. but also for the coded BER curves. The ﬁrst results compare the demapping and the channel estimation methods for an AWGN channel using a 4QAM modulation format.
it can be deducted that the scheme using the soft demapping algorithm and a perfect knowledge of the channel will outperform that with hard demapping and leastsquares channel estimation in approximately 3 dB in SNR. implementation more eﬀort should be spent on implementing a soft demapper than a better channel estimator. SIMULATION RESULTS 10 0 78 Hard demapping Soft demapping 10 0 Perfect channel LS estimation 10 −1 Coded BER 10 −1 10 −2 Coded BER 10 −2 10 −3 −3 −2 −1 0 1 2 3 4 5 10 −3 Channel SNR [dB] −3 −2 −1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Channel SNR [dB] (a) Hard demapping vs.6: Comparison between hard and soft demapping and channel estimation in an AWGN channel. there is 1 dB of loss in the SNR when channel estimation is applied. On the other hand. As mentioned. These four possible combinations of demapping and channel estimation are plotted in Figure 7.1 .1 .1 . (b) Perfect channel knowledge vs.6. Figure 7.CHAPTER 7. leastsquares channel estimation. Therefore. 10 0 10 −1 Coded BER 10 −2 Soft & Perfect Hard & LSE Soft & LSE Hard & Perfect 10 −3 −3 −2 −1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Channel SNR [dB] Figure 7. soft demapping.5: Demapping and channel estimation in an AWGN channel. In the . 2 dB of gain are obtained when using soft demapping instead of hard demapping.
In addition to this. (b) Perfect channel knowledge vs. the gain obtained with the soft demapping is damaged by the application of the leastsquares channel estimation. both demapping and channel estimation is analyzed for the block fading channel. 10 0 10 0 Hard demapping Soft demapping Perfect channel LS estimation 10 −1 Coded BER Coded BER 10 −2 10 −1 10 −3 10 5 10 15 20 25 −2 0 0 5 10 15 20 25 Channel SNR [dB] Channel SNR [dB] (a) Hard demapping vs. As in the AWGN channel.1 . 1 LeastSquares Estimation .CHAPTER 7. soft demapping. the comparison between the demapping methods is performed with a perfect knowledge of the channel. SIMULATION RESULTS 79 same way. if soft demapping is combined with LSE1 . They show that the gain obtain with soft demapping increases as the SNR increases. Figure 7. and only 1 dB of gain in SNR is achieved. using hard demapping. The following ﬁgures analyze not only both demapping methods but also the channel estimation results in scenario F. and the one for channel estimation. Therefore.7: Demapping and channel estimation in a block fading channel. the receiver is able to better utilize the diversity of the frequencyselective channel. The same occurs with the gain obtained when using perfect channel knowledge instead of leastsquares channel estimation. leastsquares channel estimation.
perfect channel knowledge. we choose AMC1 as it is the most robust. the support of a predictable BER.1 .1. Furthermore.1 . a comparison between results with and without using the mentioned AMC scheme is performed. SNR curves.8: Comparison between results obtained with and without using the AMC scheme. Figure 7.1 . Several aspects. as previously explained. Figure 7. we have the ranges speciﬁed in Table 7. there is only one scheme that gives us our desired performance below 10−1 . We came to these levels in the following way: at an operating BER of 10−1 . With our operating point at a target BER of 10−1 . SNR curves. The setting parameters are hard demapping. 10 0 Without AMC With AMC 70 60 −1 Without AMC With AMC Throughput [Mbps] 0 5 10 15 20 25 10 Coded BER 50 40 10 −2 30 20 −3 10 −5 Channel SNR [dB] 10 −5 0 5 10 15 20 25 Channel SNR [dB] (a) Coded BER vs. and that is AMC1. including the type of channel. are analyzed with this purpose. the selection of the AMC mode is made in such a way that it guarantees a BER below a given target BER. Therefore. the velocity of the user. AMC2 gives us our desired BER. The results show an enormous increase in the throughput when using the AMC mechanism from approximately 7 dB of channel SNR onwards. Likewise.4 AMC and its eﬀects in the results This sections discusses the consequences caused in the results when applying the AMC mechanism. Between 1 and 3 dB. and AMC3. To begin with. Between 6 and 9 dB the AMC scheme giving the desired BER performance at a better spectral eﬃciency is AMC3. there is no AMC scheme that gives us our desired performance at an SNR below 1 dB.2 for each AMC scheme.CHAPTER 7.8 depicts the coded BER and the throughput curves for scenario A in a block fading channel. SIMULATION RESULTS 80 7. (b) Throughput vs. On the other hand. Between 3 and 6 dB. or the channel estimation. . which maintains small variations around a ﬁxed value. the prize for this enhancement is. thus letting us notice the enhancement AMC oﬀers.
and therefore. higher AMC schemes are used to give us the best spectral eﬃciency while providing the desired BER performance.2: AMC scheme to SNR range. . it can be seen that the target BER is not achieved. the performance of the system will be worse as worse channel quality conditions (higher target BER to guarantee a BER below it) are required. Therefore. The channel fading is so fast (low temporal correlation and short coherence time) that the SNR varies too much during the transmission of each codeword. In the same way. In this case the SNR thresholds are shifted to the right (higher SNR) due to decreasing nature of the BER curves with the SNR.9: The inﬂuence of the target BER in the AMC mechanism. more eﬀort should be spent on optimizing the AMC mechanism. if the target BER is higher. Target BER=10−1 SNR<1 dB 1 dB<SNR<3 dB 3 dB<SNR<6 dB 6 dB<SNR<9 dB 9 dB<SNR<12 dB 12 dB<SNR<16 dB 16 dB<SNR<18 dB SNR>18dB Target BER=10−2 SNR<0 dB 0 dB<SNR<5 dB 5 dB<SNR<7 dB 7 dB<SNR<11 dB 11 dB<SNR<13 dB 13 dB<SNR<18 dB 18 dB<SNR<19 dB SNR>19dB AMC1 AMC1 AMC2 AMC3 AMC4 AMC5 AMC6 AMC7 Table 7.1 .1 .CHAPTER 7.1 . SIMULATION RESULTS 81 as the channel SNR is higher. the chart shows the SNR ranges for a given target BER of 10−2 . However. 10 0 Target BER=1e−1 Target BER=1e−2 Coded BER 10 −1 10 −2 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 Channel SNR [dB] Figure 7.9 shows. as Figure 7.
the feedback of the channel information to the transmitter becomes a limiting factor as while it is being performed.10 shows. (b) Throughput vs. As expected. both demapping and channel estimation are analyzed with the performance of the AMC scheme. Since the channel conditions change more rapidly when the user moves faster. the channel conditions change continuously.1 . SNR curves. soft demapping. . and leastsquares channel estimation. the AMC mechanism needs to shift from one mode to another more often to follow the variations of the channel.1 .CHAPTER 7. scenario B. Results for scenario C in a block fading channel using AMC3 are shown in Figure 7. Figure 7. SIMULATION RESULTS 82 Another aspect to take into account is the velocity of the user. Additionally. that better results are obtained if the velocity of the user is smaller. respectively. as Figure 7. better results have been obtained for soft demapping and a perfect channel knowledge instead of hard demapping and channel estimation. The curves comparing hard demapping and soft demapping have been obtained with leastsquares channel estimation. Thus it can be thought. On the other hand. with soft demapping. and those comparing channel estimation and perfect channel knowledge. SNR curves.11.10: AMC results for a timevariant block fading channel with diﬀerent user velocities.1 . The setting parameters for this curves are timevariant block fading channel. 10 0 80 v=3 km/h v =100 km/h 70 v=3 km/h v=100 km/h 10 −1 Throughput [Mbps] 60 Coded BER 50 40 10 −2 30 20 10 −3 −10 −5 0 5 10 15 20 25 10 −10 −5 0 5 10 15 20 25 Channel SNR [dB] Channel SNR [dB] (a) Coded BER vs.
2 Multiple antenna transmission Results obtained when using more than one antenna either at the transmitter or at the receiver. or at both ends of the communication link.1 .2. Figure 7. the common assumptions to all of the simulations are: • fc =2 GHz • BW =20 MHz • G=1/32 • Tframe =2. SIMO. wireless channels key problem is fading.CHAPTER 7. This section analyzes the enhancement achieved with such structures. and MIMO systems As mentioned in Chapter 5.11: Demapping and channel estimation when using the AMC scheme. multiple antennas at both ends of the communication link are used. the hard demapping algorithm. 7. improve the capacity and the throughput of the system. As in the results for only one antenna. are discussed in this section. 7. SIMULATION RESULTS 0 83 10 10 0 Soft demapping Hard demapping Perfect channel LS estimation Coded BER 10 −1 Coded BER 0 5 10 15 20 25 10 −1 10 −2 −5 10 −2 Channel SNR [dB] 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 Channel SNR [dB] (a) Comparison between hard and soft (b) Comparison between perfect channel demapping. a perfect knowledge of the channel coeﬃcients. knowledge and channel estimation. MISO. In order to combat this fading and hence. and a block fading channel model are used.5 msec • AMC=3 Furthermore.1 SISO. making a comparison of the performance of not only systems with multiple .
Figure 7.e.2 illustrates that the higher the diversity order the more improvement in throughput is achieved. the unity average transmit power is already achieved in each time interval. the degree of diversity is said to be equal to one. for a 10 dB higher SNR. However. it is shown that although both 1 × 2 and 2 × 1 achieve the same degree of diversity. it can be concluded that the degree of diversity is equal to NT NR .CHAPTER 7. i. SIMULATION RESULTS 84 transmit but also multiple receive antennas. when simulating with a 1 × 2 or a 2 × 1 system. This gain is deducted from the formula of the received signal when using the MRC and the Alamouti scheme. the scheme that uses multiple antennas at the receiver oﬀers a signiﬁcant improvement of 3 dB of gain in the channel SNR. in this case.2 . using scenario C. As can be observed. respectively. In this case. power of 1 for a 10 dB rise in SNR. 10 0 1x1 2x1 1x2 2x2 Diversity 1 10 −1 Coded BER 10 −2 Diversity 4 Diversity 2 Diversity 2 10 −3 −5 0 5 10 15 20 25 Channel SNR [dB] Figure 7. As only one symbol is transmitted in one time interval with the MRC algorithm. and the resultant √ signal is not multiplied by the factor 1/ 2 as in the Alamouti algorithm. the curve for the 1 × 1 system improves its error probability with a factor 10. being NT and NR the number of transmit and receive antennas. The slope of the BER curves is an indicator of the degree of diversity that has been achieved. . no diversity at all. Likewise. The throughput of the system is analyzed next. in terms of power of ten.1 illustrates. i. the performance of the system drastically improves with a diversity system in place. which have diversity order of two.2 .1: Comparison between diﬀerent degrees of diversity. Furthermore. The degree of diversity is deﬁned as the performance improvement in BER. Therefore. As Figure 7. better performance is achieved. the degree of diversity achieved with the 2 × 2 system is of order four.e.2 .
2 .2: Throughput of the system using diversity schemes. SIMULATION RESULTS 85 28 26 Trhoughput [Mbps] 24 22 20 18 1x1 1x2 2x1 2x2 0 5 10 15 20 25 16 −5 Channel SNR [dB] Figure 7.2. On the other hand. represent environments experiencing ﬂat fading. A and U. A and F.3: Comparison between diﬀerent channel model scenarios in a MIMO system.2 . 10 0 Scenario U Scenario A Scenario F 10 −1 Coded BER 10 −2 10 −3 10 −4 −5 0 5 10 15 Channel SNR [dB] Figure 7. 7. in a 2 × 2 MIMO system are presented.2 Channel model scenarios This section analyzes the performance of the system when using the diﬀerent IMETRA [31] scenarios implemented in the simulator. The results show that although both scenarios. thus showing that better performance is achieved in a noncorrelated ﬂat fading channel (scenario U) than in a correlated (scenario A). the best results are obtained with scenario F due to the higher frequency diversity this channel model has. . Simulation results for scenarios U. scenario A is worse than scenario U.CHAPTER 7.
the length of the cyclic preﬁx. it examines the implementation of a WiMAX simulator. Deﬁned to provide broadband wireless access. More speciﬁcally. In this context. Chapter 3 has focused on the channel implementation. and a complementary technology where wireless networks are not suﬃciently developed. The multipath channel propagation manifests itself by diﬀerent echoes of possibly diﬀerent transmitted symbols overlapping at the receiver. The ﬂexible and parametrizable OFDM transmitter was explained in Chapter 2. targeted to the 256point FFT OFDM PHY layer. bounded by factors such as bandwidth. which leads to error rate degradation. WiMAX appears to fulﬁl these requirements. the channel bandwidth. block 86 . the coding scheme. providing vehicular mobility and high service areas and data rates. coverage area. the modulation alphabet. or infrastructure costs. WLANs and 3G cellular networks are experiencing several diﬃculties for reaching a complete mobile broadband access. Changes in the environment due to the movement of not only objects but also receiver and transmitter introduce timevarying fading on the communication channel.Chapter 8 Conclusion The wireless communications industry is gaining momentum in both ﬁxed and mobile applications. The continued increase in demand for all types of wireless services (voice. The eﬀects of ISI on the transmission error statistics are negligible as long as the delay spread is shorter than the cyclic preﬁx. With this purpose. built with Matlab Simulink. the diﬀerent parts of the simulator have been analyzed. Speciﬁcally. The simulator implements three diﬀerent kinds of channels. data. it is increasingly gaining interest as an alternative last mile technology to DSL lines and cable modems. can be freely chosen by setting appropriate parameter values. and the frame duration. and multimedia) is fueling the need for higher capacity and data rates not only in ﬁxed but also in mobile applications. This thesis is devoted to the study of the WiMAX system.
more eﬀorts should be spent on implementing a soft demapper than a better channel estimation. under proper coding. Performing the exact calculation of the bitwise metric in a soft demapper with a MAP algorithm is very tedious work. It is necessary for simple decoding of STC systems that the channel must be slowly varying (remain constant over two consecutive time steps). it was shown that soft demapping outperforms hard demapping by 2 dB of gain in SNR. while applying spatial diversity. the concepts of maximum ratio combining (MRC) and spacetime coding (STC) were introduced. timevariant. The timevariant channel model is implemented as a Jake’s model and a timevariant convolution of the transmit signal with the impulse response. The receiver was studied in detail in Chapter 4. is proportional to the number of antennas with which the communication system is equipped. to combat fading and ultimately have substantially improved reliability and increased capacity.CHAPTER 8. The increased capacity. Furthermore. On the other hand. Speciﬁcally. The simulator implements MIMO up to two transmit and/or receive antennas. On one hand. The timevariant block fading channel is a combination of the block fading and the timevariant channel model with timeinvariant channel ﬁltering. If the block fading channel is selected for simulation. In order to reduce the complexity of the MAP algorithm for LLR calculation I replaced the mathematical logarithm function of the LLR expression with simple max or min functions. Therefore. Results showed that simple leastsquares channel estimation costs 1 dB in SNR when compared with a perfect channel knowledge. since soft demapping gives a higher gain in the channel SNR. Another important aspect studied through the thesis is the performance gain by MIMO presented in Chapter 5. leading to the maxlogMAP approximation. it was found that a gain of 3 dB in the channel SNR appears in the BER curves when two antennas are used at the receiver instead of at the transmitter. eventually translates into increased throughput. Particularly. demapping algorithms and channel estimation methods were discussed. This model can be used as a low complexity approximation for the timevariant channel model if only slow speeds are considered. CONCLUSION 87 fading. The information given by the demapper can contain not only the demodulated message (hard output) but also the degree of conﬁdence in the decision (soft output). . the system BER with channel estimates from training sequences was evaluated. The ability to transmit and receive through multiple antennas enables us. Simulated results showed that the degree of diversity achieved. and hence the increase in throughput. one impulse response is generated randomly for every frame transmitted. and timevariant block fading channels.
the target BER is not achieved due to the fast fading of the channel. The implemented scheme estimates the channel SNR for each frame and compares it with a set of SNR thresholds obtained in such a way that they guarantee a BER below a given target BER.CHAPTER 8. The proposed scheme has been shown to be eﬀective from approximately 7 dB of channel SNR onwards. CONCLUSION 88 A ﬁnal contribution is the performance evaluation of the AMC scheme presented in Chapter 6. . However. and more eﬀorts should be spent on optimizing the mentioned AMC mechanism. although a rising throughput is obtained with such schemes. The codec associated to each threshold is fed back to the transmitter in order that the adaptation can be performed. where an enormous increase in the throughput of the system is achieved with the use of the AMC scheme. AMC schemes employ multiple modulation and coding schemes (codecs) in order to instantaneously adapt spectral eﬃciency to the variations in the channel SNR while maintaining an acceptable BER.
On the other hand.Appendix A OFDM theory OFDM can be viewed as a form of frequency division multiplexing (FDM) with the special property that each tone is orthogonal with every other tone. A. each one of these subcarriers has a width of ∆f = W/Nc . One of the main advantages of using a multicarrier modulation is that intersymbol interference can be reduced when the number of subcarriers. FDM requires. commonly called subcarriers. In a multipath fading channel. W . but it is diﬀerent from FDM in several ways.1. typically.1 Multicarrier modulation In a single carrier modulation system the data is sent serially over the channel by modulating one single carrier at a baud rate of R symbols per second. The symbol duration for a multicarrier scheme is then Tsym = Nc /R. is divided into a number Nc of subbands. they do not interfere with each other. Nc . nevertheless. increases.1 . Furthermore. the existence of frequency guard bands between the frequencies so that they do not interfere with each other. being the data symbol period Tsym = 1/R. As shown in Figure A. Instead of transmitting the data symbols in a serial way at a baud rate R. The basic idea of the multicarrier modulation is. the overall amount of required spectrum is reduced due to the overlapping of the tones. a multicarrier transmitter partitions the data stream into blocks of Nc data symbols and those are transmitted in parallel by modulating the Nc subcarriers. a complex equalizer for compensating the 89 . OFDM allows the spectrum of each tone to overlap. that the available bandwidth. On one hand. ISI can appear due to the fact that the time dispersion is signiﬁcant compared with the symbol period. If a single carrier modulation is used. and because they are orthogonal.
2) with fk = f0 + k∆f . However. Orthogonality is a property that allows the signals to be perfectly transmitted over a common channel and detected without interference. a general set of orthogonal waveforms is given by √1 ψk (t) = Tsym exp(j2πfk t) 0 t [0.2 Orthogonality In order to assure a high spectral eﬃciency the subchannel waveforms must have overlapping transmit spectra.. in a multicarrier transmission. being k = 0. corresponding to the index k = 0. A. to enable simple separation of these overlapping subchannels at the receiver they need to be orthogonal. . OFDM THEORY 90 Nc subcarriers Δf = /Nc ... fk represents the subcarrier frequency. Tsym ] otherwise. However. Set of functions are orthogonal to each other if they match the conditions in Equation A.2 . 1. into Nc subbands. the result is zero for orthogonal functions: T Si (t)Sj (t)dt = 0 C 0 i=j i = j..2 . (A. It means that if any two diﬀerent functions within a set are multiplied and integrated over a symbol period. In Equation A. Nevertheless.. channel distortion is needed.1: Subdivision of the bandwidth.2 . Figure A. loss of orthogonality results in blurring between these information signals and degradation in communication. (A.2.1 .1.APPENDIX A.2 . and f0 is the lowest frequency used. the multicarrier modulation simpliﬁes the equalization into single multiplications in the frequency domain. Nc − 1. The intercarrier .1) Furthermore.
In an OFDM system. OFDM THEORY 91 spacing must satisfy ∆f = 1/Tsym = R/Nc .2 .1. a loss of the orthogonality appears due to ISI.2 0 0. Furthermore. This low symbol rate makes OFDM naturally resistant to eﬀects of ISI caused by multipath propagation.2 . 0. 1 0. Each carrier has a peak at its centre frequency and nulls evenly spaced with a frequency gap 1. The sinc shape has a narrow main lobe with many side lobes that decay slowly with the magnitude of the frequency diﬀerence away from the centre.4 6 The orthogonal nature of the transmission is a result of the peak of each subcarrier corresponding to the nulls of all other subcarriers. in an OFDM signal the amplitude and phase of the subcarrier must remain 1 2 sinc(x)=sin(x)/x InterCarrier Interference . spreading. where Tsym is the symbol period described above. It is because the OFDM system bandwidth is broken up into Nc subcarriers resulting in a symbol rate that is Nc times lower.4 0.APPENDIX A. this way. A.2 equal to the carrier spacing. as shown in Figure A.6 0.3 Cyclic Preﬁx Passing the signal through a timedispersive channel causes ISI. For a given system bandwidth the symbol rate for an OFDM signal is much lower than a single carrier transmission scheme.8 0. Each OFDM subcarrier has a sinc(x)1 frequency response. resulting in ICI2 .2 5 3 1 0 1 3 5 Figure4 A. The multiple signals that appear due to the multipath propagation arrive at the receiver at diﬀerent times.1: 2Spectrum of an2 OFDM4 signal. the symbol boundaries and causing energy leakage between the OFDM symbols. This is the result of the symbol time corresponding to the inverse of the carrier spacing.
1 shows the structure of an OFDM symbol. as long as the signiﬁcant part of the impulse response experienced by the transmitted signal. If they are no constant. Tg is the length of the guard period in samples.3 . and thus.APPENDIX A.3 . This decreasing is expressed by R(1 − Tg /Tsym ). First. The CP is prepended to the transmitted symbol and removed at the receiver before the demodulation. causing a loss in the SNR. Then.3 . where Tsym is the total length of the symbol in samples. resulting in ICI. and Tb is the size of the IFFT used to generate the OFDM signal.1 gives the SNR loss due to the insertion of the CP. it should be. allowing some time for the transient signal to decay. it should be as small as possible because the transmitted energy increases with its length. However. thus extending the length of the symbol waveform. One the other hand. at least. representing the useful symbol time. the beneﬁt obtained for the addition of a cyclic preﬁx is twofold. Moreover. Seconds. it avoids ISI acting as a guard band between two successive symbols. a guard period to the start of each symbol is added. This guard period. OFDM THEORY 92 constant over a period of the symbol in order to maintain the orthogonality of the subcarriers.3 . Equation A.1: Addition of the cyclic preﬁx to an OFDM signal. Consequently. which is called the cyclic preﬁx (CP). avoiding ISI and ICI.1) . it converts the linear convolution with the channel impulse response into a cyclic convolution. the total length of the symbol can be written as Tsym = Tg +Tb . CP CP Tg Tb Tsym Figure A. On one hand. Figure A. the length of the cyclic preﬁx has to be chosen carefully. the spectral shape will not have nulls at the correct frequencies. SN Rloss = −10 log10 1 − Tg Tsym (A. is a copy of the last part of the OFDM symbol. the number of symbols per second that are transmitted per Hz of bandwidth also decreases with the CP. In order to combat the eﬀects of ISI on an OFDM signal.
which are the OFDM symbols. . .m (frequency index k. the cyclic preﬁx is removed. .m . and then. xk. using a single tap equalizer followed by a slicer. the incoming data stream is grouped in blocks of Nc data symbols. This estimated symbol is obtained by dividing each received data symbol by its corresponding channel coeﬃcient.m .m Figure A. In the transmitter. . the data symbol yk. and an additive white Gaussian noise. 3 . xNc1.m w(n) . F F T . transmitter and receiver. OFDM symbol m) is obtained by performing the FFT operation Moreover. the sum of a linear convolution with the discrete channel impulse response. are perfectly synchronized. can be estimated from the received data symbols. It has to be said that it is implicitly assumed that the channel fading is slow enough to consider it constant during one symbol. an IFFT is performed on each data symbol block and a cyclic preﬁx of length Ng is added. yk. and can be represented by a vector xm . The received signal is. . and both. M U X s(n) h(n) r(n) D E M U X y0.m yNc1. OFDM signals are typically generated digitally due to the diﬃculty in creating large banks of phase lock oscillators and receivers in the analog domain. . . w(n). At the receiver. Next.4 The OFDM system model CP x0.1: Model of an OFDM system. . Figure A. A more detailed analysis of the mathematical expressions of the OFDM conforming process can be found in [32] and [33].APPENDIX A. h(n). generally.4 . the transmitted data symbols.4 .m . OFDM THEORY 93 A.1 shows the block diagram of a such an OFDM system3 . I F F T .
inside one wide band. .APPENDIX A. When working with timevariant channels. the delay time of reﬂected waves is suppressed to within one symbol time. are derived for a timeinvariant channel. Increasing the number of parallel transmission channels reduces the data rate that each individual carrier must convey. as well as the OFDM system model.5 Summary After the explanation given about OFDM. This is achieved by transmitting many narrowband overlapping digital signals in parallel. a more complex system is needed to model such behaviour [32] [33]. In those cases. the variations erode the orthogonality of the subcarriers and cause ICI or "FFT leakage". As a result. OFDM THEORY 94 A. The basics that have been explained. it can be said that OFDM is a wideband modulation scheme that is speciﬁcally able to cope with the problems of the multipath reception. and that lengthens the symbol period.
Appendix B Derivation of formulas
B.1 Description of the correlation matrices
The correlation matrices describing correlation properties at both ends of a communication system are explained in this appendix. These parameters can be extracted from measurement results, but they can also be derived from singleinput multipleoutput (SIMO) results already published in the open literature [31].
s1(t)
y1(t)
s2(t) s(t)
. . . . . . . . .
scattering medium
y2(t)
. . . . . . . . .
y(t)
sNT(t) NT transmit antennas NR receive antennas
yNR(t)
Figure B.1  1: A MIMO channel model in a scattering environment. Figure B.1  1 shows a MIMO scenario with NT transmit antennas and NR receive antennas. The signals at the transmit antenna array are denoted by the vector s(t) = [s1 (t), s2 (t), ..., sNT (t)]T , and similarly, the signals at the receiver are y(t) = [y1 (t), y2 (t), ..., yNR (t)]T , where (·)T denotes transposition, 95
APPENDIX B. DERIVATION OF FORMULAS
96
and sm (t) and yn (t) are the signals at the mth transmit antenna port and at the nth receive antenna port, respectively. The ﬂat fading MIMO radio channel describing the connection between transmitter and receiver can be expressed as α11 α12 · · · α1NT α21 α22 · · · α2NT H= . (B.1  1) , . . ... . . . . . . αNR 1 αNR 2 · · · αNR NT where αnm is the complex transmission coeﬃcient from antenna m at the transmitter to antenna n at the receiver, and it has been assumed to be complex Gaussian distributed with identical average power. The relation between the vectors s(t) and y(t) can be expressed as y(t) = H(t)s(t). (B.1  2)
Assuming that all antenna elements have the same polarization and the same radiation pattern, the spatial complex correlation coeﬃcient at the transmitter between antennas m1 and m2 is given by Equation B.1  3, where the spatial correlation coeﬃcient at the transmitter, ρTXm2 , is assumed to m1 be independent of n. Similarly, the spatial complex correlation coeﬃcient observed at the receive side, ρRX 2 , deﬁned in Equation B.1  4, is assumed to n1 n be independent of m: ρTXm2 = αnm1 , αnm2 , (B.1  3) m1 ρRX 2 = αn1 m , αn2 m . n1 n (B.1  4)
The operation a, b 1 denotes an inner product between a and b, and is calculated as a, b = E{ab∗ }/(σa σb ), where σa is the standard deviation of the variable a, and (·)∗ performs the conjugation operation. The symmetrical complex correlation matrices can be deﬁned from both, Equation B.1  3 and Equation B.1  4: ρTX ρTX · · · ρTXT 11 12 1N ρTX∗ ρTX · · · ρTX 22 2NT 21 RT = . , (B.1  5) . . .. . . . . . . . ρTX∗ ρTX∗ · · · ρTXNT N ×N NT 1 NT 2 NT
T T
1
a, b = b, a
∗
APPENDIX B. DERIVATION OF FORMULAS
97
RR =
ρRX 11 ρRX∗ 21 . . .
ρRX 12 ρRX 22 . . .
··· ··· .. .
ρRXR 1N ρRXR 2N . . .
NR ×NR
.
(B.1  6)
ρRX∗ ρRX∗ · · · ρRXNR NR 1 NR 2 NR
Moreover, the correlation coeﬃcient between two arbitrary transmission coeﬃcients connecting two diﬀerent sets of antennas is expressed as ρm1 n1 = αn1 m1 , αn2 m2 = ρTXm2 ρRX 2 . n1 n m1 m2 n2 (B.1  7)
Finally, it can be deducted from all this mathematical analysis that the spatial correlation matrix of the MIMO radio channel is represented by the Kronecker product of the spatial correlation matrices in both transmit and receive ends, and is given by RMIMO = RT ⊗ RR , where ⊗ represents the Kronecker product [31].
B.2
Estimation of the transmitted symbols when • 2x1 Alamouti Scheme using Spacetime coding STC
• STC with rate 1
(f1) t1
B.2.1
Alamouti with one receive antenna
2 input symbols are transmitted in two time steps
(f0) t0
1 s 2 0
Input s = (s0s1)
1 s* 2 1
Output r = (r0r1)
1 s* 2 0
1 s 2 1
The received symbols are:
Figure B.2  1: 2×1 Alamouti scheme. As shown in Figure B.2  1, the signal obtained at the receiver side when using the Alamouti algorithm is deﬁned as 1 h1 h2 s0 n0 =√ + . (B.2  1) ∗ ∗ s1 n∗ 2 h2 −h1 1 The estimated transmitted signal is then calculated from the formula ∗ s = Hν H y, where y = [r0 , r1 ]T . r0 ∗ r1
2. the estimated transmit signal is given by s = Hν H y ⇓ s0 s1 1 = √ Hν H Hν 2 1 =√ 2 1 =√ 2 1 =√ 2 h2 h∗ 1 ∗ h2 −h1 h1 h2 ∗ h2 −h∗ 1 = Hν H s0 s1 r0 ∗ r1 + Hν H = n0 n∗ 1 = s0 s1 + h2 h∗ 1 ∗ h2 −h1 n0 n∗ 1 = h∗ h1 + h2 h∗ h∗ h2 − h2 h∗ 1 2 1 1 h∗ h1 − h1 h∗ h∗ h2 + h1 h∗ 2 2 2 1 h1 2 + h2 2 0 2 0 h1  + h2 2 1 0 0 1 s0 s1 s0 s1 s0 s1 + + h∗ n0 + h2 n∗ 1 1 h∗ n0 − h1 n∗ 2 1 h∗ n0 + h2 n∗ 1 1 h∗ n0 − h1 n∗ 1 2 = = + = 1 = √ (h1 2 + h2 2 ) 2 h∗ n0 + h2 n∗ 1 1 h∗ n0 − h1 n∗ 1 2 1 = √ h2 I2 s + n. (B. • I2 is the 2×2 identity matrix. the result is represented in Equation B. • s = [s0 .APPENDIX B. DERIVATION OF FORMULAS The hermitian of the virtual channel matrix is Hν H = h2 h∗ 1 ∗ h2 −h1 . s1 ]T represents the transmitted symbols. 98 Finally.2) 2 Once the corresponding operations for estimating the transmitted signal have been performed. .2 .2 . and • n= h∗ n0 h2 n∗ 1 1 h∗ n0 −h1 n∗ 2 1 is some modiﬁed noise. where: • h2 = h1 2 + h2 2 is the power gain of the channel.
The estimation of the transmitted symbols is performed as follows: r0 (1) r (2) 1 H = Hν H 0 ∗ r1 (1) = √2 Hν Hν ∗ r1 (2) n0 (1) n (2) + Hν H 0 n∗ (1) = 1 n∗ (2) 1 s0 s1 s0 s1 .3) s1 h21 −h11 1 n∗ (2) h∗ −h∗ 12 22 1 The estimated transmitted signal can be calculated from s = HH y. The received signal from r0 (1) r (2) 1 = √ y= 0 ∗ r1 (1) 2 ∗ r1 (2) a 2 × 2 Alamouti scheme.2 .2. where ν ∗ ∗ y = [r0 (1)r0 (2)r1 (1)r1 (2)]T . as depicted above. is expressed as h11 h21 h12 h22 Hν = ∗ h21 −h∗ . Hν .APPENDIXAlamouti Scheme OF FORMULAS • 2x1 B. the hermitian of the virtual channel matrix is HH = ν h∗ h∗ h21 h22 11 12 ∗ ∗ h21 h22 −h11 −h12 .2 . DERIVATION Spacetime coding (f1) t1 (f0) t0 1 s 2 0 99 B. The virtual channel matrix. is h11 h21 n0 (1) n (2) h12 h22 s0 + 0 ∗ ∗ n∗ (1) . 11 h∗ −h∗ 22 12 Therefore.2: 2×2 Alamouti scheme.2 • STC with rate 1 Alamouti with two receive antennas 2 input symbols are transmitted in two time steps n0 h11 h12 h21 h22 Receiver Output (r0r1)T 1 s* 2 1 Input s = (s0s1) STC 1 s* 2 0 1 s 2 1 n1 Figure B. (B.
4) 2 2 2 2 Equation B.4 expresses the obtained result for the process of estimating the transmitted symbols. • h2 = h1 2 + h2 2 = h11 2 + h21 2 + h12 2 + h22 2 is the power gain 2 2 of the channel.2 . DERIVATION OF FORMULAS 100 1 =√ 2 h21 h22 h∗ h∗ 12 11 ∗ ∗ h21 h22 −h11 −h12 h11 h21 h12 h22 ∗ h21 −h∗ 11 h∗ −h∗ 22 12 1 0 0 1 s0 s1 +n= 1 = √ (h11 2 + h21 2 + h12 2 + h22 2 ) 2 s0 s1 +n= 1 1 = √ ( h1 2 + h2 2 )I2 + n = √ h2 I2 s + n. represents some .APPENDIX B. • s is the transmitted signal. (B. As described in the previous section: • I2 is the 2 × 2 identity matrix. and • n = h∗ n0 (1) + h∗ n0 (2) + h21 n∗ (1) + h22 n∗ (2) 11 12 1 1 h∗ n0 (1) + h∗ n0 (2) − h11 n∗ (1) − h12 n∗ (2) 21 22 1 1 modiﬁed noise.2 .
used with BW and Nused (number of nonzero subcarriers) to determine the subcarrier spacing and the useful symbol time. Five are the primitive parameters that characterize the OFDM symbol: • BW : nominal channel bandwidth. • Ndata : number of data subcarriers. a copy of the last part of the useful symbol period. The number of these subcarriers will determine the required size for the FFT (or IFFT) algorithm. and null subcarriers used for guard bands and the zero DC oﬀset. deﬁned in terms of the primitive ones.1 C. termed cyclic preﬁx (CP). • Npilot : number of pilot subcarriers. • G: ratio of CP time to useful time.1. 101 . some parameters can be deﬁned. • nf : sampling factor. Once the OFDM signal is converted into time domain. is appended at the beginning of each symbol to maintain the orthogonality of the tones.1 Parameters description OFDM symbol description An OFDM symbol is composed by three types of subcarriers. The standard [4] (see page 428) deﬁnes two types of parameters. that will be speciﬁed by users or system requirements. the primitive parameters. data.Appendix C Parameters of the simulator C. pilots. and the derived parameters. From all these OFDM symbol characteristics.
Tsym = Tb + Tg • Ts : sampling time. Nused = Ndata + Npilot • NFFT : number of points used to perform the FFT. ∆f = • Tb : useful symbol time. derived parameters. are listed: • Nused : number of used nonzero subcarriers. and greater than Nused . It is speciﬁed to be the smallest power of two. which are dependent of the primitive parameters. PARAMETERS OF THE SIMULATOR 102 Next. NFFT = 2 • Fs : sampling frequency. Tg = GTb • Tsym : OFDM symbol time. Fs = • ∆f : subcarrier spacing. Tb = • Tg : CP time. Ts = nf BW 8000 8000 log2 (Ndata ) Fs NFFT 1 ∆f Tb NFFT .APPENDIX C.
• Tframe : frame duration.APPENDIX C. Ntxdata = Ndata NOFDM • Ntcb : total number of coded bits per allocation subchannel per OFDM symbol. Spacket = NOFDM RNdata Ma . Ntxsym = Nused NOFDM • Spacket : packet size transmitted by the source. the packet size. NTsym = NOFDM + Ntrain • Ntxdata : number of transmitted data symbols. other parameters are required in order to deﬁne parameters for the transmission.2 Transmission parameters Besides the parameters that describe the OFDM symbol. NOFDM = Tframe Tsym • NTsym : total number of transmitted symbols in one frame. they are classiﬁed either in primary or in secondary parameters.1. such as the frame duration. The primary parameters are: • Ntrain : number of training symbols in one frame. PARAMETERS OF THE SIMULATOR 103 C. Ntcb = Ntxdata Ma • Ntxsym : total number of transmitted symbols. • NOFDM : number of transmitted OFDM symbols in one frame. As in the previous section. or the total number of transmitted OFDM symbols. The following parameters depend on either parameters deﬁning the OFDM symbol or the transmission.
the following default values were used: • Sampling frequency of the channel simulator: fsam = 100 MHz • Speed of light: c = 3 · 108 m/s • Carrier frequency: fc = 2 GHz • Velocity of the mobile subscriber. This parameter deﬁnes the number of sinusoids used for the RosaZheng time variantchannel model.3 Channel parameters In order to deﬁne the channel model. In the simulations.1. PARAMETERS OF THE SIMULATOR 104 C.APPENDIX C. v: variant • Maximum doppler frequency: fd = v fcc • Number of paths of the timevariant channel model: Npath = 8. several parameters need to be speciﬁed. .
1/8. nf = 86/75 3. +102. nf = 8/7 2. +127 −88.. being an integer multiple of 1. These values are given in Table C.75 MHz 1. −101 +101.5 or 1. For channel bandwidths multiple of 1. 4. +88 2. −63.APPENDIX C. For channel bandwidhts multiple of 2.. +38. 1/32 28 27 −128.75 MHz. −13 +13. 12.25 MHz. 1. 8.. 20 nf G Number of lower frequency guard subcarriers Number of higher frequency guard subcarriers Frequency oﬀset indices of guard subcarriers Frequency oﬀset indices of pilot carriers Tframe (msec) Table C. For channel bandwidths not otherwise speciﬁed. −38.4 Parameter values Furthermore.25 to 20 MHz. from 1. . −127. PARAMETERS OF THE SIMULATOR 105 C. For channel bandwidths multiple of 1.5..1 . For channel bandwidths multiple of 2. nf = 57/50 6. +63.5. nf = 316/275 5. nf = 8/7 1/4..0 MHz. nf = 144/125 4. the required values for some of these parameters are described in the standard. 10.1. For channel bandwidths multiple of 1.1.1: Values for primary parameters.25.5 MHz.. 5. Parameter Ndata Npilot Ntrain BW Value 192 8 3 Variable. 1/16.1 . .75 MHz. .
1: Diﬀerences between WiMAX and WiFi parameters.2.1. PARAMETERS OF THE SIMULATOR 106 C.2 . there are several diﬀerences between WiMAX and WiFi systems. WiFi simulator As already mentioned in Section 1. In this way.25 to 20 MHz) CC+RS variable WiFi 48 4 64 ﬁxed (20 MHz) CC ﬁxed Ndata Npilot NFFT BW Coding CP Table C. both simulators will diﬀer from each other in some parameter values.2 WiMAX vs. The main diﬀerences between both are summarized in the following chart: WiMAX 192 8 256 variable (1.APPENDIX C. .
Once the data from the source is mapped into QAM symbols. allowing diﬀerent coding rates. therefore it is called PEVEN . If only one antenna is transmitting.Appendix D WiMAX simulator block diagram In order to have a general view of the WiMAX simulator described through the thesis.1). Preambles are formed with a short training sequence. as explained.0 . 8 pilot subcarriers. encoders. Depending on the number of transmit antennas. As mentioned in Chapter 2. a complete block diagram of the Simulink model ﬁle is given in this appendix (see Figure D. each of which is optimized to work with a diﬀerent data rate depending on the modulation and coding scheme being used. Furthermore. the long training sequence utilizes even subcarriers. followed by a long training sequence. An OFDM symbol is composed by 192 data subcarriers. Because the STC scheme achieves diversity by transmitting with two antennas. data from a binary source is ﬁrst encoded and mapped into QAM symbols. 1 zero DC subcarrier. another long training sequence shall be used when transmitting spacetime coded downlink bursts. consists on a concatenation of an outer ReedSolomon encoder with an inner convolutional encoder. two kinds of long training sequences are used. the OFDM symbols must be constructed. It is a ﬂexible coding process due to the puncturing of the signal. a preamble has to be transmitted from both transmit antennas simultaneously. Thus. However. It is composed of a bank of seven diﬀerent sources. and mappers. The encoder. A brief description of the diﬀerent blocks is exposed with the purpose of oﬀering a better understanding of the ﬁgure. The last part of the encoder is a process of interleaving to avoid large blocks of bit errors. and the FCH1 . the ﬁrst antenna transmits a preamble using PEVEN 1 Frame Control Header 107 . preambles consisting of 3 OFDM symbols are appended at the beginning of each frame. and 55 guard carriers. The block "Coding TX" performs these operations.
WIMAX SIMULATOR BLOCK DIAGRAM 108 and the preamble transmitted from the second antenna is set according to the sequence PODD . Blocks "Pilot". which uses. respectively. pilots. After the assembling process. pilot. which is implemented in the block "Channel Model". thus allowing the system to overcome timeselective fading. inserting zeros as the inverse process of puncturing. in this case. a process to separate all these subcarriers is needed. a subset of odd subcarriers. deals with the task of rearranging data.1. "Training Ant. and some guard bands. are performed in the "Decoding RX" block. The estimated channel coeﬃcients can be used in the demapper to realize an equalization of the data symbols to compensate the frequencyselective fading of the multipath propagation channel. and then. data is decoded following the inverse steps as performed in the transmitter (deinterleaving. OFDM data symbols are obtained after rearranging the data vector from the "Coding TX" block in a matrix form that has 192 rows (number of data subcarriers in an OFDM symbol). and trainings. Then.APPENDIX D. the signal is sent over the channel. Thus. trainings. the signal is converted to the time domain and the cyclic preﬁx is added. data. and "Training Ant. As its analogous block. trainings. a feedback mechanism of adaptive modulation and coding (AMC) is performed in order to allow the system to shift modulation scheme and so. This AMC mechanism works by estimating the SNR of the channel. called "Assembler". . if Alamouti coding is selected in a parameter ﬁle. maintain the connection quality and link stability. These operations are performed in the "Calculate AMC" block. Otherwise. 0". the guard bands are removed. changing modulation and coding. as explained in Section 2. demapping and decoding. "STC" performs the Alamouti algorithm described in Section 5. an OFDM symbol consists of data. The cyclic preﬁx is removed from each symbol and the signal is converted to the frequency domain using an FFT algorithm. First. and depending on the desired conditions of the channel established by a given target BER. Moreover. As it has been told before. where the appropriate modulation and coding scheme is selected by the AMC signal explained next. The next block. the 55 guard bands are appended at the end of each frame. and zero DC subcarrier. To end. and ReedSolomon decoding). this block has no impact on the signal. 1" generate the pilot and both training sequences. a zero DC subcarrier. it consists of a bank of seven demappers and decoders. The trainings are utilized in the "Channel estimator". The receiver performs the reverse operations to get the transmitted data. Viterbi decoding of the convolutional code. Furthermore.6.2 to the OFDM data symbols. These two last steps. a disassembling is performed to obtain pilots.
87 Channel Estimator APPENDIX D.1: Simulink block diagram of the WiMAX simulator.0 . 0 [201x3] Train0 Train1 Data [201x366] Sym Zero Padding [201x366] [256x366] [201x3] [1x180] [320x366] Pilot IFFT [256x366] [256x366] Add CP Training Ant. 1 [192x360] [34560x1] [34560x1] [155520x1] [207360x1] [155520x1] [155520x1] AMC RX [7x1] FER/BER [7x1] TX [201x3] [201x3] Symbols Group Data for OFDM Symbols STC [192x180] [192x360] AMC Data Bits Code Bits [320x366] Coding TX CodedErrorvec Channel Model [320x183] [207360x1] [207360x1] AMC RX FER/BER [7x1] TX [384x1 UncodedErrorvec AMC [155520x1] [34560x1] Sym [384x1] [201x183] [201x3] Train [201x3] [384x1] Data Data Bits Data Remove Zeros [207360x1] Code Bits [256x183] FFT [256x183] [256x183] Remove CP [320x183] Channel Decoding RX SNR [dB] 3 AMC 1 Z Estimated SNR AMC Target BER 19. .Pilot [1x180] Training Ant. WIMAX SIMULATOR BLOCK DIAGRAM AMC TargetBER Calculate AMC 109 Figure D.
Appendix E Abbreviations and Symbols E.1 3G 3GPP 4G AAS AMC AP ARQ AWGN BER BS BTC CC CIR CP CSI CTC DC DFS DL DSL FCH FDD FDM FEC List of abbreviations Third Generation Third Generation Partnership Project Fourth Generation Adaptive Antenna System Adaptive Modulation and Coding Access Point Automatic Retransmission Request Additive White Gaussian Noise Bit Error Rate Base Station Block Turbo Coding Convolutional Coding Channel Impulse Response Cyclic Preﬁx Channel State Information Convolutional Turbo Coding Direct Current Dynamic Frequency Selection DownLink Digital Subscriber Line Frame Control Header Frequency Division Duplexing Frequency Division Multiplexing Forward Error Correction 110 .
IEEE IFFT IMETRA IMT IP IQ ISI LGPL LLR LoS LS LSE MAC MAN MAP MEA MIMO MISO MRC MS MSS NLoS OFDM OFDMA PAM PDA pdf PDP PRBS QAM QoS RRC RF RMS RS SC 111 Fast Fourier Transform Galois Field High Speed Downlink Packet Access InterCarrier Interference Independent Identically Distributed Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inverse Fast Fourier Transform Intelligent MultiElement Transmit and Receive Antennas International Mobile Telecommunications Internet Protocol Inphase Quadraturephase InterSymbol Interference Lesser General Public License LogLikelihood Ratio Line of Sight Least Squares Least Squares Estimation Medium Access Control Metropolitan Area Network Maximum A Posteriori MultiElement Antenna MultipleInput MultipleOutput MultipleInput SimpleOutput Maximum Ratio Combining Mobile Station Mobile Subscriber Station Non Line of Sight Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access Pulse Amplitude Modulation Personal Digital Assistant Probability Density Function Power Delay Proﬁle PseudoRandom Binary Sequence Quadrature Amplitude Modulation Quality of Service RootRaised Cosine Radio Frequency Root Mean Square ReedSolomon Single Carrier .APPENDIX E.i. ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS FFT GF HSDPA ICI i.d.
ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS SIMO SINR SISO SNR SOHO SS SS STBC STC TDD TDM TDMA UL UMTS VoIP WCDMA WiFi WiMAX WLAN WMAN SingleInput MultipleOutput SignaltoInterferenceplusNoise Ratio SingleInput SingleOutput SignaltoNoise Ratio SmallOﬃce HomeOﬃce Spread Spectrum Subscriber Station SpaceTime Block Coding SpaceTime Coding Time Division Duplexing Time Division Multiplexing Time Division Multiple Access UpLink Universal Mobile Telecommunications System Voice over IP Wideband Code Division Multiple Access WirelessFidelity Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access Wireless Local Area Network Wireless Metropolitan Area Network 112 .APPENDIX E.
τ ) H Hrc (f ) Hrrc (f ) List of symbols Continuoustime convolution Complex conjugation operation Inversion operation Transposition Hermitian operation Binary inversion of the sequence a Vector that represents the points in the constellation map Bit on position k Coherence bandwidth Doppler spread Target BER Nominal channel bandwidth Speed of light Tap coeﬃcients Amplitude of the fading component Normalization factor in the modulation map Set of complex numbers Euclidean distance Mathematical expectation Bit energy to noise rate Carrier frequency Doppler frequency Maximum Doppler shift Nyquist frequency Rayleigh fading distribution Rice fading distribution Sampling frequency of the channel simulator Sampling frequency of the OFDM symbol Ratio of the CP time to the useful symbol time Channel gain matrix Vector of channel coeﬃcients Channel coeﬃcients estimates Channel impulse response Channel timevarying impulse response Baseband equivalent impulse response of the channel Channel matrix Raised cosine ﬁlter frequency response Rootraised cosine ﬁlter frequency response . ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS 113 E.2 ⊗ (·)∗ (·)−1 (·)T (·)H a As bk Bcoh Bd BER0 BW c ci (t) C Cm C dE E{} Eb /N0 fc fd fM fN fRay (a) fRice (a) fsam Fs G G h ˆ h h(t) h(t. τ ) hb (t.APPENDIX E.
APPENDIX E. probability of y given s Probability of bit error Probability of bit error per carrier Frequency domain sequence from which are derived all full bandwidth preambles . with zero mean and unit variance Vector containing the pilot subcarriers Conditional probability. 1) ps p(ys) Pb Pbc PALL 114 Frequency response of the receive ﬁlter Frequency response of the transmit ﬁlter Virtual channel matrix Vector for the interleaving matrix Modiﬁed Bessel function of ﬁrst kind and order zero 2 × 2 identity matrix Number of uncoded bits that enter the RS encoder Rice distribution factor Length of the binary sequences of a Galois ﬁeld GF(2l ) Number of multipath components Number of transmit antennas Number of transmitted bits per symbol (modulation alphabet) Number of coded bytes at the output of the RS encoder Average noise power Noise vector Modiﬁed noise vector Sampling factor. ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS HR (f ) HT (f ) Hν I I0 I2 k K l L NT Ma n n n n nf NR Nc Ncolumns Ncpc Ndata NFFT NOFDM Npath Nrows NRS Ntcb Ntrain Ntxdata Ntxsym NTsym Nused NC (0. used in the deﬁnition of the OFDM symbol Number of receive antennas Number of subbands the OFDM signal is divided in Number of columns in the interleaving matrix Number of transmitted bits per symbol Number of used data subcarriers Number of points used when performing the FFT algorithm Number of transmitted OFDM symbols in one frame Number of paths of the timevariant channel model Number of rows in the interleaving matrix Number of blocks used in the RS encoder Total number of coded bits Number of training symbols per frame Number of transmitted data symbols Total number of transmitted OFDM symbols Total number of transmitted symbols in one frame Number of used nonzero subcarriers Set of complex numbers.
that is transmitted by the source Symbol block matrix Number of bytes a RS encoder can correct Useful symbol time Coherence time CP symbol time Frame duration Multipath spread Sampling time of the OFDM symbol OFDM symbol time Vehicle speed Output of the PRBS generator Signal bandwidth Vector containing the received symbol Rolloﬀ factor Complex transmission coeﬃcient from antenna m to antenna n Weight factor SNR threshold Dirac delta function Subcarrier spacing Property operator Angle of arrival of the received signal component Phase delay of a multipath signal Power of the received nonfading signal Spatial correlation coeﬃcient at the transmitter .APPENDIX E. in bits. ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS PEVEN PODD PSHORT Q(x) r R Re{} RMIMO RR Rsym RT s s s Spacket S t Tb Tcoh Tg Tframe Tm Ts Tsym v wk W y α αnm βi γn δ(t) ∆f ϕ φ ρ2 ρTX ij 115 Frequency domain sequence for long training symbols constructed with even subcarriers of PALL Frequency domain sequence for long training symbols constructed with odd subcarriers of PALL Frequency domain sequence for short training symbols Complementary Gaussian error function Vector of received symbols Overall rate Operation to extract the real part Spatial correlation matrix of the MIMO channel Transmit correlation matrix Symbol rate Receive correlation matrix Average signal power Vector containing the transmitted symbols Transmit symbol estimates Packet size.
APPENDIX E. ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS ρRX ij σx στ 2 σv θ τ 116 Spatial correlation coeﬃcient at the receiver Standard deviation of x RMS delay spread Noise variance Phase alteration experienced by the multipath fading signal Channel multipath delay .
com/netcomms/technologies/wimax/304471. Part 16: Air Interface for Fixed Broadband Wireless Access Systems. pp. Levesque: ”Error Control Techniques for Digital Communications. [9] A. Enginyeria Informàtica. http://www. Part I: A Technical Overview and Performance Evaluation.intel.com/netcomms/technologies/wimax [7] T.16 IEEE Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks.Bibliography [1] S. 98107. M.” WileyInterscience Publications. Cooklev: ”Wireless Communication Standards. 2004. 2001.16TM . 1985. H. and S. Eklund.” August 2006. http://www. Wang: ”IEEE Standard 802. and A. and 802. Stanwood. 2004. June 2004. 802.org/tutorial [6] WiMAX Forum: ”Mobile WiMAX. K. [4] LAN/MAN Standards Committee: ”802.” IEEE Communications Magazine. R. Sampei: ”Applications of Digital Wireless Technologies to Global Wireless Communications. 117 . [5] C. L. Stavroulakis: ”Third generation mobile telecommunication systems: UMTS and IMT2000. [8] P. WiFi and WiMAX Solutions: ”Understanding WiFi and WiMAX as MetroAccess Solutions. 1997. [2] Intel White Paper.” Intel Corporation.” Standards Information Networks IEEE Press.pdf [3] J. Universitat Oberta de Catalunya.16: A Technical Overview of the WirelessMAN Air Interface for Broadband Wireless Access.” Master Thesis. Pino Lacosta: ”WiMAX: una alternativa d’accés a les xarxes.” Springer.” Prentice Hall. B.intel. October 2004. http://www.wirelessman.11TM . A Study of IEEE 802. Marks.” IEEE Standards. June 2002. Michelson.15TM .
Lawrey: ”Adaptive Techniques for Multiuser OFDM. Proceedings on the second IEE/EURASIP on DSP enabled Radio. http://www. Jakes: ”Microwave Mobile Communications.” Master Thesis. and G. pp.” IEEE Transactions on Information Theory.pdf [13] T. 1995. pp. 2. Ramasami: ”A Primer on Root Raised Cosine Filter Design. 1994. C.ac.ku.” Ph.” ETRI Journal. Tech Gate Vienna.at/files/pubet_10207. J. Rupp. S. P. http://www. 1996. McEliece.” December 2004.” Institute of Communications and RF Engineering.skydsp. Department of Electrical. Thesis.up. 291300.ittc. vol. Staphorst: ”Viterbi decoded linear block codes for narrowband and wideband wireless communication over mobile fading channels. Stark: ”Channels with block interference. [15] W.” Prentice Hall. no. vol. Rappaport: ”Wireless Communications: principles and practice. University of Pretoria. and W. no.BIBLIOGRAPHY 118 [10] S. Georgia Institute of Technology. September 2005. 46. Prentice Hall.kr/Cyber/servlet/BrowseAbstract?paperid =RP05080161 [19] ”The Matlab help: Communications Blockset. Wicker: ”Error Control Systems for Digital Communication and Storage. July 2005. 28.” http://www. 325343. Electronic and Computer Engineering. [14] R. V.com .re. Kaltenberger. D.tuwien.: ”General LogLikelihood Ratio Expression and its Implementation Algorithm for GrayCoded QAM Signals. http://publik. [16] L.ac. E. Humer: ”A Scalable Rapid Prototyping System for RealTime MIMO OFDM Transmissions. School of Engineering. M.pdf [18] Ki Seol Kim et al. Vienna University of Technology. June 2006. December 2001. and ARC Seibersdorf Research GmbH. [11] E.mathworks. March 2000.” School of Electrical and Computer Engineering.etri. James Cook Univeristy. http://etrij.za/thesis/available/etd08082005120839/ [17] C.edu/ rvc/documents/rcdes.” IEEE Press. 3.com/publications [12] K. Mehlführer. B. F. http://upetd.
no. [28] A. R. Yang. Germany. 6. no. http://www.at/files/pubet_8504. October 1008. 744765. Tokyo. E. 6. Awater: ”Space division multiplexing (SDM) for OFDM systems.stanford.tuwien. and M. Tarokh. Gans: ”On Limits of Wireless Communication in a Fading Environment when Using Multiple Antennas. 14511458.ac. van Zelst. J.” Ph. [22] S.BIBLIOGRAPHY 119 [20] I. Gritsch. 585595.” European Transactions on Telecommunications.istimetra. Erlangen. no. Munich. [21] G. pp. Goldsmith.” Wireless Personal Communications. 1998. and M. Alamouti: ”A Simple Transmit Diversity Technique for Wireless Communications. October 1998.pdf [24] G. Technical Memorandum. Calderbank: ”Spacetime codes for high data rate wireless communication: performance criterion and code construction. G.” Institute for Communications and Radio Frequency Engineering. vol. Foschini. 10701074. Germany. H. 5. Seshadri. 1998. no. pp. 311335. October 2005. January 2004. and F. [26] A. vol. Telatar: ”Capacity of MultiAntenna Gaussian Channels. 44. R. M. Kaltenberger: ”MIMO Algorithms for Wireless LAN. vol. [23] D. pp. G. 5th International ITG Conference on Source and Channel Coding (SCC04). no. Pérez Palomar: ”A Uniﬁed Framework for Communications through MIMO Channels.” Proceedings Wireless Congress. Thesis. Weinrichter. May 1998. Bell Laboratories. Spring 2000. vol. Chua: ”Adaptive Coded Modulation for Fading Channels. Lucent Technologies. 2. [27] V. pp.edu/ ee359/adapt_cod. 10. vol.” IEEE 51st Vehicular Technology Conference (VTC) Proceedings. J. May 2003. and S. Kolar. Departament de Teoria del Senyal i Comunicacions. vol. 16. van Nee. http://publik. and G. Rupp: ”Two Adaptive SpaceTime Block Coded MIMO Systems Exploiting Partial Channel Knowledge at the Transmitter. A. N. J. Vienna University of Technolgoy. pp. 2.pdf . Universitat Politècnica de Catalunya. D.” IEEE Transactions on Communications. http://wsl. 46.” IEEE Journal on Selected Areas in Communications.” IEEE Transactions on Information Theory. 8.pdf [25] S.org/thesis/Palomar_phd_thesis. and A. 595602. 1999. 3. pp.
” New York Springer.” IEEE Transaction on Communications. and B.ecs. August 2002. Prentice Hall. Pedersen. [32] M. vol. 88.Saltzberg: ”Multicarrier digital communications: theory and applications of OFDM. [33] R.soton. Hanzo: ”Adaptive Multicarrier Modulation: A Convenient Framework for TimeFrequency Processing in Wireless Communications. Engels: ”Wireless OFDM systems. 2001. I. Couch: ”Digital and Analog Communication Systems. K. R . W. P. E. pp. 5. How to make them work?. http://eprints. no.” IEEE Journal on Selected Areas in Communications. S.”. Bahai. P. Frederiksen: ”A Stochastic MIMO Radio Channel Model with Experimental Validation. . Mogensen. 2002. May 2000. 2004. 611640. Keller. Kluwer Academic. 12111226.” 6th edition. and F. pp. no. 6. [31] L. Schumacher.BIBLIOGRAPHY 120 [29] T. Kermoal. 20.uk/4099 [30] L. J. and L.ac. vol.